Home

User's Guide Copy Operations

1. Face Up 22 08 2008 14 01 Henory 100 To cancel the Staple setting touch None When a Staple setting is selected the Sort setting is automatically selected The following settings cannot be used together with a Staple setting Offset Face Up 3 72 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 Touch Position Setting Select the stapling position and then touch OK When the 2 Position Staple setting is selected guto Paper 100 0 Job List Select Specify the position in relation to the document orientation Finishing gt Position Setting Copies Staple Top Staple Right 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 When the Corner Staple setting is selected guto Paper 100 0 Job List Select Check Details Specify the position in relation to the document orientation Finishing gt Position Setting Copies Corner Staple
2. a ae ANG aS Pi 2 1 7 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 Before making copies Finisher FS 525 No Part name Description 1 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge 2 Main finishing tray Tray 2 Collects printed pages 3 Sub finishing tray Tray 1 Collects printed pages 4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 6 Misfeed clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 8 Stacker unit Removed when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge 9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replac ing the staple cartridge 10 Handle FN7 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit 11 Misfeed clearing dial FN6 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 12 Guide lever FN5 Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds No Part name Description 13 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Fin isher FS 525
3. 100 0 Front Cover None A Front Blank Check Details Paper ter Cover Sheet E 07 11 2008 11 42 Memory 100 f paper for cover pages has been loaded in the main unit continue with step 6 If paper for cover pages has been loaded in a tray of the post inserter continue with step 9 If desired touch Paper under Front Cover or Back Cover The corresponding Cover Paper screen appears Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the cover pages and then touch OK Cover Paper Application gt Cover Sheet gt Front Cover Paper 8 8 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 Touch Outer Cover Sheet and then specify the tray loaded with paper for the outer front cover or the outer back cover 8 Job List Select the paper to be used Copies F for the outer cover sheets pplication gt Cover Mode gt Outer Cover Sheet A4 D 100 0 Outer Front Cover Outer Back Cover Jj Check Details 4 25 08 2008 11 20 Memory 100 9 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears 10 Specify any other desired copy se
4. 02 02 2008 10 10 mie 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 53 Basic copy operations For a double sided original select the binding positions for the original and the copy and then touch OK Job List Specify the binding position If the original Copies is not set upright select the direction Duplex Combine gt Binding Position Original Binding Position Output Binding Position Se ece2er 100 0 Auto Auto AB Bia AB Left Bind Right Bind Left Bind Right Bind Bi Bi AB By Top Top 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch Original Direction select the orientation of the loaded original and then touch OK For details on specifying the original orientation refer to Selecting the original orientation Original Direction settings on page 3 26 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again 3 54 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 8 Selecting a combined copy setting Original images of multiple pages 2 4 or 8 pages can be combined and printed on a single page reducing paper use The following three combined copy settings are available Q Detail When select the combined copy setting copies are produced with the most appropriate zoom ratio recommended zoom ratio selected for the original and paper size The zo
5. view Finishing f Change Setting View Pages e Detail If the display size is changed the finishing status cannot be viewed Page Rotation In Page Rotation a preview image can be rotated by 180 degrees to correct wrong original direction gt Touch Rotate current page to rotate the currently displayed page by 180 degrees lt a Select page s to rotate 4 Delete r View Pages gt Touch Select page s to rotate to display the list of scanned pages Up to 8 scanned pages can be displayed and touching the arrows switches between the pages gt Touch Select Odd to rotate the odd pages among the scanned pages Touch Select Even to rotate the even pages among the scanned pages 4 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations Touch Select All to rotate all the scanned pages Directly selecting a scanned page rotates the gt selected page Specify document to rotate from the Page List Preview gt Select page s to rotate Preview 3 F Doc Name yee Status RERS 1 PrintHait Select Odd Select Even Select All 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 99 View Finishing gt Touch View Finishing to display the finishing settings in the preview image with icons and texts and finishing status can be check
6. Lale i Open the right front door and the left front door Lower lever M4 and then pull out the ADU unit 9 a a v Open cover M11 rd Remove any paper A 4 5 25 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 Troubleshooting Return cover M11 to its original position Return the ADU unit to its original position Return lever M4 to its original position and then close the right front door and the left front door A WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine gt In order to reduce the risk of electric shock do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds A CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot gt In order to reduce the risk of burns do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds 5 26 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 2 15 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF 14 amp Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Remove all original pages remaining in the paper tray Open the left side cover and then remove any original pages Open the paper feed unit and then remove any original pages
7. 02 02 2008 Memory Cancel bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 31 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 Touch ID amp Print User Box and then touch OK Job List sSelect the desired User Box to use document If you know the User Box number enter it using the keypad C Public Personal Search User Box 4 D amp Print User Box Bulletin Board User Box Memory RX User Box Encrypted PDF User Box Polling TX Secure Print User Box User Box Annotation Fax Retransmit User Box User Box Enter User Box 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Select the document to be printed Multiple documents can be selected To select all documents touch Select All To cancel the selection of all documents touch Reset To check various information such as the date time when the document was stored and the document name touch Detail View Select document s Use Document Ua E Choose action after selecting document s Preview Selected Documents detail View I 03 09 2010 Memory Cancel 13 32 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 1 3
8. 3 2 Operations that cannot be combined Certain copy settings cannot be used together Specifying settings that cannot be combined will result in one of the following occurring The setting specified last is given priority The setting specified first is canceled The setting specified first is given priority A warning message appears 3 2 1 Operations where the setting specified last is given priority The procedure for setting the Booklet function after selecting the 2 Position Staple setting is described below 1 Select the 2 Position Staple setting Jobtist Ready to copy aes a SY28 100 0 eb a E a Offset m al Pst st Poway 22 08 2008 11 54 Memor oo 3 6 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 2 Set the Booklet function Job List Job List BEEBE 64 7 Copies Ready to copy Basic Original setting original Type Bii a eneseceoves r Neg Pos Reverse OD al N Page Margin Image Adjust 4 al Stamp Composition A 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Copies Ready to copy Application gt Booklet Book Copy Repeat _ Save in User Box Booklet 4 02 02 2008 10 10
9. 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch Y under Set Individual Zoom and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio between 25 0 and 400 0 for the Y direction Job List Specify the zoom ratio using the keypad Copies Press C to set the Zoom to 100 0 Zoom gt XY Zoom Set Individual Zoom f x 100 0 AUGO Papeg 100 0 SeYect g 100 0 Check Details 008 10 10 E Cancel 100 To cancel changes to the settings touch Cancel Touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears The Basic screen appears again 3 46 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 6 7 Selecting a stored zoom ratio Copy zoom ratios that have been stored can be recalled to be used when desired In addition stored copy zoom ratios can be changed Vv Vv Vv As the factory default Full Size is selected Touch to enlarge the zoom ratio and touch to reduce the zoom ratio in 0 1 increments Stored zoom ratios can be changed to desired zoom ratios For details on storing zoom ratios refer to Storing the desired zo
10. 2 22 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 2 1 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 2 3 Rear view Top view No Part name Description 1 Status indicator Indicates the status of the authentication unit 2 Security slot Used for connecting the security cable to prevent thefts complies with the se curity cable standards of the Kensington Computer Products Group 3 USB port type mini B Used to connect a USB cable mini B plug 2 1 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 ag a oe No Part name Description 1 Card scanning area Position the IC card on this area 2 USB cable Used for connecting this device to the machine Precautions for using the finisher Do not place objects on top of the finisher and below the paper output trays otherwise the machine may be damaged bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 23 2 Before making copies 2 1 15 Control panel 1 job List Ready to copy Main Power 2 aek do Original Setting Original Type Application dl 3 Mode Memory 4 As Utility Counter 5 21 20 19 z Brig 6 18 17 onr Save Hezess 4 DEF Proof C
11. Job Details 03 03 2010 14 11 Memory 100 2 Log in to the machine Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1 to many authentication has been specified Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1 to 1 authentication has been specified The user is authenticated and the Basic screen appears Ready to copy copies Check Job a j i i Original Type Applic Density Duplex Background Combine Density E qT ig E Auto i a Background Auto Paper Removal Select SGP EG000 1 1 a m ua x E E Finishing Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF Job Details jf 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 3 Press the User Box key in the control panel User Box e O 13 30 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 4 Touch Use Document Hane Status Job Details 4 Select an operation User Box Operations Save Document Use Document File Document 2008 10 10 Memory 100 5 Touch System User Box Job List d User Box to ust If you know the User Box number Public Personal _ document enter it using the keypad Search User Box 4 Ae box2 7 000000006 box3 Enter User Box No
12. 22 08 2008 17 39 Memory 100 F Select 2 Repeat settings Copies ob List and the keypad to specify the spacing Application gt 2 4 8 Repeat gt 2 Repeat Detail Settings E A4 D 100 0 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 35 co Application functions 6 Check the scanning size under Scan Range touch OK and then touch Close in the next screen that appears If the original size does not appear under Scan Range or to specify the scanning area touch Set Range and then specify the scanning area from any of the screens To cancel changes to the settings touch Cancel Set Range screen ob tist Ready to copy Application gt Image Repeat gt Set Range Copies A4 D 100 0 p A Custom Size 2E Auto 22 08 2008 17 47 Memory 100 Custom Size screen Job List Use the keypad to type in the document size Application gt Set Range gt Custom Size Copies A4 D 100 0 Check Details 22 08 2008 17 47 Memory 100 Can sizes in metrics be displayed Touch or to display a different list of sizes Can any size be specified VO 4 Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen Touch X or Y touch lt gt to switch between
13. The Sound Setting screen appears 2 O 3 Touch the button or press the key in the keypad for the desired sound setting 2 5 Sound settings 2 through 5 are available only if the corresponding sound setting on the Sound ON OFF Settings screen is set to ON DA Use the menu buttons or A keypad to make a selection Sound Setting Sound ON OFF Settings Confirmation Sound A Successful Completion Sound Completed Preparation Sound Caution Sound J oo e N The screen for selected sound setting appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 39 4 Additional copy operations 4 Touch the button or press the key in the keypad for the desired sound setting Operation Confirmation Sound Input Confirmation Sound Invalid Input Sound J 6 Basic Sound 8 Z Close _ The screen for adjusting sound level appears 5 Adjust the sound level To produce the sound touch Yes The sound level can be selected from 16 levels Every touching Lower Higher increases decreases a single level To mute the sound touch No N Select volume of Input Confirmation sound A Input Confirmation Sound 10 12 14 16 To cancel changes to the settings press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled 6 Touch OK then touch Close The Sound Setting screen
14. 03 03 2010 14 11 Memory 100 Begin Printing The print job is printed Print amp Access The print job is printed and the user is logged in to the Basic screen Access The print job is not printed and the user is logged in to the Basic screen Make sure that either Begin Printing or Print amp Access is selected You can also select Access and select a print job to print For details refer to Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel on page 13 30 Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1 to many authentication has been specified Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1 to 1 authentication has been specified The user is authenticated and the print job is printed bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 29 1 3 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel Follow the procedure described below to select the document to be printed from those saved in the ID amp Print user box 1 Touch Screen Operation lt When 1 to many authentication has been specified gt Documents stored in the ID amp Print User Box can be printed by authenticating To check documents sel Access Panel and log in Print amp Access Access Hane Status S User Name 4
15. Tri Fold Z Fold bizhub 751 601 Version 2 1 3 1 Introduction Sorting copies The finishing method for copies can be selected For details refer to Separating copies by sets Sort setting on page 3 66 Separating copies by pages Group Setting on page 3 67 Multi page originals can be copied and stapled together Stapling copies For details refer to Stapling copies Staple settings on page 3 71 el Holes for filing can be punched in the copies Punching holes in copies For details refer to Punching holes in copies Punch settings on page 3 74 Copying multiple original pages onto a single page Multiple pages of the original can be printed together on a single page For details refer to Copying multiple original pages onto a single page Combined copy settings on page 3 57 z DEF EE Copying an original containing various page sizes An original with various page sizes can be scanned and copied together For details refer to Copying originals of mixed sizes Mixed Original setting on page 3 21 al Z f 1 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Introduction 1 Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original The copies can be adjusted according to the image quality of the original For details refer to Loading originals with small print or photos Original
16. The screen that appears differs depending on the setting selected for Account Track Input Method Touch Account Name The Account Name screen appears Type in the account name up to 8 characters long and then touch OK For details on typing in text refer to Entering text on page 15 3 If Name was displayed type in the account name up to 20 characters and then touch OK If Account Track Input Method was set to Account Name amp Password the same account name cannot be registered more than once m Enter the account name using the keyboard or keypad To clear your entry completely press the C key Administrator Settings gt Edit gt Account Name 02 26 2010 10 27 Memory 90 The account name is set Touch Password If Account Track Input Method was set to Password Only the same password cannot be registered more than once The Password screen appears Type in the password up to 8 characters long and then touch OK A screen for retyping the password appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 81 Utility mode 10 Retype the password specified in step 9 and then touch OK The user password is set 11 Touch Max Allowance Set The Max Allowance Set screen appears 12 To specify the maximum number of prints allowed use the keypad to type in the desired value To specify no maximum for color and black prin
17. Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 5 Touch Detailed Settings The Detailed Settings screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 69 Application functions Touch the desired button to change the setting values in each setting screen and then touch Close As the factory default the following settings are selected Density Std Copy Protect Pattern Emboss Text Text Size Std Background Pattern Pattern 1 The setting under Pattern Contrast in the Copy Protect Pattern screen can only be specified in single increments between 2 and 2 Job List Ready to copy Copies guyeck2Per 100 0 Density Copy Protect Pattern Text Size Std Emboss Text Std ih Background Pattern Check Details Pattern 1 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Density screen Job List S lect desired Copy Protect density Application gt Copy Protect gt Density Sefece 100 0 Light Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Copy Protect Pattern screen i Select between EN You can al Pattern Contrast QuteckaPer 100 0 Emboss Background Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 8 70 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions Text Size screen Job List Select desired Copy Protect Text Size Copies Application
18. Close the paper feed unit and the left side door bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 27 5 Troubleshooting Lift up the paper tray and then remove any original pages Return the paper tray to its original position 5 2 16 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF 15 amp Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Remove all original pages remaining in the paper tray Lift open the ADF 5 28 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 Open the document pad A Open the original exit guides and then remove any original pages Close the document pad 5 2 17 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS 524 FS 525 16 18 This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may occur Depending on the selected Finishing settings the paper path changes resulting in different locations in the finisher where paper misfeeds may occur The method for clearing paper misfeeds in Finisher FS 524 is the same as that for FS 525 Here the method for FS 524 is described as an example Open the machine s front door bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 29 5 Troubleshooting Lower guide lever FN2 and then remove any paper ENE Return
19. To remove a page number that has been specified touch the button for the page to be removed and then press the C clear key If the same page number is entered multiple times copying is not possible Delete repeated page numbers Ifthe entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the original paper is not inserted 11 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets and then touch OK 12 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears 13 Specify any other desired copy settings 14 Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies 15 Press the Start key bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 13 8 Application functions 8 4 Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page Insert Image function A multi page original later scanned from the original glass can be inserted at the specified location in an original first scanned with the ADF The inserted original is added after the specified pages Q Detail A separate original can be inserted at a maximum of 30 locations within an original of up to 999 pages In double sided originals one double sided page is considered to be two pages one for the front and one for the back 4 1 3 7 2 REPORT m REPORT 1 A 1 A 1 Load the original into the ADF For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Foran original that
20. 3 18 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 4 Specifying original settings The following describes necessary settings depending on the status and placement of the originals to copy them as desired 3 4 1 Specifying the original size Original Size settings Copies can be produced after specifying the original scanning size if the original size cannot be detected automatically or if you wish to specify a certain original size 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Inthe Basic screen touch Original Setting Ready to copy Copies Check Job Duplex Combine Hane Status Density Auto Background auto Paper Removal Select 8G OHOG000 J Separate Scan f Auto Rotate OFF Finishing 4 z 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Original Setting screen appears 3 Touch Original Size The Original Size screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 19 3 Basic copy operations 4 Select the original size and then touch OK Touch or EF to display a different list of standard sizes To specify a standard size touch the button for the desired original size To specify a custom size touch Custom Size to display the Custom Size screen Specify the X and Y sides of the paper and then touch
21. Copy paper originals 3 4 5 Select the size of the paper to be loaded Touch X or Y in Change size touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction and then touch and to sp ecify the size of the paper Ifa decimal value is displayed in the screen use the keypad to type in the setting For details on switching between decimal and fraction values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 f a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value Paper Tray Settings sss Y Jtj jty gt Paper Type Size Settings gt Wide Paper Utility System Settings elect paper size for Tray 3 lease set wide paper size using the keypad Select Size Image Adj Change Size 420 0 458 0 _ eae Centering ese eso 297 0 314 0 exo xD Paper Type Size Settings 2008 09 01 08 11 Cancel 0K Memory 100 Select the desired image position Touch OK 7 28 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 7 3 6 Specifying a paper type This section describes the procedure for specifying a type of paper loaded in each tray amp Note Selecting Letterhead wil
22. Output Tray The copies are output to the specified paper tray Staple Select one of these settings to bind the copies with a staple in the corner or with two staples Punch Holes are punched 2 or 4 holes in the copies for filing them The following procedures describe how to select Finishing settings amp Reminder The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 65 Basic copy operations 3 11 1 Separating copies by sets Sort setting Y As the factory default Group is selected Y lf offset sorting is selected while no finisher is installed printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating Ga and d pattern if the following conditions are met A4 or B5 size paper is used Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the a orientation in one paper tray and with the J orientation in another tray The Auto Paper setting is selected The Auto Paper setting is not selected when the Mixed Original setting is selected V If offset sorting is selected while a finisher is installed printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other wit
23. C Save Settings ot show th Default C Cancel GOED If User Authentication Account Track User Authentication Settings Administrative Setting ID amp Print Settings Public User is set to Save in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted public user jobs are also saved in the ID amp Print User Box 6 Click the OK button 7 From the Output Method drop down list select Print Printer KONICA MINOLTA 751 HA Presets Standard B Output Method B Paper View O Detailed Information A collate 8 12x11 O Offset 8 1 2x11 Output Method v Print B i Secure Print pis Save in User Box m Save in User Box and Print Proof Print F 2 ea Printer information Detail Settings g Default 2 PDF Preview Cancel Print If User Authentication Account Track User Authentication Settings Administrative Setting ID amp Print Settings ID amp Print is set to ON in the Administrator Settings of the machine general print jobs are also saved in the ID amp Print User Box 8 Specify the desired settings and then click Print The print job is sent bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 9 Prita print job lt When 1 to many authentication has been specified gt Documents stored in the ID amp Print User Box ca
24. OP 2 Position 4 Hole unt ccc Aaen 22 08 2008 14 01 Memory 100 3 68 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 Select the output tray where copies are to be fed and then touch OK list Ready to copy copies Finishing gt Output Tray 88Y80EPPe 100 0 KNO A 06 19 2008 09 50 Memory 100 The Basic screen appears again 3 11 4 Outputting copies with their front sides facing up Face up settings The copies are output with their front sides facing up Q Detail This can be specified for both sort output and group output 1 In the Basic screen touch Finishing Ready to copy Copies Check Job yp Original Setting Original Type Application _ Density Background Hane Status eeiiy Auto Background Auto Paper Removal Select eee Oeeo0o0 7 m a FS aon Finishing A Separate Scan f Auto
25. Touch EJ or E to display a different list of standard sizes To specify a custom size touch Custom Size to display the Custom Size screen Touch X or Y to select the dimension and use the keypad to specify the desired value To enter a value press the C clear key and then use the keypad to type in the new value bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 45 8 Application functions Ifa value outside the allowable range is specified the message Input Error appears If Input Error appeared or if the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key and then specify the correct value 5 Specify any other desired copy settings To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies Press the Start key 8 46 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 8 13 Copying with the page layout of a booklet Booklet function The page order of the scanned original is automatically arranged to produce double sided copies in a page layout for center binding such as for a magazine Stapling is possible only when optional saddle stitcher on the finisher is installed Q Detail Generally a multiple of 4 original pages is required with a single sided original and a multiple of 2 Original pages is required with a double sided original If there are not enough pages blank pages are automatically a
26. 2mm or more Tt 8 Touch OK To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key The folding positions are adjusted If no adjustment of the folding positions were necessary in step 7 this completes the procedure bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 59 12 Utility mode 9 Use the Z Fold setting to print another sample copy 10 Check the print result Check that the folding positions were adjusted If more adjustment is necessary repeat steps 6 through 10 12 6 9 Tri Fold Position Adjustment The folding position when printing with the Tri Fold setting can be adjusted for each paper size amp Note Tri Fold Position Adjustment does not appear if optional Finisher FS 610 is not installed Y Before making any adjustments use the Tri Fold setting to print a single sample copy Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 1 System Settings The System Settings screen appears 3 Touch 7 Expert Adjustment The Expert Adjustment screen appears 4 Touch 5 Finisher Adjustment The Finisher Adjustment screen appears 5 Touch 10 Tri Fold Position Adjustment The Tri Fold Position Adjustment screen appears elect a paper size and then u
27. Item Description Weight Approx 65 kg Consumables Staple cartridge 1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings 2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga 8 x 13 one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative 6 2 6 Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 Item Description Name PK 505 PK 504 Function Hole punches for filing Number of holes 2 holes or 4 holes Hole diameter 6 5 0 5 mm Hole pitch 2 Hole 4 Hole 80 0 0 5 mm 4 Hole Swedish punch 21 mm 1 mm 70 mm 1 mm 21 mm 1 mm Paper types Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m thick paper 91 g m to 128 g m Paper sizes 2 holes A3 Gato A5 G q 11 x 17 Gi to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 G q Foolscap 8K a 16K U 4 holes A3 Ga B4 ca A4 U BS 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 11 8K 16K U Power requirements Supplied from finisher Dimensions 148 W x 509 D x 122 H mm Weight Approx 3 kg Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga 8 x 13 Gy one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative 6 2 7 Z Folding Unit ZU 604 ZU 605 Item Description Name ZU 604 ZU 605 Function Hole punches for filing Z fold Number of holes 2 holes or 4 holes Hole diameter 6 5 0 5 mm Hole pitch 2 Hole 4 Hole 80 0 0 5 mm 4 Hole Swedish punch 21 mm 1 mm
28. This parameter appears only if user authentication or account track settings have been specified The use for each user or account can be checked Paper Tray Tray 1 Simplex Duplex 1 sided Print Item All Info External Server Settings Description Specify the external server that performs user authentication 12 34 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode Limiting Access to Destinations Parameter Description Create Group Groups for permitting access to destinations can be registered and edited Apply Levels Groups to Destina tions specified for each destination The access permission level and the group with access permissions can be Apply Levels Groups to Users specified for each user The access permission level and the group with access permissions can be Authentication Device Settings Parameter Description Default setting General Settings Specify the settings for the installed authentication unit e Card Authentication Select the IC card type and op eration settings e Bio Authentication Select the beep and operation settings When the authentication unit IC card type has been installed IC Card Type FeliCa Operation Settings Card Authentication When the authentication unit biometric type has been installed Beep Sound ON Operation Settings 1 to many authentication Logoff Settings Select whether or not
29. Use the Half Fold setting to print another sample copy Check the print result Check that the folding position is adjusted to the center of the paper If more adjustment is necessary repeat steps 6 through 9 12 48 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 12 6 3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment The vertical position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper size amp Note Punch Vertical Position Adjustment appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher For details on the Punch settings refer to Punching holes in copies Punch settings on page 3 74 Y Before making any adjustments use a Punch setting to print a sample copy Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 1 System Settings The System Settings screen appears 3 Touch 7 Expert Adjustment The Expert Adjustment screen appears 4 Touch 5 Finisher Adjustment The Finisher Adjustment screen appears 5 Touch 3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment The Punch Vertical Position screen appears Select a paper size and then use keys to specify the adjustment Administrator Settings z zaa A gt Finisher Adjustment gt Punch Vertical Pos
30. 4 Touch Preview on Screen for Mode and then select the original direction When the original is placed on the original glass Press Start If the original is not set upright select direction Select Proof Copy Method T Rare Status Preview on Screen E Original Direction Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 When the original is loaded into the ADF gt Press Start If the original is not set upright select direction Select Proof Copy Method Name Status Preview on Screen Delete _ Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 5 Press the Start key Scanning of the original starts and the Preview screen View Status appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 13 Additional copy operations 7 8 Check the preview image To change the settings touch View Pages Go to step 7 To start printing press the Start key Toscan more originals touch Finish place or load the originals and then press the Start key Press the Stop key to cancel the preview Printing will start Press the Start key PrintWait To change settings touch View Pages Page View Status o E Change the settings and then touch View Status For details on the View Pages screen refer to Preview screen on page 4 9 COPY PrintWait Page Rotation Rotate current page Sel
31. Application gt Save in User Box Copies aeyeckorer 100 0 User Box 000000001 Box Document Name SharedDoci Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 7 After typing in the name touch OK For details on typing in text refer to Entering text on page 15 3 Use the keyboard or keypad to type in the document name Press C to erase the entered document name Application gt Save in User Box gt Document Name Copies SharedDocif e r d I f c v l Shift 02 26 2010 09 58 Memory 90 Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is saved To print a copy touch Yes beside Save amp Print Job List Pselect Sired User Box to save document also change the document name To print while saving touch Save amp Print Application gt Save in User Box Copies gute pal iect 100 0 User Box j 000000001 Box1 SharedDoc1 Document Name Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 95 Application functions Touch OK To cancel the Save in User Box function touch No The Application screen appears again Specify any other desired copy settings Press the Start key If Yes beside
32. Browse For Folder Select the folder that contains drivers for your hardware Desktop E B My Documents amp 3 My Computer gt a My Network Places To view any subfolders click a plus sign above Cancel The installation begins Found New Hardware Wizard Please wait while the wizard searches oy USB Device 13 12 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 1 3 7 Click Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for aay HitachiSoft JOHMON Click Finish to close the wizard Cancel 8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 The installation of BioDriver USB Driver is completed 9 install Data Administrator Bio Plugin Open the DA_Bio_Plugin folder on the application DVD and then click setup exe 10 Select the language and then click OK Choose Setup Language em Select the language for this installation from the choices below English United States v The installer starts up 11 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation 12 Click Next iz Plugin for Biometric Authentication Unit AU101 Welcome to the Plugin for Biometric Authentication Unit AU1O1 This wizard will install PlugIn for Biometric Authentication Unit AU101 on your computer To continue click Next
33. User Authentication Settings Parameter Administra tive Settings Description Select whether or not a list of user names is dis played in the user authentication screen User Name List Default Setting OFF Default Function Permission Operations that are possible with this machine can be limited when authenticating with an exter nal server Copy Allow Scan Allow Fax Allow Print Allow User Box Allow Print Scan Fax TX Allow Save to External Memo ry Allow Whether or not to use the ID amp Print function can be selected Also whether to print unauthorized jobs or public user jobs immediately or to save them in the ID amp Print User Box can be selected ID amp Print Settings ID amp Print OFF Public User Print Imme diately ID amp Print Opera tion Settings Specify the printing method when using the ID amp Print function e Print All Jobs All the jobs are printed with a single authenti cation operation e Print Each Job The stored jobs are printed one at a time Print All Jobs User Registration Register the users of this machine In addition the password number of prints allowed authentica tion information and function permissions can be specified for each user User Counter The copy print and fax scan use for each user can be checked bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 33 Utility mode Note The user auth
34. Job List Utility gt User Settings er cro coe sir sets NRE ce cat wre or or Z Z 5 Printer Settings 02 26 2010 Memory 09 07 90 The System Setting screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 21 Copy paper originals 4 Touch 3 Paper Tray Setting Job List Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection Utility gt User Settings gt System Settings 1 Language Selection 6 Blank Page Print Settings 4 4 Measurenent Unit Settings S Density for Original Type User Settings J z Paper Tray Settings s Mea Position Power Save Settings Output Settings A 06 19 2008 17 25 Memory 100 The Paper Tray Setting screen appears Job List Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection Utility gt System Settings gt Paper Tray Settings Auto Tray Switch ON OFF User Settings No Matching Paper an Tray Setting system Settings Print Lists 4 Ec Paper Type Size Settings 06 19 2008 11 07 Memory 100 amp Note To change the paper size for paper loaded into the tray 3 and 4 and the LCT contact your service representative 7 22 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 7 7 3 2 To specify a standard size paper Standard Size 1 settings A standard paper size can be set for the tray 3 and 4 The following procedure describes ho
35. KONICA MINOLTA PageScope Data Administrator Authentication settings Address settings Default Gro TOR G File Edit Tool Window Help TOP 3 Registration of Device Network Initial Setting Eunction selection User list 1 1000 item s m G Device information 7214 Status User name E Mail ad Function restriction Total C Maximum 3 Ug Authentication setting pv ae meme rcrrerrge amp User authentication Gg External Server E3 Address settings User box F Column option k Refresh from the device k Export to the device 14 20 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 1 4 14 Click Write Data Administrator is equipped with a batch copy feature that allows the registered user data to be specified on the multiple machines specified to be used with the authentication unit Export to the device Write the edited data to the device Group name Default Group Registered name 12 18 2207 Device address 17216 22 27 The registered user data is specified on the machine 15 Click OK KONICA MINOLTA PageScope Data Administrator l Update data completely 16 Disconnect the authentication unit from this USB port of the computer 17 Turn off the machine with the main power switch connect the authentication unit and then turn on the machine with the main power switch When the t
36. Number of Originals 22 08 2008 15 32 Memory 100 A screen appears allowing you to change the settings 3 32 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 5 Touch the button of the setting to be changed select the desired setting and then touch OK The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings Settings for the following can be changed 1 Sided 2 Sided Density Background Original Type Binding Position Zoom Original Size Frame Erase Center Erase To cancel changes to the settings touch Cancel can be changed for stopped scan job tart to continue top to cancel ch Job No 215 Change Setting Application Frame Erase 4 Center Erase A Binding Position A Original Size Original Type Job Details 5 07 2008 09 10 Cancel emory 100 Density Background screen Background Removal copy PrintWait Binding Position screen copy PrintWait Delete bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 33 Basic copy operations Zoom screen ings can be changed for a stopped an job Press Start to continue Status copy Printing XY Zoom 4 Minimal 115 4 122 4 141 4 B4 A3 A4 A3 200 0 B5 A4 A4 B4 es By 86 6 81 6 70 7 AS B4 AS AG A4 B5 B4 A4 B4 B5 Job Details 08 2008 15 49 Memory 100 Frame Erase screen Settings can be changed for
37. 4 The Stamp Composition screen appears Touch Registered Overlay Job List Ready to copy Application gt Stamp Composition Copies Date Time Copy Protect ah E JUSS Registered Overlay 4 Watermark Page Number Stamp Repeat Header Footer Z 4 Stamp a Overlay ied Distribution Control Number 4 02 26 Memory The Registered Overlay screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 81 8 Application functions 4 Touch Register Overlay Image To cancel the Registered Overlay function touch No Recall the saved image Copies J to print it as an overlay Application gt Stamp Composition gt Registered Overlay guto Paper 100 0 e Recall Overlay Image Register Overlay Image Check Details 1st Page Only 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Register Overlay Image screen appears 5 Touch New 5 Register new overwrite or delete GHEE overlay images Application gt Registered Overlay gt Register Overlay Image ver ay mage O O o gespes 100 0 New 4 overwrite _ Delete Original Size MT Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To
38. 8 Touch Print under Action To delete the document touch Delete To check the document details touch Document Details To cancel the operation touch Cancel The selected document is printed amp Note f authentication fails many times the authentication data may not be registered correctly Therefore register the user again bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 33 1 3 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 13 34 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 1 l Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 1 4 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 14 1 Safety information Carefully read this information and then store it in a safe place Before using this device carefully read this information and follow it to operate the device correctly After reading this information store it in the designated holder with the warranty Important information The reprinting or reproduction of the content of this publication either in part or in full is prohibited without prior permission The content of this publication is subject to change without notice This publication was created with careful attention to content however if inaccuracies or errors are noticed please contact your sales representative The marketing and authorization to use the our company s product mentioned in this information are provided entirely on an as is basis Our co
39. Bookmark Scan Fax User Box Job List Print Customize Image Panel Web Browser 02 02 2008 10 O _ exit close J Memory The Copy Help screen appears 4 Touch Open or the right of the desired information or press the key in the keypad for the number to the left of the desired information to display the corresponding Help screen Job List f Select a function using the keypad Bookmark Dens ity Background Paper Zoon Duplex Combine Finishing Original Settings Original Type Application Other 02 02 2008 10 Bi exit close Memory 5 After checking the Help information touch Exit or press the Help key again The Basic screen appears again 4 26 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 2 Specifying control panel settings Accessibility mode This section contains details on the procedures for specifying control panel settings and adjusting the touch panel Displaying the accessibility setting screen gt Press the Accessibility key The Accessibility Setting screen appears Detail O Accessibility es To exit the Accessibility Setting screen and return to the Basic screen press the Accessibility key or the Reset key or touch Close When the Enlarge Display mode is selected the Default Enlarge Di
40. Copies Duplex Combine m 19 1 The Original Setting screen appears Touch Mixed Original To cancel the Mixed Original setting touch Mixed Original again to deselect it 3 22 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 4 3 Loading folded Z folded originals If folded originals are loaded into the ADF to be copied the original size is correctly detected VY Load the original into the ADF VY The length of the first page of the original is detected and all pages of the original are scanned at that size 1 Position the original to be copied Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF If the original is copied without being unfolded a paper misfeed may occur For details on loading the original refer to Loading the original into the ADF on page 3 9 2 Inthe Basic screen touch Original Setting The Original Setting screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 23 3 Basic copy operations 3 Touch Z Folded Original To cancel the Z Folded Original setting touch Z Folded Original again to deselect it 3 4 4 Loading tab paper Tab original settings Using tab papers enables copying of an original including its index part 1 Position the original to be copied For details on loading the original refer to Loading the original into t
41. If necessary specify the other settings To specify the text size touch Text Size and then select the size The factory default is 10 pt Job List Specify the size of the stamp Copies Application gt Date Time gt Text Size guyeck2Pe 100 0 Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch OK and then touch Close in the next screen that appears Specify any other desired copy settings To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies 10 Press the Start key bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 59 Application functions 8 8 15 2 1 Printing the page number Page Number function Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Touch Application and then touch Stamp Composition To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled Job List Ready to copy Basic original setting original Tyre Qu gobePer 100 0 ij a Neg Pos Reverse Sheet Covers Chapter Insert 4 O A Page Margin Image Adjust a E Stamp Composition A 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Book Copy Repeat 4 Save in User Box A Copies J Booklet S The Stamp Com
42. Index J Job History list 77 13 Job List screen 77 3 K m Key Repeat Start Interval Time 4 29 l Large Capacity Unit LU 405 2 70 Large Capacity Unit LU 406 2 77 Left panel Job List 77 7 Lever M4 2 60 License Settings 72 47 Limiting Access to Destinations 72 8 Loading paper 2 50 2 57 2 52 2 55 Low power mode 2 34 M Machine Configuration 2 3 Main messages and their remedies 5 47 Main power switch 2 37 Manual conventions 7 9 Message 70 9 Message Display Time 4 37 Meter Count 70 8 Minimal 3 43 Mixed Original 3 27 75 8 Mode Memory 4 76 4 20 N Neg Pos Reverse 8 26 Network Setting 72 36 Non standard sized paper 7 72 U Offset 3 64 OHP Interleave 8 3 One Touch Destination User Box Registration 72 32 Options 2 3 Original gt Copy settings 3 50 Original Direction 3 26 75 8 Original feeding 3 9 Original glass 3 70 Original orientation 7 70 Original Type 3 59 75 8 Originals 7 37 Output Tray OT 505 2 22 Oversized paper 7 77 Oversized paper settings 7 27 P Page Margin 8 41 Paper misfeed 5 5 Paper misfeed indications 5 7 Paper storage 7 8 Paper take up roller 2 50 Password Rules 72 85 Periodic maintenance 70 9 Post Inserter PI 504 2 27 3 86 5 39 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment 72 63 Power save 2 34 2 35 2 36 Prefix Suffix Automatic Setting 72 38 Preview 4 9 Printer Settings 72 23 12 37 Program Jobs 8 27 Proof Copy 4 6 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment 7
43. The distance between staples when printing with the 2 Position Staple setting Staple and Center Staple amp Fold can be adjusted amp Note 2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment does not appear if optional Finisher FS 610 is not installed Y Before making any adjustments use the 2 Position Staple setting to print a sample copy Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 1 System Settings The System Settings screen appears 3 Touch 7 Expert Adjustment The Expert Adjustment screen appears 4 Touch 5 Finisher Adjustment The Finisher Adjustment screen appears 5 Touch Forward ES and then touch 1 2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment The Adjust Spacing of 2 Staples screen appears Use the keys to specify the adjustment inistrator Settings T inisher Adj stment gt 2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment Adjust Value Test pattern Output A 25 08 2008 10 06 Memory 100 6 Touch the button for the setting to be adjusted 7 Check the stapling positions in the sample copy Touch or under Adjust Value to adjust the distance between 128 mm and 160 mm between the staples Each time or is touched the value is increased or decreas
44. The image is not aligned properly on the paper Is the original incorrectly posi tioned Correctly position the original against the original scales See p 3 10 Load the original into the ADF and slide the adjustable paper guides to fit the size of the original See p 3 9 Is the original incorrectly posi tioned in the ADF If the original cannot be fed cor rectly through the ADF make cop ies by positioning the original on the original glass See p 3 10 Is the left partition glass dirty while using the ADF Clean the left partition glass with a soft dry cloth See p 10 3 Are the adjustable lateral guides in correctly positioned against the edges of the original Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original Was curled paper loaded into the paper tray Flatten the paper before loading it The printed page is curled Was paper that curls easily as with recycled paper used Remove the paper from the paper tray turn it over and then load it again Replace the paper with paper that is not damp See p 2 50 p 2 51 and p 2 55 The edge of the printed output is dirty Is the document pad dirty Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent See p 10 4 Was the selected paper size larger than the original with a Zoom set ting of Full Size 100 0 Select a paper size that is the sa
45. amp Reminder Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places only when the finisher is installed Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places Finisher FS 524 FS 525 Tray Paper weight Paper size Loading capacity Main finishing tray FS 524 A3 m to A5 D 2 sheets to 9 sheets binding 100 sets Tray 2 60 g m to 90 g m 11x17 to 10 sheets to 20 sheets binding 50 sets FS 525 60 g m to 80 g m 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 W Foolscap T 8K m 16K wide paper A3W Ca to A5W Wy 11x17W ato 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W W 21 sheets to 30 sheets binding 30 sets 31 sheets to 40 sheets binding 25 sets 41 sheets to 50 sheets binding 20 sets 51 sheets to 60 sheets binding 15 sets 61 sheets to 100 sheets binding 10 sets j Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga 8 x 13 one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative 2 The value is for when using paper of which the length is between 150 mm and 417 mm The value will be 50 sets if the paper length is not within this range 3 This is the loading capacity when Finisher FS 525 has been installed Maximum number of bound pages Finisher FS 524 50 sheets 60 g m to 90 g m Finisher FS 525 100 sheets 60 g m to 80 g m Finisher FS 610 Tray Main finishing tray Tray 2 Paper Weight 60 g m to 80 g m Paper Size A3 to A5 fy
46. 14 Hole punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 Before making copies 2 1 8 Finisher FS 610 Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 1 3 perm 2 16 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies afta Ve m eal me gl EA aR ii f 6 2 17 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies Finisher FS 610 No Part name Description 1 Main finishing tray Tray 2 Collects printed pages 2 Sub finishing tray Tray 1 Collects printed pages 3 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge 4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 6 Misfeed clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 8 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 9 Guide lever FN9 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 10 Stacker unit Pulled out when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge 11 Guide lever FN8 Opened when cle
47. 5 The Sheet Cover Chapter Insert screen appears Touch Chapters geY2o8aPer 100 0 Job List Check Details Ready to copy Application gt Sheet Cover Chapter Insert Copies al H OHP Interleave Cover Sheet 4 aj Chapters Insert Image 4 7 Insert Sheet 4 ai 0 Ka Tj Program Jobs 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Chapter screen for editing appears 8 18 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 4 Using the keypad specify the first page of the chapters Job List eEnter ist page of chapters using the keypad Copies l Touch Sort to sort pages in ascending order Application gt Sheet Chapter Insert gt Chapters Copy Insert i 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 There are two Chapter screens Touch EE and EH to display a different screen To arrange the page numbers in order starting with the lowest number touch Sort To remove a page number that has been specified touch the button for the page to be removed and then press the C clear key Under Original gt Copy select 1 Sided gt 2 Sided If the same page number is entered multiple times copying is not possible Delete repeated page numbers
48. DRAFT 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch OK and then touch Close Specify any other desired copy settings Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies Press the Start key 8 92 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 Saving the scanned original in a user box Save in User Box function A scanned original can be saved in a user box Documents saved in user boxes can be printed when necessary Q Detail For details on the user box settings refer to the User manual Box Operations 8 16 1 Position the original to be copied 2 Touch Application and then touch Save in User Box iobtist Ready to copy copies Basic Original Setting Original Type agTgoeePer 100 0 ij Za ____ ___ i _ Sheet Covers Tee Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat Page Margin Inage Adjust Booklet a E ci Stamp Composition A Save in User Box A Check Details Him 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 3 Touch User Box A screen for selecting a user box appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 93 Application functions 4 5 Select the user box where the data is to be saved Touch the tab containing the desired user box and then button for the user box To type in a user box number to specify the user box touch Enter User Box No for the bo
49. Hane Status Density Auto Background Removal oiolololota imm Auto paper Select Finishing Job Details 02 02 2008 10 Memory 100 Duplex Combine The Finishing screen appears 2 Touch Fold Bind Job List Ready to copy guteckerer 100 0 uco Eoo 22 08 2008 14 01 Memory 100 Copies Corner ri The Fold Bind screen appears 3 78 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 Touch Half Fold BEEBE 100 0 Select a Fold Bind Job List ing gt Fold Bind Copies Half Fold Center Staple amp Fold Tri Fold OA 06 19 2008 09 54 Memory 100 As the factory default the Booklet function is automatically specified when Half Fold is selected To cancel the Half Fold setting touch No or the button for a different setting 4 Touch OK and then touch OK again The Basic Screen appears again 3 12 2 Finisher FS 610 Binding copies at the center Center Staple amp Fold setting Paper weight Paper size Maximum number of bound sheets 60 g m to 80 g m Standard sizes 20 sheets 2 2 A3 a B4 a A4 11 x 17 G 8 1 2 x 144 81 g m to 90 g m 16 sheets 8 1 2 x 11 Ga 8K Ga wi
50. Henory 100 The 2 Position Staple setting is automatically canceled and the Booklet function is set To select the 2 Position Staple setting cancel the Booklet function and then select the 2 Position setting bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 7 2 2 Basic copy operations 3 2 2 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority If a warning message appears indicating that settings cannot be combined those settings cannot be specified together The procedure for selecting the 2 Position Staple setting after setting the Booklet function is described below 1 Set the Booklet function list Ready to copy copies Basic foriginal Setting original Type SEIZES 100 07 Sheet Covers Chapter Insert 4 Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat O A J Page Margin A Image Adjust Booklet a E ei Stamp Composition A Save in User Box 4 Check Detai 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 2 Select the 2 Position Staple setting Cannot be set with Booklet Staple The message Cannot be set with Booklet appears and the 2 Position Staple setting cannot be selected The Booklet function remains selected and the 2 Position Staple setting is canceled To select the 2 Position Staple setting cancel the Booklet function and then select the 2 Position Staple setting 3 8 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operation
51. If 4in1 8in1 the 4in1 8in1 screen appears Touch Vertical or Horizontal to select the combination order of the original and press OK Fws CE to copy copies Duplex Combine gt 4in1 8im Cy Combine Pages Combine Direction euygceerer 50 0 Z i TER an ziz Cm rizoma 1 1 Check Details im 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To cancel the setting touch No 3 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again 3 58 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 9 Selecting the quality of the original 3 9 1 Loading originals with small print or photos Original Type settings Select the setting for the text and image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality The following Original Type settings are available Dss Note As the factory default Text Photo is selected Icon Description Text Select this setting when copying originals containing only text The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness providing an image that is easy to read E e Select this setting when copying originals containing both text and images Text Photo Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone original images photographs etc that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings Photo Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when copying originals containing only text that appears faint
52. Ready to copy Basic Original Setting Original Tyre SuyeckoPe 100 0 ij A RA BRSpeer insert 4 Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat 4 O z J Page Margin Image Adjust Booklet Z Check Details 4 rs E i Stamp Composition A Save in User Box A 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Stamp Composition screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 85 8 Application functions 3 Touch Registered Overlay list Ready to copy copies Application gt Stamp Composition A4 D 100 0 d E Date Time A Page Nunber Stamp E E eee A Copy Protect Stamp Repeat Overlay Registered Overlay Header Footer BGREFSRURGRBer Watermark P Check Details 4 02 26 2010 09 44 Memory 90 The Registered Overlay screen appears 4 Touch the button for the Registered Overlay to be used and then touch OK To cancel the Registered Overlay function touch OK After touching the button for the registered overlay the date that the overlay was registered appears To print the overlay image only on the first copied page touch 1st Page Only under Pages Touch OK and then touch Close in the next screen that appears Specify any other desired copy settings Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies O NOA Press the Start key
53. Sub finishing tray ray 1 200 sheets 80 g m Booklet tray Half fold tri fold 25 to 33 sets 80 g m Center staple amp fold 5 sheets 15 to 20 sets 80 g m Tri fold 1 sheet 50 sets 80 g m Shift Tray SF 602 A4 to B5 1250 sheets 80 g m B4 or larger A5 W 500 sheets 80 g m A5 Ga or smaller 100 sheets 80 g m Output Tray OT 505 150 sheets 80 g m 7 1 4 Paper size Paper Trays Available Size Main unit paper tray A4 U B5 U A5 D 8 1 2 x 11 U 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 W 16K U Tray 1 2 Main unit paper tray Standard sizes Tray 3 4 AS Gato AS W 11 x 17 Ga 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 Ga y 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 W Foolscap wide paper A3W ca to ASW p 11 x 17W 8 1 2 x 11W 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W D Custom sizes 182 mm x 140 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Large capacity unit Standard sizes LU 405 A4 W B5 U 8 1 2 x 11 W 16K D wide paper A4W U BSW 8 1 2 x 11W D Custom sizes 182 mm x 257 mm to 223 mm x 314 mm 7 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals Paper Trays Available Size Large capacity unit Standard sizes LU 406 A3 Ga B4 A4 Ga y 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11G Foolscap 8K 16K wide paper A3W B4W A4W 11 x 17W 8 1 2 x 11W Ga Q Custom sizes 195 mm x 210 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Bypass tray Standard sizes A3 j to B6 ca 11 x 17 Ga 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 Ga y 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Ga Q wide paper ASW Ga to ASW 11 x 17W 8
54. Tab Paper User Paper 1 1 2 Paper Size 2 A4 D Standard Size Custom Size A Wide Paper j 22 08 2008 Memory Touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears The Basic screen appears again amp Reminder f special paper is loaded into the bypass tray be sure to select the corresponding paper type otherwise a paper misfeed may occur bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 7 3 Paper type setting for a tray This section describes the procedures for specifying the size of paper loaded in the tray 3 and 4 and the type of paper loaded in each paper tray 7 3 1 To display the paper tray setting screen The following procedure describes how to display the Paper Tray Setting screen 1 Press the Utility Counter key Utility Counter Cl 2 Touch 2 User Setting An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button For 2 User Setting press the 2 key in the keypad Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection er sets ES Job List Meter Count Total Counter 4800 Original Counter 4200 Paper Counter 5800 Total Duplex 0 Memory 100 Check Details 10 10 100 02 02 2008 Memory 3 Touch 1 System Setting Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection
55. The user is authenticated and the print job is printed bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 25 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 ID amp Print for Macintosh Setting printer information 1 5 Open the Print amp Fax dialog box or Printer Setup Utility Print Center dialog box The Print amp Fax dialog box can be opened from System References on the Apple menu OS X 10 4 10 5 10 6 The Printer Setup Utility Print Center dialog box can be opened from HDD Applications Utilities OSX 10 2 10 3 Open the Printer Info dialog box For Print amp Fax dialog box click Option amp supply OSX 10 5 10 6 or Printer Setup OSX 10 4 For Printer Setup Utility Print Center dialog box select Information from the Printer menu Select Installable Options For OSX 10 5 10 6 click Driver For OSX 10 2 10 3 10 4 select Installable Options Click the ID amp Print check box to put a check mark in it is Printer Info F en Installable Options re Paper Source Unit LU 405 iz Finisher _FS 610 PI 504 in Punch Z Fold Unit ZU 605 PK 505 2 3 Hole iv v Hard Disk F ID amp Print C Secure Print Only Apply Changes Click Apply Changes and then close the Printer Info dialog box 13 26 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 13 Sending a print job 1 2
56. WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Cancel bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 13 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 13 Select I accept the terms of the license agreement and then click Next ie Plugin for Biometric Authentication Unit AU101 License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Please choose the language to display the End User License Agreement English v Software End User License Agreement PLEASE READ CAREFULLY THE LICENSE AGREEMENT BELOW BEFORE OPENING THE PACKAGE OF THIS SOFTWARE SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OPENING THE PACKAGE OR DOWNLOADING INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED YOUR LAWFUL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND OI do not accept the terms in the license agreement InstallShield 14 Click Install ie Plugin for Biometric Authentication Unit AU101 Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation IF you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard 13 14 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 1 3 15 Click Finish ie Plugin for Biometric Authentication Unit AU101 Setup Completed The wizard has successfully installed PlugIn for Bio
57. appears Replace the staple cartridge Ready to copy copies ____ Replace staple cartridge 1 Check Job aaa Basic Original setting original Tyre Application _ Density Duplexs Background 2 Combine Hane Status x ois Density Auto Paper Select gHeemaooo g C eere AUNE Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 100 Display in Enlarge Display mode When staples are about to run out appears on the screen Ready to copy Original Settings Density Background Paper Auto Paper Auto Select omma Duplex Combine 1 1 Touch to display the following message Replace staple cartridge 1 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 9 7 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box Reminder Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears otherwise the machine may be damaged 9 2 1 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS 524 Open the front door Grab handle FN7 and then pull out the stacker unit Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible 9 8 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box Remove the staple cartridge holder Hold the lever on the sta
58. tor Machine Settings on page 12 32 3 One Touch User Box Registration 1 Create One Touch Destination 2 Create User Box 3 One Touch User Box Registration List 4 Maximum Number of User Boxes Refer to One Touch User Box Registration on page 12 32 4 User Authentica tion Account Track 1 General Settings 2 User Authentication Settings 3 Account Track Settings 4 Print without Authenti cation 5 Print Counter List 6 External Server Set tings 7 Limiting Access to Des tinations 8 Authentication Device Setting 9 Auth Acct Track Com mon Setting Refer to User Authentica tion Account Track on page 12 33 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 5 Utility mode First level menu Second level menu Third level menu Details 3 Administrator Settings 5 Network Settings 1 Network Setting 2 TCP IP Settings 3 NetWare Settings 4 HTTP Server Settings 5 FTP Settings 6 SMB Settings 7 LDAP Settings 8 E Mail Settings 9 SNMP Settings 0 AppleTalk Settings next screen 1 Bonjour Setting 2 TCP Socket Settings 3 Network Fax Settings 4 WebDAV client Settings 5 Web Service Settings 7 SSDP Settings 8 Detail Settings 9 IEEE802 1X Authenti cation Settings Refer to Network Set
59. 16K Ga Q wide paper ASW Ga to ASW 11 x 17W Ga to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W Custom sizes 100 mm x 139 mm to 331 mm x 488 mm Staple Standard sizes l A3 Ga to A5 Wy 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Yj Foolscap 2 8K Ga 16K wide paper A3W ca to ASW iy 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W D Custom sizes 182 mm x 139 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Finisher FS 525 Main finishing tray Tray 2 Standard sizes A3 cato A5 1 0 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 1 9 Foolscap 2 8K Ga 16K wide paper A3W to ASW 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W H Custom sizes 182 mm x 148 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm 128 mm x 139 mm Sub finishing tray Tray 1 Standard sizes A3 Ga to A5 Gi Y B6 A6 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Ga Foolscap 2 8K m 16K Ga Q wide paper ASW m to ASW 11 x 17W aa to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W Custom sizes 100 mm x 139 mm to 331 mm x 488 mm Staple Standard sizes A3 Ga to A5 Q 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Yj Foolscap 2 8K Ga 16K wide paper A3W ca to ASW iy 11 x 17W Ga to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W D Custom sizes 182 mm x 139 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 5 7 Copy paper originals Equipment Available Size Finisher FS 610 Main finishing tray Tray 2 Standard sizes A3 ca to A5 aa Q 11 x 17 Gato 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 G Q Foolscap 2 8K Ga 16K Ga Q wide paper A3W to ASW Gy 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W H Custom sizes i
60. 182 mm x 148 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm 128 mm x 139 mm Sub finishing tray Tray 1 Standard sizes A3 ca to A5 Ga Q B6 ca A6 13 x 19 Ge 12 x 18 Ga to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Foolscap 2 8K Ga 16K H wide paper ASW to ASW 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W Custom sizes 100 mm x 139 mm to 331 mm x 488 mm Staple Standard sizes A3 ca to A5 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Yj Foolscap 2 8K ca 16K wide paper ASW ca to ASW iy 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W D Custom sizes 182 mm x 139 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Booklet tray Standard sizes Half fold center staple amp fold A3 a B4 A4 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 Ga 8K wide paper A3W B4W A4W 11 x 17W 8 1 2 x 11W Standard sizes Tri fold A4 aa 8 1 2 x 11 16K Custom sizes Half fold center staple amp fold 210 mm x 279 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Shift Tray SF 602 Standard sizes A3 ca to A5 Ga B6 A6 ca 11 x 17 ato 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Gy 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 a Qt Foolscap 2 8K Ga 16K G W Custom sizes 105 mm x 139 mm to 305 mm x 458 mm 139 mm x 139 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Output Tray OT 505 Standard sizes A3 a B4 A4Q B5 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 a 8 1 2 x 11 Ga W 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 G g wide paper A3W B4W A4W U BOW 11 x 17W 8 1 2 x 11W G q 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W Custom sizes 100 mm x 140 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm T Cann
61. 8 86 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 15 9 Vv Printing a header footer Header Footer function In order to use headers footers a header footer must be registered in advance from Administrator mode For details on registering headers footers refer to Specifying headers footers on page 12 64 1 Position the original to be copied 2 Touch Application and then touch Stamp Composition For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Job List ENE ij Sheet Covers Chapter Insert oO Page Margi n Check Details Ml 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Ready to copy Basic J original Setting Original Type z Neg Pos Reverse A Image Adjust Stamp Compos ition A Book Copy Repeat Save in User Box Copies 7 J Booklet amp Z 3 Touch Header Footer the settings are canceled To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to If no header footer is registered in Administrator mode Header Footer does not appear Job List Ready to copy Application gt Stamp Composition Copies A4 D 100 0 d Date Time Copy Protect Registered Overlay 4 Watermark 4 Check Details 4 Page Nunber Stamp Repeat Header Footer Stamp A la Overlay e Distribution Contro
62. Cleaning the left partition QlaSS ic c cccscecavesctivescnegesacavssueecanccensyactasnsedpecsonseacyechasceusnsdecaveaceesenesettecest 10 3 Cleaning the original QlaSS icici ceils ceedeacaseccesesdazeusipaaeazeensebendaacersadacteqastsandsiceusaccazecesdeqnasdsateapaaseaees 10 3 Cleaning the docum nt padis cs ccziceadcccscetvadsvadiauscaceedeevasdenadscea de sctacenuedsetaicensacnasnsateadeniecestbavacedents 10 4 Cleaning the paper take up roller cccceccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeesaaseeeesenaeeeeesnaaeeeeeeees 10 4 Cleaning the Main Units iiivw a ailidediiaieitiee A a e aaa a a 10 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Contents 5 10 1 6 Cleaning the control PaMel j ci cccva Zedeacecevactsceenancodascenevaieaacesecasd pedseee kalaan naeia Een aSr aaraa Tana aa iaeei 10 5 10 1 7 Care of Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 ooo eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeseeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeneeees 10 6 10 1 8 Care of Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 000 2 eeeccceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeetesaaeeeeeseenneees 10 7 10 2 Viewing counters Meter COUunt s seccceeseeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeessneaeeeessnneaeseessenaeeeeesseneaeeeessenees 10 8 10 2 1 Vi GWING COUNTSKS scien cicess adv auttedevainevsanneuv steed eu aa Apa Naa eaaa Raa an a eE A aa eaaa aiad iaaii 10 8 10 3 When the message It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device appears 10 9 flat 11 1 11 1
63. Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 Touch 4 User Authentication Account Track The User Authentication Account Track screen appears Touch 7 Limiting Access to Destinations The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears Touch 1 Create Group A maximum of 20 groups can be registered Inthe Create Group screen touch the button for a group touch Details and then check the destinations and names of users belonging to that group The Create Group screen appears Touch the button for the desired group and then touch Edit T Edit group Touch Details to show users and destinations belonging to the group 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Edit screen appears Touch Group Name Select the item to be changed Access Allowed Level ee os Eo a cre Gece 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Group Name screen appears 12 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 7 Type in the group name up to 24 characters and then touch OK For details on typing in text refer to Entering text on page 15 3 The group name is specified z Use the keyboard or keypad to type in the group nane Press C to erase the entered group name 02 26 2010 10 02 Memory 90 8 Select t
64. E a Auto Rotate OFF The Paper screen appears Touch the button for bypass tray Job List Ready to copy Original Setting Original Type Copies Application Zoom Boma ine Check Detai 22 08 2008 13 39 Memory 100 Touch Change Tray Settings bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 Copy paper originals 4 Touch Auto Detect Change Tray Settings gt Bypass Paper Type Paper Size As the factory default Auto Detect is selected 5 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears The Basic screen appears again 7 2 2 Selecting a paper size setting Size setting The paper size can be set for the bypass tray so that it can be used with the specified paper size This is useful for example when the size of the paper that is loaded cannot be automatically detected such as with paper in inch sizes The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for 8 1 2 x 11 m loaded into the bypass tray 1 In the Basic screen touch Paper Copies Ready to copy i Check Job SSS Se original setting original Type Application Density Duplex Background Combine Dens ity i Auto i a Background Z Auto Paper IE Removal Select oiolololota mim 1 1 i T EE Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF j Fini
65. It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device appears contact your service representative and request a periodic maintenance inspection were Status i Ready to copy Copies r the scheduled inspection Check Job riginal Type Application Density Duplexs Background Combine user z Background Auto paper Removal Select Uolofofojojajafafaia i E Separate Scan Job Details E Memory we f T bizhub 751 601 Version 2 10 9 1 0 Care of the machine 10 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 1 1 Managing jobs Managing jobs 11 11 Managing jobs 11 1 Overview of Job List screen 11 1 1 Jobs Specifying the desired copy settings then pressing the Start key queues the copy operation in this machine This queued operation is called a job In the same way operations for making scans and computer printouts are also queued as jobs Jobs that are being performed and the job log can be checked from the Job List screens Jobs are printed starting with the one at the top of the Current Jobs list Jobs are numbered in the order that they were programmed and are queued to be performed printed amp Note The job number identifies the job it does not indicate the printing order In addition the job number does not change until the job is deleted By using the Increase Priority function the selected job can be moved to the front of the
66. Light EAC Dark Light E Dark 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 Each time Light or Dark is touched the density is lightened or darkened by one level To select the middle setting of the nine levels default setting touch Standard To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key 3 Touch OK bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 63 3 Basic copy operations 3 11 Selecting finishing settings Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the copy output tray Note As the factory default Group is selected Detail fno finisher is installed and all of the following conditions are met printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern A4 or B5 size paper is used Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the Ga orientation in one paper tray and with the d orientation in another tray The Auto Paper setting is selected The Auto Paper setting is not selected when the Mixed Original setting is selected Note From Administrator Settings mode the machine can be set so that copies are fed out without being Shifted when the finisher is installed As a factory default the machine is set to shift the cop
67. Load the original turned 90 degrees Cannot be set with XXX Functions that cannot be used to gether are selected Make copies using only one of the functions The output tray has reached its ca pacity Remove all paper from the tray indi cated by gt Since the maximum amount of cop ies for the indicated finisher output tray has been exceeded the machine is unable to make copies Remove all paper from the indicated tray Enter User Name and password and then touch Login or press the Access key User authentication settings have been specified Copies cannot be made unless a user name and its cor rect password are entered Type in your user name and pass word See p 2 38 Enter Account Name and password and then touch Login or press the Access key Account track settings have been specified Copies cannot be made unless an account name and its cor rect password are entered Type in your user name and pass word See p 2 42 Your account has reached its maxi mum allowance The limit on the number of pages that can be printed has been reached Contact the administrator of the ma chine The part indicated by gt is open Ensure that it is properly closed Since a machine door or cover is open or an option is not installed cor rectly the machine is unable to make copies Make sure that all doors and covers are closed and that all options are in st
68. Page Print was selected the scanned original is copied and the document data is saved in the specified user box If No beside Page Print was selected the data for the scanned original is saved in the specified user box Q Detail For details on using documents saved in user boxes refer to the User manual Box Operations f you cannot save a job with an overlay specified in a user box select Utility Counter User Settings Copier Settings Separate Scan Output Method and set to Page Print For details refer to Custom Display Settings on page 12 19 8 96 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box 9 RE LS l 9 9 1 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box Replacing the toner cartridge When the toner is about to run out an advanced warning message similar to the one shown below appears Detail When the message appears prepare to replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement Tieas Note After the message appears the machine stops operating Replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement Q Detail For details on replacing the toner cartridge refer to To replace the toner cartridge on page 9 5 bizhub 751 601 V
69. Preferences or Properties 4 Click the Basic tab Printing Preferences Basic Layout Finish Cover Mode Stamp Composition Quality Other Eno Setmg Ud Original Orientation Output Method Potrat Landscape Original Size AA Paper Size Same as Original Size Zoom 25 400 Auto Manual oe Cra 5 Click the Authentication Account Track button bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 25 1 4 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 6 Select Recipient User and then enter the user name and password User Authentication Account Track User Authentication Account Track Public User Department Name Recipient User Password User Name user001 Password a ooo O s Cancel If User Authentication Account Track User Authentication Settings Administrative Setting ID amp Print Settings Public User is set to Save in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted public user jobs are also saved in the ID amp Print User Box 7 Click Verify to check the user ID 8 Click OK If the user name or the password is incorrect type in the correct information Confirmation e l1 Verification has succeeded Q Click the OK button 14 26 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication
70. Q O select job to delete and touch Delete Press Start to restart the stopped job Stopped Jobs Hane Status coy StopPrint f User Nane status Document Name 18 COPY Bbopped Delete Job Detai 2 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The selected job is deleted E Delete j Reg Time0rg ses 3 92 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 l Additional copy operations Additional copy operations MM Additional copy operations 4 4 1 4 1 1 Checking the copy settings Check Job From the Check Job Details screens the current copy settings can be checked and changed if desired To check the settings 1 Touch Check Job in the left panel and then touch Check Details The Check Job Settings screen appears Job List Se ece2 er 100 0 Selece r 100 0 Check Details Check Details Job List Select desired button to change its setting Check Job Settings Density Auto Zoon 100 0 Copies 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 1 7 80000000 Duplex Combine 1 1 OFF Select desired button to change its setting Check Job Settings Finishing Group Face Up 02 26 2010 15 05 Memory 90 Fold Bind Background Removal A Auto Rotate OFF Back isra gt Paper Auto Paper Select Separate Scan OFF Output Tray Tray 2 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 3 Addi
71. Select one of the following as the measurement units in which values are displayed in the touch panel mm Numerical Value inch Numerical Value inch Fraction mm Numericial Value Paper Tray Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Tray Selection Settings Select the paper trays that are selected automatically when the Auto Paper setting is specified In addition specify the priority of the paper trays when the auto tray switch operation is performed Tray priority order Tray 1 gt Tray2 gt Tray3 gt Tray 4 gt Bypass gt LCT Auto Tray Switch ON OFF Select whether or not a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray that was selected manually becomes empty while printing copies Restrict No Matching Paper in Select the operation that is performed when there is no paper Stop Printing Tray Fixed Tray Setting of the corresponding size in the specified paper tray e Stop Printing Tray Fixed The machine stops operating e Switch Trays Tray Priority When the corresponding size or type of paper is not load ed in the specified paper tray a different paper tray is se lected if it contains paper of the corresponding size Print Lists Select the paper tray used for printing lists such as the sales Tray 1 1 Sided counter and consumables indicators Paper Type Size Set Specify the paper type to be use for eac
72. The Basic screen appears again amp Note fuser authentication settings have been applied and the machine is set so that jobs cannot be deleted by other users the job is not deleted A job being performed can also be deleted by selecting the job in the sub display area then touching Delete bizhub 751 601 Version 2 11 Managing jobs 11 2 2 Checking job settings Job settings for stored jobs jobs being printed jobs queued to be printed and held jobs can be checked 1 Touch Job List in the left panel and then touch Job Details The Job List screen appears 2 Display the list containing the job whose settings are to be checked 3 Select the job to be checked and then touch Check Job Set Ifan incorrect job was selected select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it The contents and number of Job Settings screens differ depending on the job that was selected The upper number to the left of ES Back indicates the number of the currently displayed screen The lower number indicates the total number of screens To display the previous screen touch K3 Back To display the next screen touch Forward ES The Check Job Settings screen appears Job No 124 Check Job Settings No User Nane eee ena Paper Zoom BURAERS nt Auto Paper U ORO Renoval i 100 0 1 1 Qoooogamsaas p Eels Finishing Output Tray Group 1 Tray 2 Sep
73. The Erase screen appears Touch Frame Erase Job List Ready to copy Application gt Erase Copies aeyeckorer 100 0 f i Frame Erase Center Erase 7 Check Detai Non Tmage Area Erase 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Frame Erase screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 51 Application functions 4 O ON O Touch the button for the desired position to be erased i use 1 and the keypad to specify Copies Sonat he width of the area to be erased plication gt Erase gt Frame Erase Es Check Details A None Bottom 25 08 2008 09 25 Memory 100 be Ve To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key To cancel the Frame Erase function touch No What happens when Frame is selected The same width is erased on all four sides of the original The factory default setting is Frame Can the settings be combined Frame cannot be combined with the other settings Top Left Right or Bottom Touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction and then touch and to specify the width to be erased To specify a different width to be erased depending on the position specify different settings for Top Left Right and Bottom When using the keypad to specify the settings press the C clear key and then specify the
74. The best driver found will be installed v Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search CNIC Card Drivers Browse E Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware If the application DVD does not appear as a location to be searched for the driver click Browse select the IC Card Driver USB Driver folder on the DVD and then click OK Browse For Folder Select the folder that contains drivers for your hardware Desktop E B My Documents amp 3 My Computer gt a My Network Places To view any subfolders click a plus sign above Cancel The installation begins Found New Hardware Wizard Please wait while the wizard searches oy USB Device 14 12 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 14 T Click Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for aay HitachiS oft JOHMON Click Finish to close the wizard The installation of IC Card Driver USB Driver is completed 8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application DVD and then click setup exe 9 Select
75. as Ready to copy Basic Original Setting Original Type_ au ecbo 100 0 ij AA ehSBt r YRS re 4 Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat O Hi J Page Margin A Image Adjust A Booklet 3 E J Check Details Stamp Compos ition Save in User Box A 4 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Stamp Composition screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 91 Application functions on OA Touch Watermark Job List Ready to copy Application gt Stamp Composition A4 D 100 0 Date Time Copy Protect 7 Registered Overlay A Check Details Page Nunber Stamp Repeat Header Footer Stamp A la Overlay Distribution Control Number 02 26 2010 09 44 Memory 90 The Watermark screen appears Select the desired watermark To cancel the Watermark function touch No Job List Select watermark Application gt Stamp Composition gt Watermark Copies 88Sce2Pe 100 0 Check Details TOP SECRET DO NOT COPY CONFIDENTIAL PLEASE REPLY FOR YOUR COMMENTS COPY
76. connect a device and then click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software es this time only O No not this time Click Next to continue 4 Insert the application DVD included with the authentication unit into the DVD drive of the computer 5 Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and then click Next Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for USB Device If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 6 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do A Install the software automatically Recommended Click Next to continue bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 11 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 Select the Include this location in the search check box check that the application DVD appears as a location to be searched and then click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media
77. function e 8 89 Printing the watermark onto copies Watermark fUNCTION 22 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeee 8 91 Saving the scanned original in a user box Save in User Box fUNCtION csseeteeeeereeeeeees 8 93 Replacing the toner cartridge cccsseeeeceessseeeeeeeessnneeeeeessneeneeeesseeneeesensneneeeeessneneaeseeseeeneeeeesseenees 9 3 To replace the toner CartridQe ccccceceescccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaneeeeeesaaaeeeeeesaaaeeseedsaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseneeees 9 5 Replacing the staple cartridge sc c ccsiice de cess cece ecescce aaan eden scdee eaaa raa naaa adaa naa iGuncvedcceteedves 9 7 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS 524 cccccecseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesecaaeeeeeseecneeeeeeeseneees 9 8 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS 525 cccceceseeeeeeseeneeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaee 9 11 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS 610 o oo eeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeseaeeeeeneeeesaaeeseneeeeeneeeeaaes 9 15 Emptying hole punch scrap BOXES anaana amaaa secede venccec eve cit cececeestedecceveseodeuecueerteneetavendeasecs 9 18 To empty the hole punch scrap box of the finisher cccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeaeee 9 20 To empty the hole punch scrap box of the Z Folding Unit ecceeeceeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeee 9 21 CIC ANIING seccen sda cecs reer acti a decent E E A E A E A 10 3
78. is selected To select the print job to be printed touch Screen Operation For details refer to Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel on page 14 32 The user is authenticated and the print job is printed bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 27 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 ID amp Print for Macintosh Setting printer information 1 5 Open the Print amp Fax dialog box or Printer Setup Utility Print Center dialog box The Print amp Fax dialog box can be opened from System References on the Apple menu OS X 10 4 10 5 10 6 The Printer Setup Utility Print Center dialog box can be opened from HDD Applications Utilities OSX 10 2 10 3 Open the Printer Info dialog box For Print amp Fax dialog box click Option amp supply OSX 10 5 10 6 or Printer Setup OSX 10 4 For Printer Setup Utility Print Center dialog box select Information from the Printer menu Select Installable Options For OSX 10 5 10 6 click Driver For OSX 10 2 10 3 10 4 select Installable Options Click the ID amp Print check box to put a check mark in it is Printer Info F en Installable Options re Paper Source Unit LU 405 iz Finisher _FS 610 PI 504 in Punch Z Fold Unit ZU 605 PK 505 2 3 Hole iv v Hard Disk F ID amp Print C Secure Print Only Apply Changes Click Apply
79. key All changes to the settings are canceled st Ready to copy Esc Eji Sheet covers Chapter insert 4 O A Page Margin Image Adjust 7S E Stamp Compos ition A Neg Pos Reverse Z Check Detai 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Basic Original Setting Original Type Book Copy Repeat J Booklet Ei 4 Save in User Box 4 The Sheet Cover Chapter Insert screen appears Touch Cover Sheet Ready to copy Job List Application gt Sheet Cover Chapter Insert Copies Feetacbere 100 07 OHP Inter leave A Cover Sheet aj Chapters Insert Image A Check Details Insert Sheet 0 amp Tj Program Jobs 4 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Cover Sheet screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 7 Application functions Select the desired cover page settings To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key To cancel the Cover Sheet function touch No The default setting for the paper tray loaded with cover pages can be specified from the Utility mode For details refer to Copier Settings on page 12 21 If the optional post inserter has been installed Outer Cover Sheet appears Specify the cover Sheet settings Back cover Job List cannot be selected when creating booklets Press Start to restart Copies
80. mark in the back left corner of the original scales as shown 4 Close the ADF 3 3 3 Scanning the original in separate batches Separate Scan setting A large original can be divided and scanned in a number of batches A maximum of 100 original pages can be loaded into the ADF at one time However by specifying the Separate Scan setting an original that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned and treated as a single copy job In addition the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation o ks Y The loading capacity of the ADF is 100 sheets of plain paper 80 g m Do not allow the original to be loaded over the limit mark even though the original count is less than 100 Y The output method used with the Separate Scan setting can be set to Page Print or Batch Print As a default Page Print is selected Y For details on the output method used with the Separate Scan setting refer to the description for Separate Scan Output Method in Copier Settings on page 12 21 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Inthe Basic screen touch Separate Scan G8e8G eH00 To cancel the Separate Scan setting touch Separate Scan again to deselect it bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations
81. not grab any part other than handle FN6 otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched Close the front door bizhub 751 601 Version 2 9 17 9 18 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box Emptying hole punch scrap boxes If the hole punch scrap box of the punch kit installed with the finisher becomes full the message shown below appears if the box can be emptied by the user amp Note The setting for emptying the hole punch scrap box should be specified by the service representative For details contact the service representative The default setting is Service Ifa message appears immediately contact the service representative lt Screen when a Punch setting is selected gt Ready to copy Copies i Empty hole punch scrap box Check Job r ae Original Setting Original Type J Appli Density E Duplexs Background Combint Hane Status Density Auto Background Removal aofofofolofojofayale Auto Paper Select 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 Output Tray 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box 9 lt S
82. paper A3W aa B4W A4W BSW G ASW G Q 11 x 17W 8 1 2 x 11W 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W W Custom sizes 100 mm x 140 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Image blank Single sided copying Leading edge and trailing edge less than 3 mm front and rear less than 2 mm Double sided copying Front side Leading edge and trailing edge less than 4 mm front and rear less than 2 mm Back side Leading edge and trailing edge less than 3 mm front and rear less than 2 mm Paper tray capacity Tray 1 1650 sheets 64 g m plain paper Tray 2 1100 sheets 64 g m plain paper Tray 3 and tray 4 550 sheets 64 g m lt plain paper Bypass tray 100 sheets 64 g m plain paper Warm up time bizhub 751 within 300 seconds bizhub 601 within 270 seconds First copy bizhub 751 within 2 9 seconds bizhub 601 within 3 3 seconds Copy speed bizhub 751 75 sheets min A4 W 35 sheets min A3 Ga bizhub 601 60 sheets min A4 W 30 sheets min A3 Ga bizhub 751 601 Version 2 6 3 Specifications Item Description Magnification ratios Full size x 1 000 1 0 or less Enlargement Fixed Zoom x 1 154 x 1 224 x 1 414 x 2 000 Reduction Fixed Zoom x 0 500 x 0 707 x 0 816 x 0 866 Minimal Copy 0 930 Zoom with Constant x and Y Ratio x 0 250 to 4 000 in 0 001 increments Independent Zoom vertical x 0 250 to 4 000 in 0 001 increments horizontal x 0 250 to 4 000
83. type in the name of the key touch OK and then touch Close For details on typing in text refer to Entering text on page 15 3 the keyboard or keypad to enter Copies custom si jane e the entered Custom Size Name 02 26 2010 Memory 7 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again 7 16 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 7 7 2 5 Selecting a setting for oversized paper Wide paper settings If paper one size larger than a standard size is being used in the bypass tray specify a setting for wide paper Detail By specifying paper one size larger than the document as wide paper the document can be copied at the center so that there is no loss of the document image When specifying wide paper for the bypass tray non standard sized paper can be specified When using non standard sized paper enter the paper size For details on the setting for tray 3 and tray 4 refer to To select a setting for oversized paper on page 7 27 For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray refer to Loading paper into the bypass tray on page 2 55 The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for wide paper loaded into the bypass tray 1 In the Basic screen touch Paper Copies Ready to copy Check Job a ee C Application De
84. 1 2 Utility mode Utility mode 12 12 1 12 1 1 Utility mode Overview of Utility mode parameters List of registration information and parameters This section describes the buttons available when the Utility Counter key is pressed amp Note The buttons that appear in the Utility mode parameters differ depending on the specified settings List of Utility mode parameters First level menu Second level menu Third level menu Details 1 One Touch User Box Registration 1 Create One Touch Destination 1 Address Book Public 2 Address Book Person al 3 Group 4 E mail Settings Refer to Create One Touch Destination on page 12 8 2 Create User Box 1 Public Personal User Box 2 Bulletin Board User Box 3 Relay User Box Refer to Create User Box on page 12 8 3 Limiting Access to Des tinations 1 Apply Levels Groups to Destinations Refer to Limiting Access to Destinations on page 12 8 2 User Settings 1 System Settings 1 Language Selection 2 Measurement Unit Set tings 3 Paper Tray Settings 4 Power Save Settings 5 Output Settings 6 Blank Page Print Set tings 7 Density for Original Type 8 Page Number Print Po sition Refer to System Settings on page 12 17 2 Custom Display Set tings 1 Copier Settings 2 Scan Fax Setti
85. 1 2 x 11W 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W G Q Custom sizes 100 mm x 140 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Post Inserter PI 504 Upper tray Standard sizes A4 Ga to A5 H 8 1 2 x 11 Ga to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Q 16K wide paper A4W to ASW y 8 1 2 x 11W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W W Custom sizes 182 mm x 139 mm to 216 mm x 297 mm Lower tray Standard sizes A3 Gato A5 Wy 11 x17 Gato 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 W Foolscap 8K 16K Ga wide paper A3W ca to ASW Wy 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W D Custom sizes 182 mm x 139 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga 8 x 13 Gy one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative Equipment Available Size Automatic Duplex Unit Standard sizes A3 Ga to A5 Gi W B6 A6 11 x 17 amp to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 G Foolscap 2 8K a 16K Ga Q wide paper ASW to ASW 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W W Custom sizes 105 mm x 140 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Finisher FS 524 Main finishing tray Tray 2 Standard sizes A3 ato A5 a Q 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 1 9 Foolscap 2 8K Ga 16K Ga Q wide paper A3W to ASW 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W D Custom sizes 182 mm x 148 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm 128 mm x 139 mm Sub finishing tray Tray 1 Standard sizes i A3 Ga to A5 H B6 A6 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Ga Foolscap 2 8K m
86. 1 Automatically selecting the zoom ratio AUtO ZOOM Setting eeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeees 3 39 3 6 2 Specifying the zoom ratio of the original Full Size Setting ee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeesneees 3 40 3 6 3 Typing in the zoom ratio XY ZOOM Setting eececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaaeeseeeseaaeeeeeseneaeeeeessaees 3 41 3 6 4 Slightly reducing the copy Minimal Setting ee seesseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaneesesaeeeeeaeeeeeeeesenaeees 3 43 3 6 5 Selecting a preset zoom ratio Enlarge and reduce settings eeeeeeseeeesseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeenaeees 3 44 3 6 6 Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios Individual ZOOM settings ccceeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 3 45 3 6 7 Selecting a StOred ZOOM atl iki eepe ionta eee cons aaa aa a aaa Aa coasleensacenehgucdaecteneeushicauseeespeateaes 3 47 3 6 8 Storing the desired zoom ratio ceccceeeceeeseeeceseeeeeeeceeseseneseseneneneeeneseeenaseaseneeeessesceeeeeseesesenensseeeees 3 48 3 7 Selecting an original gt COpy Setting s s nssssnnnneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nna 3 50 3 7 1 Selecting single sided copieS s ssssunerenssenerunnrnnrnnnunennnnnunnnrunentunnuacrnunnnnnunnnnanannennann emanen nanenane nenne 3 51 3 7 2 Selecting double sided copies esesecceeseeeeseeeeseeceneseeeeseceeeeeeceneseeenssceeeeseneneseeeeseeeeeeseneeseeeesneeeens 3 52 3 8 Sel
87. 1 Selecting single sided copies vY As the factory default 1 Sided gt 1 Sided is selected Y For details on using the original glass to scan multi page originals refer to Scanning a multi page original from the original glass on page 3 15 1 In the Basic screen touch Duplex Combine o blist Ready to copy Copies Density Duplexs Background Combine Density Auto Background Auto Paper Removal Select SHH8HG0000 g Finishing Separate Scan Cotas L z 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 1007 Auto Rotate OFF The Duplex Combine screen appears 2 Touch 1 Sided gt 1 Sided or 2 Sided gt 1 Sided C s Ready to Copies iginal Type j Application 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 If 2 Sided gt 1 Sided is selected specify the position of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded original otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired If the binding position for the original is set to Auto the position of the binding margin is automatically selected A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 297 mm or less If the original length is more than 297 mm a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected If Auto is selected under Original Bind Direction the binding margin is set at the top or at the left bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 51 3 Basic copy
88. 101 6 Select Recipient User and then enter the user name and password User Authentication Account Track User Authentication Account Track Public User Department Name Recipient User Password User Name user001 Password a ooo D s Cancel If User Authentication Account Track User Authentication Settings Administrative Setting ID amp Print Settings Public User is set to Save in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted public user jobs are also saved in the ID amp Print User Box 7 Click Verify to check the user ID 8 Click OK If the user name or the password is incorrect type in the correct information Confirmation 1 Verification has succeeded 9O Click the OK button 13 24 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 13 10 From the Output Method drop down list select Print Printing Preferences Basic Layout Finish Cover Mode Stamp Composition Quality Other Favorite Setting Original Orientation al Portrait Landscape Original Size A4 Paper Size Same as Original Size Zoom 25 400 Ato Manual Paper Tray Ato Paper Type Plain Paper Default Cx Cee Ce I
89. 2 0 ADF Centering Adjust the center position in the transverse feed 0 0 mm direction of the original between 3 0 mm and 3 0 mm Copy Protect Density Adjustment Adjust the density of hidden text printed as copy protection 200 to 255 219 1 Appears only when Finisher FS 610 is installed 2 Appears only when finisher is installed with punch kit 3 Appears only when Z folding unit is installed 4 Appears only when post inserter is installed Q Detail Finisher Adjustment appears only when an optional finisher is installed The Finisher Adjustment parameters that are available differ depending on the model of the installed finisher bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 29 Utility mode List Counter Parameter Description Management List Job Settings List The machine settings can be printed Paper Size Type Counter counted Store combinations of paper sizes and paper types to be Reset Settings Parameter Description Default Setting System Auto Reset Specify the desired length of time until the auto Priority Mode matic system reset operation is performed Copy e Priority Mode Select the setting Box Copy or Scan Fax for the mode that the machine enters when the automatic system reset oper ation is performed e System Auto Reset Time Specify the setting between 1 and 9 minutes or OFF for the desired length of time until the auto
90. 25 2 Before making copies 2 1 16 Basic settings screens When the machine is ready to begin making copies after being turned on the Basic screen appears To activate a function or to select a setting lightly touch the desired button in the touch panel Basic screen ae d Copies 9 Ready to copy ee Check Job BERRE Bina BURBEAS eS beii g n Auto J 1 RaRsgs gond d ololololololmlaimie UG 7 Finishing Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 6 5 4 Quick Copy screen a FEN 9 Ready to copy are inal Faas B4 A3 ERN B5 A4 A4 BS 7 A4 gt B4 Bar Aa A4 A3 A3 A4 B5 B4 B4 BS i EZI 50 0 EATE uto Rotate OFF e Conversion _ 4 in 1 8 in 1 g 02704 2008 10 10 SI 100 4 5 2 26 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 Touching J displays Density settings Background Removal settings and Finishing in the left panel Biouick copy B Setting A 0 Density Paper Simplex Duplex Goooogfooeag Rerogar d Goooopfoooep No Item Name Description 1 Message display area The status of the machine and details on operations are displayed 2 Functions settings display Tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions are dis area played Touch a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for specifying the settings Icon display area Icons indic
91. 26 Memory 100 When using the keypad to specify the settings press the C clear key and then specify the setting To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key To cancel the Center Erase function touch No What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified gt The massage Input error appears If Input error appears or if the erased width was incorrectly entered press the C clear key in the keypad and then specify the correct value Touch OK Specify any other desired copy settings Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies oN OA Press the Start key 8 54 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 8 14 3 Erasing outside areas of the original Non Image Area Erase function This function detects the original size placed on the original glass and erases outside areas of the original 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Touch Application and then touch Erase To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled list Ready to copy copies Basic j foriginal Setting Original Type Quek 100 0 ij ehSBt r insert 4 Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat O z J Page Margin Image Adjust Booklet K E S
92. 3 Programming copy settings Frequently used copy settings can be programmed and recalled to be used with other copy jobs For details refer to Registering copy programs Mode Memory on page 4 16 Checking the copy settings Screens showing the current copy settings can be displayed From these screens the copy settings can also be changed For details refer to Checking the copy settings Check Job on page 4 3 Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens The text and buttons in the touch panel can be displayed in a larger size that is easier to read allowing basic operations to be easily performed For details refer to the User manual Enlarge Display Operations Displaying explanations of functions and settings The name and function of parts and details of functions and settings appears in the Help screens For details refer to Displaying function descriptions Help on page 4 22 Interrupting a copy job The copy job being printed can be interrupted in order for a different copy job to be printed For details refer to Interrupting a copy job Interrupt mode on page 4 15 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Introduction 1 2 Explanation of manual conventions The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below Safety advices A DANGER Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power gt Obse
93. 3 Press the Start key After the original has been scanned the following message appears ad the next original and then press Start Job No Density Duplex BSckarddna Paper p Auto A4 D 100 0 eegGmaooor When scanning of the current original is finished touch Finish Hane Status COPY Printing Number of Sets asi Number of Originals Job Details 22 08 2008 15 32 Memory 100 Load the next batch of the original and then press the Start key Ifthe Separate Scan Output Method parameter is set to Batch Print touch Finish in the following screen which appears while the original is scanned with the ADF to continue to step 5 ad the next original and then press Start Job No Rensityy Duplexs Background Combine Auto as AD 100 0 eegemaooor When scanning of the current original is finished touch Finish Hane Status copy Printwait Number of Sets Number of Originals Job Details 22 08 2008 15 19 Memory 100 If the original cannot be loaded into the ADF place it on the original glass For details on the types of originals that can be loaded into the ADF refer to Originals on page 7 31 To change the scanning settings touch Change Setting For details on changing the scanning settings refer to Changing scan settings for each original on page 3 32 The buttons tha
94. 4 Binding Position Zoon Original Size Original Type 15 07 2008 a Henory bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 17 Basic copy operations 11 After all original pages have been scanned touch Finish Scanning will be finished Backar dana Hane Status COPY PrintWait Number of Sets Number of Originals Job Details _ 2 022008 10 10 Memory 100 12 Press the Start key If the Separate Scan Output Method parameter is set to Batch Print touch Print or press the Start key Please wait Hane Status copy PrintWait o print touch Print o change setting touch Change Setting Number of Sets 22 08 2008 15 42 Memory 100 Job Details If the Separate Scan Output Method parameter is set to Batch Print the copy settings can be changed To change the copy settings touch Change Setting and then touch OK after changing the settings as desired The settings for the proof copy can be changed Press Start to restart Hane Status COPY PrintWait Page Margin Sheet covers Chapter Insert 4 1 Sided Stamps Composition 4 T lt i Finishing 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100
95. 5 Custom sizes 210 mm x 279 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Tri Fold 2 Plain paper 60 g m A4 8 1 2x 11 3sheets 60g m to Booklet tray to 90 g m 16K 80 g m 1 sheet 81 g m to 90 g m 4 Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga 8 x 13 Ga one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative 2 Can be used only with Finisher FS 610 Q Detail When manually performing the hole punching operation from the post inserter control panel only two holes can be punched Names of control panel parts Center Staple amp Fold Corner Staple Finishing key 2 Position Staple Tri Fold Punch key Start stop key bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 87 3 Basic copy operations Finishing Load the paper into the lower tray of the post inserter Ifthe Corner or 2 Position Staple settings are to be used load the paper face up If a Punch setting is to be used load the paper face up Ifthe paper is to be stapled and folded at the center load the paper so that the side that is to be the front when bound is face up Ifthe paper is to be folded in three load the paper so that the side that is to be the outside when folded in three is face up The loaded paper will be finished into one set Slide the paper guides to
96. 605 2 3 35 heel a a a a aa aE Ea na Ara aa aaao n aaa aa Ea lena eas 6 9 6 2 8 ocala ane alna a O AEE EATE T A EET 6 10 6 2 9 ee Age Ne a 0 A E A A E A S 6 10 6 2 10 Q tp t iray OT OO O ia hee Bs e a a dc ad ee eet te ote 6 11 6 2 11 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 n sessnsnnensnsnnnneeesnnnnnsennnnnesrnnnnssennnnnnsrtnnnnnennnnnnnee nnne 6 11 6 2 12 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 sssessseessisssrnesrrrerrnssirnssrnnerinnrrnnntinnsttnninnntnnnetnnnsnnnnna 6 12 6 2 13 Other Options ia sinc Heels hela et pat ee terion Le ei ee eee 6 12 paper originals 7 1 COpy Paper E chen T E E E E E E 7 3 7 1 1 Paper tray and equipment neina indies el de ea ee ene eas 7 3 7 1 2 Raper weight cr nai avis tee eee eee es 7 3 7 1 3 Paper Tray Output Tray Capacity wcicicccaccceacccicesciccesresseccernecennevantceevacdessneennucediecans nipaita 7 4 7 1 4 PADEK SIZO 50 fz canedtdicieg as chins ES E E EE E suaetdase agen sdcaaseeasshdacdacaneednatcugeade 7 4 7 1 5 SPeClaliPaper a eg hie Settee as eet el eee edt ete en ae eet 7 6 7 1 6 Precautions for papers erre iaria aeeoa adaa e EA a aeaa e a aaa aaa a aiia aaa aaaeaii ai 7 8 7 1 7 Paper Sfora g O e aa a r a hace bees sensi Chest a a a aa a naa aa aaa aa aa a a aaa 7 8 7 1 8 Auto Tray SwitCh FUNCtON ia asia ceedecicessecssnedazecntgedsacensaseabondecuseuceeasenedauedesesaceenedeasetanedendsedsensdausensendcevss 7 8 7 2 Selecting the paper settings for bypass tray cccsss
97. 66 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Touch Application and then touch Stamp Composition To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled Copies ob list Ready to copy Basic original Setting Original Type BBICESPer 100 07 ij a enSBter Yns rt Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat O a J Page Margin Inage Adjust Booklet a E fj Stamp Compos ition 4 Save in User Box A Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Stamp Composition screen appears 3 Touch Copy Protect list Ready to copy copies Application gt Stamp Composition a d Date Time Page Number 4 Stamp H a5 Copy Protect 4 Stamp Repeat 4 Overlay E A4 D 100 0 Distri Check Details Registered Overlay 4 Header Footer 4 Baar aa Riber Watermark 02 26 2010 09 44 Memory 90 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 67 Application functions 4 Select the desired type of copy protection text To cancel the Copy Protect function touch No Select desired Copy Protect to apply to aE document APP ion gt Stamp Composition gt Copy Prote Copies S8180EPe 1
98. 7 off desired touch Original Direction and then select the setting appropriate for the original For details on specifying the original orientation refer to Selecting the original orientation Original Direction settings on page 3 26 8 Touch OK 9 Specify any other desired copy settings 10 Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies 11 Press the Start key bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 43 8 Application functions 8 12 Adjusting the image to fit the paper Image Adjust settings Use this function to make a copy adjusting the position of printed image The Centering function centers the original image on copy paper Setting Description Centering The image is centered in the paper without being enlarged Full Scan The full image is scanned without triming to create margins Even if text is printed to the edges of the original it can be copied without being cut off Full Scan ABCD Q Detail Normally images are trimmed by 3 mm at the top 4 mm at the bottom and 2 mm on each side left right from the paper size f Full Scan is selected images are not trimmed but copied to the edge of the sheet 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Touch Application and then touch Image Adjust To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions pre
99. 70 mm 1 mm 21 mm 1 mm Paper type for outputting hole punched paper Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m thin paper 50 g m to 59 g m Paper size for outputting hole punched paper 2 holes A3 Ga to A5 Ga y 11 x 17 Ga 8 1 2 x 14 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Foolscap 8K a 16K G Q 4 holes A3 ca to A4 aa B5 U 11 x 17 ca 8 1 2 x 11 8K 16K U Fold type Z fold Paper type for outputting z folded paper Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m thin paper 50 g m to 59 g m Paper size for outputting z folded paper A3 a B4 Power requirements Supplied from main unit Dimensions 169 W x 660 D x 930 H mm Weight Approx 38 kg Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 8 1 2 x 13 Ga 8 x 13 Gy one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative bizhub 751 601 Version 2 6 9 6 Specifications 6 2 8 Post Inserter PI 504 Item Description Name PI 504 Configuration 2 upper and lower paper trays Cover sheet type Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m thick paper 91 g m to 200 g m thin paper 50 g m to 59 g m Cover sheet size Upper tray Standard sizes A4 Ga Q to A5 8 1 2 x 11Ga J to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 16Kaa wide paper A4W to ASW y 8 1 2 x 11W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W W Lower tray Standard sizes A3 Gato A5 fy 11 x 17 Gato
100. Auto is selected the binding margin is set at the top or at the left If Auto is selected for the binding position load the original with the top toward the back of the machine If the original is loaded in any other orientation the correct position will not be selected What happens when Auto is selected The factory default setting is Auto Touch Auto to automatically determine the binding position according to the orientation of the loaded original If the original length is 297 mm or less a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected If the original length is more than 297 mm a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected Touch or to specify the binding margin width If None is selected the binding margin width is set to 0 mm When making double sided copies the image orientation can adjusted without creating a binding margin If a decimal value is displayed in the screen use the keypad to type in the setting For details on switching between decimal and fraction values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value How can the entered margin position be corrected Without changing the mar
101. Auto Reset Confirmation function When the system auto reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode a message can be displayed allowing you to choose either to continue operating without exiting Enlarge Display mode or to exit Enlarge Display mode and return to the Basic screen In addition it is possible to specify the display time for the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode Do A System Auto Reset will cancel the settings you want to continue setting Yes Enlarge Display mode is not exited No Enlarge Display mode is exited and the Basic screen is displayed 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen refer to Displaying the accessibility setting screen on page 4 27 For details on the automatic system reset operation refer to Automatically conserving energy Sleep mode on page 2 35 2 Touch System Auto Reset Confirmation or press the 3 key in the keypad NE Use the menu buttons or I2 keypad to make a selection Accessibility Setting a e N Touch Panel Adjustment Key Repeat Starty Interval Time Confirmation A Auto Reset Confirmation Enlarge Display Mode Conti natron bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 31 4 Additional copy operations The System Auto Reset Confirmation screen appears 3 Touch the button
102. Business Hours screen displayed from Administrator Settings mode the machine can be set so that the screen for entering the password for non business hours is not displayed The default setting for the Password for Non Business Hours parameter is No the screen is not displayed 2 3 10 Controlling each user s use of this machine User Authentication If user authentication settings have been specified by the administrator only users that have been registered can use this machine In addition the number of printed pages can be managed for each user Y When user authentication settings have been specified only users who enter passwords for specified users can use this machine Y Contact the administrator for a user name and password and for the server name Y If machine authentication or external server authentication has been set a total of 1 000 users and accounts can be registered 1 Touch User Name Enter User Name and password and then touch Login or press the Access key User Name 4 Password 02 02 2008 Memory Ifa list of user names can be displayed the desired user name can be selected from the list Touch User Name List touch the button for the desired user name to select it and then touch OK Users who have no access to a user name and password can touch Public User Access to use this machine For details on specifying public user settings refer to Selecting an
103. Changes and then close the Printer Info dialog box 14 28 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 14 Sending a print job 1 2 Open the data in the application click File and then click Print Check that the printer name has been selected The Print dialog box differs depending on the application Printer KONICA MINOLTA 751 Presets Standard Ce RE _ Copies amp Pages Copies 1 C Collated Pages Bail O From 1 to 1 PDF Preview Cancel Print From the drop down menu select Output Method Printer KONICA MINOLTA 751 Presets Standard CSCS Output Method Paper View Q Detailed Information w Collate l Offset Output Method Print Z User Authentication Account Track em gt Detail Settings Printer Information Default PDF Preview Cancel Print Select the User Authentication check box The User Authentication dialog box appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 29 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 Select Recipient User and then enter the user name and password User Authentication J O Public User Recipient User User Name Password _ User Authentication Server Setting
104. Finisher FS 525 built in staple unit Finisher FS 610 built in stable unit and folding unit Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 for Finisher FS 524 525 610 Z Folding Unit ZU 604 ZU 605 built in punch kit e Post Inserter PI 504 for Finisher FS 524 525 61 0 Shift Tray SF 602 for the machine without finisher Output Tray OT 505 for the machine without finisher 7 1 2 Paper weight Paper trays Paper Weight Main unit trays Tray 1 2 3 and 4 Large capacity unit LU 405 Large capacity unit LU 406 Bypass tray Post Inserter PI 504 60 g m to 90 g m Select thick paper when loading 91 g m to 200 g m paper Select thin paper when loading 50 g m to 59 g m paper Equipment Paper Weight Automatic Duplex Unit 60 g m to 200 g m Finisher FS 524 Punch Kit PK 505 PK 504 Sort group 50 g m to 200 g m Sort and offset group and offset 50 g m to 200 g m Staple 60 g m to 90 g m Punch 60 g m to 128 g m Finisher FS 525 Punch Kit PK 505 PK 504 Sort group 50 g m to 200 g m Sort and offset group and offset 50 g m to 200 g m Staple 60 g m4 to 80 g m Punch 60 g m to 128 g m Finisher FS 610 Punch Kit PK 505 PK 504 Sort group 50 g m to 200 g m Sort and offset group and offset 50 g m to 200 g m Staple 60 g m to 80 g m Half fold Tri fold 60 g m to 90 g m Center staple amp fold 60 g m to 80 g m Punch 60 g m to
105. Ifa value outside the allowable range is specified the message Input error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value 1 In the Basic screen touch Zoom Check Job Nene Status Copies Ready to copy c Original Setting Original Type Application Density d Duplex Background E Combine Density Auto Backgr ound 1 uto Paper Remo Select saeerOooo 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory The Zoom screen appears 2 Touch XY Zoom l Job List SeFecEaPer 100 0 Ready to copy Copies Check Details 115 4 122 4 B4 A3 z W es ay 4 Ba 22 08 2008 13 41 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 45 Basic copy operations Touch X under Set Individual Zoom and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio between 25 0 and 400 0 for the X direction i 4 Specify the zoom ratio using the keypad Copies Job List Press C to set the zoom to 100 0 Zoom gt XY Zoom Set Individual Zoon Buto PapeR 100 0 Select g 100 0 Check Details
106. Ifthe specified page number is greater than the number of pages in the original that page number is ignored 5 Under Chapter Paper touch Copy Insert or None If None is selected all pages of the copy are printed on the same paper To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key To cancel the Chapters function touch No Job List eEnter ist page of chapters using the keypad Copies l Touch Sort to sort pages in ascending order Application gt Sheet Cover Chapter Insert gt Chapters Sefece 100 0 E3 pe Baper Copy Insert 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 19 8 Application functions If Copy Insert is selected Chapter Paper appears Touch Chapter Paper select the paper to be used for the first page of the chapter and then touch OK Job List eEnter ist page of chapters using the keypad Copies l Touch Sort to sort pages in ascending order i he 25 08 2008 Memory Touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears Specify any other desired copy settings Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies O ON O Press the Start key 8 20 bizhub 751 601 Ve
107. Install from a list or specific location Advanced and then click Next Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for USB Device If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 6 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do A Install the software automatically Recommended Click Next to continue bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 11 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 Select the Include this location in the search check box check that the application DVD appears as a location to be searched and then click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed v Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search D BioDriver USB Driver Browse E Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware If the application DVD does not appear as a location to be searched for the driver click Browse select the BioDriver USB Driver folder on the DVD and then click OK
108. MINOLTA PageScope Data Administrator Authentication settings Address settings Default Gro TOR W Elle Edit Tool Window Help TOP 3 Registration of Device Network Initial Setting Function selection User list O Z 1000 items 8 Device information 721 Status User name E Mailad Function restriction Total C Maximum eI Gg Authentication settings U authentication se CB External Server m Address settings User box E Column option amp 3 Refresh from the device kd 13 16 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 1 3 6 Selecta template and then click OK Select user template Please select an user template Use a Template No Template name Permitted function Max allowance manag 1 system Permit copy function The User settings dialog box appears 7 Type in the user name and password click the Vein Authentication tab and then click Import f desired type in the e mail address User settings User Name Juser01 Password E Mail Address Account Information Vein Authentication data Unregistered Required field Cancel bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 17 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 8 Position the finger on the authentication unit and then click Start reading Scan the finger vein pattern three times
109. Memory 100 16 Touch OK The maximum number of prints allowed is set 17 To use authentication unit biometric type or authentication unit IC card type touch Register Auth Info Register Auth Info appears only if an authentication unit is installed on this machine The Register Auth Info screen appears 18 Touch Edit When using authentication unit biometric type place a finger on the authentication unit and register the vein patterns When using authentication unit IC card type place an IC card on the authentication unit and register the card information 19 Touch Function Permission The Function Permission screen appears 12 76 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 20 Touch the button for the desired setting for each operation To permit the operation to be performed touch Allow To prohibit the operation to be performed touch Restrict Function permissions can be set for the selected user Touch All Users to apply the settings to all users dministrator Settings gt Edit gt Function Permission User Name User All Users Restrict Restrict Restrict Restrict Restrict 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch All Users to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered users Touch All Users touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears With Print Scan Fax TX printing
110. Memory 100 The Finishing screen appears Touch Fold Bind Copies Job list Ready to copy Finishing Seiece P 100 0 as Corner 2Hole B a 2 Position 4 H0le EE Fold Bind 22 08 2008 14 01 Henory 100 The Fold Bind screen appears 3 84 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 Touch Z Fold To cancel the Z Fold setting touch Z Fold or the button for a different setting 4 Touch OK and then touch OK again bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 85 Basic copy operations 3 13 Manually using the finisher If the post inserter is installed onto the finisher the finisher can be operated manually by using the control panel of the post inserter The following Finishing settings are available with each of the option configurations Finisher FS 524 FS 525 and post inserter Corner Staple 2 Position Staple Finisher FS 610 and post inserter e Corner Staple 2 Position Staple e Center Staple amp Fold Tri Fold Finisher FS 524 FS 525 post inserter and punch kit e Corner Staple 2 Position Staple Punch settings F
111. Not Print is selected inserted pages are only counted but page numbers are not printed on them If Skip the Page s is selected inserted pages are not counted and page numbers are not printed on them 8 62 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 15 3 8 9 To specify the text size touch Text Size and then select the size The factory default is 10 pt Job List Specify the size of the stamp Copies Application gt Page Number gt Text Size auyeckerer 100 0 Check Detai Mrmr 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch OK and then touch Close in the next screen that appears Specify any other desired copy settings To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key 10 Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies 11 Press the Start key Printing previously registered stamps Stamp function 1 Position the original to be copied Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp For details on registering stamps refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Touch Application and then touch Stamp Composition To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled iobtist Ready
112. OK Touch X or Y touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction and then touch and to specify the size of the paper Ifa decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen use the keypad to type in the setting For details on switching between decimal and fraction values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 To cancel changes to the settings touch Cancel Custom Size screen Job List Replenish paper Copies Original Setting gt Original Size gt Custom Size A4 D 100 0 22 08 2008 13 28 cance J ok Memory 100 A f a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value 3 20 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 4 2 Copying originals of mixed sizes Mixed Original setting Originals of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed and scanned one by one automatically Y __ Donot load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the Y mark otherwise an original misfeed or damage to the original or machine may occur However an original that exceeds 100 sheets can be scanned in separate bat
113. Open the data in the application click File and then click Print Check that the printer name has been selected The Print dialog box differs depending on the application Printer KONICA MINOLTA 751 Presets Standard Ce RE _ Copies amp Pages Copies 1 C Collated Pages Bail O From 1 to 1 PDF Preview Cancel Print From the drop down menu select Output Method Printer KONICA MINOLTA 751 Presets Standard CSCS Output Method Paper View Q Detailed Information w Collate l Offset Output Method Print Z User Authentication Account Track em gt Detail Settings Printer Information Default PDF Preview Cancel Print Select the User Authentication check box The User Authentication dialog box appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 27 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 5 Select Recipient User and then enter the user name and password User Authentication j Public User Recipient User User Name Password User Authentication Server Setting LD Save Settings Default Cane E If User Authentication Account Track User Authentication Settings Administrative Setting ID amp Print Sett
114. Password and continue with step 4 If the Account Track Input Method in the Administrator Settings is set to Password Only only Password is displayed in the authentication screen The password can be directly entered in the authentication screen using the keypad If the password consists of numerals only touching Login or pressing the Access key allows logging on without displaying a keyboard screen If the password consists of alphabet characters numerals and symbols touch Password and continue with step 4 After entering numerals using the keypad touching Password allows alphabet characters or symbols to be entered in succession n password and then touch Login he Access key Hane Status Password 4 Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 2 42 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 Type in the account name and then touch OK ype in the login account name using the board or keypad Press S C to delete the entered Account Name Account Track gt Enter Account Name FE EE v 02 25 Memory Enlarge ON Touch Password Job List eEnter Account Name and password touch Login or press the Acc l user Nre Status Account Name 4 Groupi Password Job Details 02 02 2008 Memory Type in the password and then touch OK the keyboard or keypad to type in the 5 t g Shif
115. Photoconductor OPC Luminous source White inert gas fluorescent lamp Copying system Laser electrostatic copy method Developing system Dry type dual component reverse magnetic brush developing Fusing system Heat roller fixing Resolution Scanning 600 dpi x 600 dpi Printing 2400 dpi x 600 dpi Document Types sheets books spread three dimensional objects Size Max A3 11 x 17 Thickness Max 30 mm Weight 6 8 kg Detectable sizes for original glass A3 ca to A5 G Q B6 A6 11 x 17 Gato 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Ga Qj Foolscap 8K 16K Ga Q Detectable sizes for ADF A3 to A5 G 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 11 U ia 2 Paper types Normal paper 60 g m to 90 g m thin paper 50 g m to 59 g m thick paper 91 g m to 200 g m overhead projector transparencies 1 labels tab paper trace paper special paper high quality paper user paper recycled paper colored paper letterhead Paper sizes Tray 1 and tray 2 A4 U B5 U A5 U 8 1 2 x 11 U 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 U 16K U Tray 3 and tray 4 Standard sizes A3 aa B4 a A4 G q B5 Bll A5 11 x 17 G 8 1 2 x 144 8 1 2 x 11 Ga 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 fd Foolscap 2 wide paper A3W Ga B4W A4W cai Q B5W ASW Gy 11 x 17W aa 8 1 2 x 11W ta 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W H Custom sizes 182 mm x 140 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Bypass tray Standard sizes A3 G to A5 G q B6 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 11 U Foolscap 2 wide
116. Pro hibited Functions When Authentication Failed is set to Mode 2 this parameter is set to Mode 2 Mode 1 Type in the ID and password for the confidential doc ument and then select the document Mode 2 Enter the Secure Print ID select the document and then enter the password for authentication Manual Destination Input Select whether or not a recipient can be typed in manually in Allow a recipient input screen Print Data Capture Select whether or not data for a print job can be captured For details refer to the User manual Print Operations Restrict Fax TX Select whether or not fax transmissions are prohibited OFF Hide Personal Information Select whether or not the file name and destination are hidden OFF in the job log Display Activity Log Select whether or not the communication log is displayed ON Delete Job Log The entire job log can be cleared Secure Print Only This setting is for the print operations For details refer to the User manual Print Op erations Web browser contents ac cess This setting is for the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser For de tails refer to the User manual Advanced Function Operations bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 39 12 Utility mode Q Detail The operation of the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter applies to the following passwords User passwords accou
117. Ready to copy Check Job Duplex Combine ivy user T Nane Status pers ity i ig Auto i Background Auto Paper Removal Select eee eGo000 1 1 z TTT Me Finishing E Scan Auto Rotate OFF Job Details o 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Paper screen appears 2 Select the button for the bypass tray Copies F wist Ready to copy iginal Setting Selece r 100 0 22 08 2008 13 39 Memory 100 3 Touch Change Tray Settings bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 4 Touch Custom Size Paper Type Paper Size 1 2 The Custom Size screen appears 5 Type in the length X and width Y of the paper Make sure that X is selected touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction and then touch and to type in the length of side X 139 7 mm to 458 0 mm Make sure that Y is selected touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction and then touch and to type in the length of side Y 100 0 mm to 314 0 mm Ifa decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen use the keypad to type in the setting For details on switching between decimal and fraction values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 If a deci
118. Rotate OFF Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Finishing screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 69 3 Basic copy operations 2 Touch Face Up To cancel the settings touch Face Up again As the factory default OFF is selected The copies are output with their back sides facing up The following settings cannot be used together with the Face Up setting Booklet Double sided copying Center Staple amp Fold Half Fold When Face Up is selected the following Finishing settings are not available Offset Staple Punch Tri Fold Z Fold OT VU ee Ropes Finishing Sefece 100 0 DEON 2 Position 22 08 2008 14 01 Memory 100 3 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again 3 70 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 11 5 Stapling copies Staple settings Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places Q Detail n order for the copies to be stapled all of the following conditions must be met The paper width must be between 182 mm and 314 mm The paper length must be between 139 mm and 458 mm f the Mixed Original setting is selected all copies must have the same paper width
119. Top Left Corner Staple Top Right 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 73 3 Basic copy operations Touch Auto to automatically determine the stapling position according to the orientation of the loaded original If the original length is 314 mm or less the long side of the paper is stapled If the original length is more than 314 mm the short side of the paper is stapled If Auto is selected for the stapling position load the original with the top toward the back of the machine If the original is loaded in any other orientation the stapling will not be correctly positioned If Auto is selected the stapling position is set at the top or at the left To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key 4 f desired touch Original Direction and then select the setting appropriate for the original For details on specifying the original orientation refer to Selecting the original orientation Original Direction settings on page 3 26 5 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again 3 11 6 Punching holes in copies Punch settings Q Detail n order to be punch holes in the copies all of the following conditions must be met The paper width
120. Type settings on page 3 59 Inserting paper between copies of OHP In order to prevent OHP from becoming stuck to each other a page interleaf can be inserted between the transparency copies For details refer to Inserting paper between OHP transparencies OHP Interleave function on page 8 3 aac te mE Adding a cover page Cover pages can be added to copies or copies can be made using different paper for example colored paper for only the cover pages For details refer to Adding cover pages Cover Sheet function on page 8 6 J E Inserting different paper into copies Different paper such as colored paper can be inserted for specified pages in the copies For details refer to Inserting different paper into copies Insert Sheet function on page 8 10 Inserting pages from a different original at specified locations in a copy An original scanned later can be inserted for specified pages in an original scanned earlier for copying For details refer to Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page Insert Image function on page 8 14 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 1 5 Introduction Printing double sided copies with the specified page on the front side Double sided copies can be printed with the specified pages on the front side For details refer to Specifying pages to be printed on the front side Chapters function
121. Unit IC Card Type AU 201 10 From the Output Method drop down list select Print amp Printing Preferences Basic Layout Finish Cover Mode Stamp Composition Quality Other Favorite Setting Untitled __Add Edit Original Orientation Output Method Potrat a p Al O Landscape Ea Pint Orginal Size User Settings AS J Authentication Account Track Paper Size Same as Original Size j Copies 1 Zoom 25 400 n i toes Ato l o 2 CHE Boe fae S Q Coe Auto Paper Type Plain Paper Paper Settings for Each Tray Cea Cox Cae Ce If User Authentication Account Track User Authentication Settings Administrative Setting ID amp Print Settings ID amp Print is set to ON in the Administrator Settings of the machine general print jobs are also saved in the ID amp Print User Box 11 Specify the desired settings and then click OK 12 Click Apply and then click Print The print job is sent 13 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit tored in the ID amp Print User Box ted by authenticating finger on the authentication Unit ID amp PW user z it Print amp Access Access Nae Status Job Details 03 03 2010 14 10 Memory 100 Make sure that Begin Printing
122. User Access To prohibit unregistered users from using this machine touch Restrict To allow this machine to be used by touching Public User Access in the authentication screen without entering a user name or password even though user authentication settings have been applied touch Allow ON Without Login allows the machine to be used without authentication when logging on as a public user When logging on as an authorized user the Access key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen Specify a setting for Account Track To cancel account tracking touch OFF To use the account track function touch ON Specify a setting for Account Track Input Method To allow this machine to be used after the account name and password are entered in the account track screen touch Account Name amp Password To allow this machine to be used after the password is entered in the account track screen touch Password Only bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 69 12 Utility mode 8 Specify a setting for Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track Synchronize ON MFP is set and Account Track is set to ON this setting allows this machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information the first time that the machine is used if the corresponding account was specified during user registration When External Server Authentication is selected and Account Track
123. Weekly timer 2 36 12 44 Wide Paper settings 7 77 XY Zoom 3 47 Z Folding Unit ZU 604 ZU 605 2 79 Z Fold 3 77 3 83 Z Folded Original 3 23 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 16 5 Index 16 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 16 6
124. Z 1000 item s E Device information1 721 Status User name E Mail ad Function restriction Total C Maximum p5 Add d Authentication setting o egg e R eE A amp User authentication Gg External Server oea w Address settings E Delete E Column option User box lt HelgF1 63 Refresh from the device amp Export to the device 12 Click Write Data Administrator is equipped with a batch copy feature that allows the registered user data to be specified on multiple machines specified to be used with the authentication unit Export to the device Write the edited data to the device Group name Default Group Registered name i Te 162227 Device address i 7216 22 27 The registered user data is specified on the machine 13 Click OK KONICA MINOLTA PageScope Data Administrator X i Update data completely bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 19 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 13 2 3 14 Disconnect the authentication unit from this USB port of the computer 15 Turn off the machine with the main power switch connect the authentication unit and then turn on the machine with the main power switch Logging on to this machine When the machine is turned off then on again with the main power switch wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off The machine may not ope
125. a general subscriber line LINE PORT1 26 Telephone jack 2 Used for connecting a general subscriber line LINE PORT2 This jack is used when the optional fax multi line kit has been installed 27 Jack for connecting a tele Used for connecting the cord from a telephone phone TEL PORT1 28 Jack for connecting a tele Used for connecting the cord from a telephone phone TEL PORT2 29 Power cord Supplies power to the machine bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 7 Before making copies Internal 2 1 3 Lit N a AS GS at yr Iz AN Cm 7 Jg SA Ay YS AA LY Ney TI 1 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 8 Before making copies No Part name Description 1 Drum section Forms the copy image 2 Vertical transport door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds in the vertical transport section 3 Dial M1 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit 4 ADU unit Pulled out when clearing paper misfeeds 5 Cover M12 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit 6 Dial m Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit 7 Cover M3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit 8 Cover M
126. a paper misfeed in the ADU unit 8 o eccecceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeseeeneeeeeees 5 16 5 2 10 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU Unit 9 ooo eee ceceeccneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeseeneeeeeeeee 5 18 5 2 11 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU Unit 10 eceececeeececeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeneaeeeees 5 20 5 2 12 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit 11 oo eceecceeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeetecaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeneaeeeees 5 21 5 2 13 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU Unit 12 o oo eceecceceeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeneaeeeees 5 23 5 2 14 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU Unit 13 oo eee ceeeececeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaeeeeeetecaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseseneaeeeees 5 25 5 2 15 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF 14 0 eeeccseseeeeeseeeessenesesceeeeseeeneseeeneseeeesneceseseneeeeeeeeseeeneess 5 27 5 2 16 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF 15 oo ceeeecesceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeescaaeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 5 28 5 2 17 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS 524 FS 525 16 188 oo eeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeseeeessneeeennees 5 29 5 2 18 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS 610 16 180 oo eeececceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeteeneeees 5 34 5 2 19 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Shift Tray 16 oo eee eeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaneeesaeeesnaeeeeeneeeeneeeees 5 38 5 2 20 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Post I
127. a stopped an job Press Start to continue Application gt Frame Erase _ None Status copy Printing Right Job Details 08 2008 15 50 Memory 100 Original Type screen ings can be changed for a stopped an job Pr Start to continue Original Type Hane Status OPY PrintWait B g as E Photo Dot Matrix Original Henory User Preset Zoom 400 0 200 0 50 0 3 34 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations Ez Center Erase screen can be changed for a stopped Press Start to continue Copy gt Center Erase No Name Status copy Printing Job Details 22 08 2008 15 50 C_Henory 100 Original Size screen s can be changed for a stopped Press Start to continue Original Size None Status copy Printing ___belete__ Job Details 22 08 2008 15 51 Henory 100 For details on specifying the Zoom setting refer to Specifying a zoom setting on page 3 39 For details on specifying Frame Erase and Center Erase settings refer to Erasing black marks along borders Erase function on page 8 51 The Original Size screen appears only when the Mixed Original setting is selected 6 Touch OK bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 35 Basic copy operations 3 5 1 Selecting a paper setting The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it
128. a stored job on page 11 15 11 14 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Managing jobs 11 11 2 7 Printing a stored job A job is removed from the Held Jobs list and printed amp Note For details on displaying the screen refer to Displaying the Current Jobs list stored jobs and active jobs on page 11 12 1 In the Current Jobs list of the Print tab touch Release Held Job Allows you to check jobs currently running or those in queue Receive Job History NO Hane Status Document Name S orea Org SeS Delete 37 COPY Printing 10 10 38 COPY Printwait 10 10 1 BPSories y Release Held Job 4 Job Details gt 02 02 2008 10 10 The Release Held Job screen appears 2 Select the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list Select desired job to print and press Start To copy 1 set for proofing press Proof Copy Release Held Job 4 Status Document Name S orea 39 COPY 388rea 10 10 Job Details 02 2008 10 10 cancel Ifthe job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed touch EJ and EH until the desired job is displayed Ifan incorrect job was selected select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it To continue without changing the specified copy settings continue with step 5 3 Touch Change Setting The Change Setting screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 11 15 11 Ma
129. and then check the details for the various functions User manual Copy Operations this manual This user manual contains descriptions of Copy mode operations and machine maintenance Refer to this user manual for details on paper and originals copy procedures using convenient Application functions replacing consumables and troubleshooting operations such as clearing paper misfeeds User manual Enlarge Display Operations This user manual contains details on operating procedures in Enlarge Display mode Refer to this manual for details on using copy scanner G3 fax and network fax operations in Enlarge Display mode User manual Print Operations IC 208 This user manual contains details on the printing functions that can be specified with the optional image controller Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using the printer functions User manual Box Operations This user manual contains operating procedures for using the user boxes on the optional hard disk Refer to this user manual for details on saving data in user boxes retrieving data from user boxes and transferring data User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations This user manual contains details on the network scan G3 fax and network fax operations Refer to this manual for details on using network scan function by E Mail or FTP G3 fax Internet fax and IP address fax operations In order to use the fax functions the optional fax
130. appears Why is 2 User Authentication Settings not available gt 2 User Authentication Settings is not available if User Authentication on the General Settings screen is set to OFF Touch 2 User Registration 12 74 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 5 Touch the button for the desired user and then touch Edit The Edit screen for the user appears 6 Touch User Name T Select the item to be registered changed User Auth Settings 02 26 2010 10 22 Cancel i 0K Memory 90 The User Name screen appears 7 Type in the user name up to 64 characters long and then touch OK For details on typing in text refer to Entering text on page 15 3 Once a user name is registered it cannot be changed A user name that has already been registered cannot be used again O Fnter the User Name using the keyboard or keypad A To erase your entry completely press the C key Administrator Settings gt Edit gt User Name 02 26 2010 10 24 Memory 90 The user name is set 8 Touch Password The Password screen appears Why is Password not available Password is not available if User Authentication on the General Settings screen is set to ON External Server 9 Type in the password up to 64 characters long and then touch OK For confirmation the Password screen appears again Retype the same
131. authentication method on page 12 69 and Public User Access on page 12 74 2 38 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies appear If Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON Public User Access and User Name List do not Enter User Name and p oiL touch Login or pres user t 5 Hane Status Tecra Password Job Details 2 2008 10 10 Memory 100 ord and then e Access key Public User Access If external server authentication was selected as the user authentication method Server Name appears with the name of the default server Touch Server Name to display the names of the registered servers and then select the desired server For details on specifying settings for an external server authentication refer to Selecting an authentication method on page 12 69 j user t Name Status User Name Password Server Name 10 10 Enter User Name and password and then oiL touch Login or press the Access key Server1 Login j 2 Type in the user name and then touch OK er name User Authentication gt Enter User Name 02 25 2010 16 04 Memory 90 Use the keyboard or keypad to type in the Press C to erase the entered user name Shift bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 39 Before making copies 3 Touch Password eEnter User Name and password and then touch Login or press the A
132. be printed from the control panel of this machine amp Note For details on the printer driver settings and Box mode functions refer to the user manual included with this machine ID amp Print For Windows Specifying settings on the Configure tab 1 For Windows 2000 NT 4 0 click the Start button point to Settings and then click Printers For Windows XP Server 2003 click the Start button and then click Printers and Faxes For Windows Vista Server 2008 click the Start button and then click Control Panel then Hardware and Sound then Printers For Windows 7 Server 2008 R2 click the Start button and then click Control panel and Devices and Printers If Printers and Faxes does not appear in the Start menu open the Control Panel from the Start menu select Printers and Other Hardware and then select Printers and Faxes If Control Panel in Windows Vista Server 2008 is displayed in the Classic view double click Printers For Windows 7 Server 2008 if the control panel is in an icon view click Devices and Printers 2 Right click the icon of the installed printer and then click Properties 3 Click the Configure tab KONICA MINOLTA 751 601 PCL Properties General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Configure Settings Device Option 751 SHD Paper Source Unt None Finisher FS 610 a Punch Unit None Cover Sheet Feeder PI 504 Punch Z F
133. desired User Box to use document If you know the User Box number enter it using the keypad Public EZ SSE Box Enter User Box N 02 02 2008 1 Cancel Memory 6 Touch ID amp Print User Box and then touch OK Job List select the desired User Box to use document If you know the User Box number enter it using the keypad Personal Ser Box D amp Print User Box Bulletin Board Polling TX Secure Print User Box User Box User Box Memory RX Annotation Fax Retransmit User Box User Box User Box Encrypted PDF User Box Enter User Box 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 33 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 8 Select the document to be printed Multiple documents can be selected To select all documents touch Select All To cancel the selection of all documents touch Reset To check various information such as the date time when the document was stored and the document name touch Detail View i lect document s JobList hoose action after selecting document s Selected Documents document_1 03 09 2010 03 02 Memory 90 Ss _ JSE JOCUMENL Preview
134. divided with the left and right halves copied onto separate pages With single sided copying the two halves are printed on two separate pages With double sided copying the two halves are printed on the front and back sides of a single page 1 Load the original in the ADF For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Foran original that exceeds 80 pages refer to Scanning the original in separate batches Separate Scan setting on page 3 11 2 Load paper of size A4 W B5 fy and 8 1 2 x 11 W into the desired paper tray Available paper sizes are A4 J B5 and 8 1 2 x 11 Qj Auto Paper Select will not function 3 Touch Paper 8 38 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 4 Touch the desired tray key to select the tray loaded with A4 H B5 Q and 8 1 2 x 11 U paper 5 Touch Application and then touch Book Copy Repeat To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled iobtist Ready to copy copies Basic original Setting Original Type A4 D 100 0 ij A RA Sheet Covers Chapter Insert 4 Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat O z J Page Margin A Image Adjust Booklet a E ei Stamp Composition Check Details Mnman 4 Save in User Box A 25 08 2008 09 04 Memo
135. eee ee nee eee eee raaraa aaa aaae asian aaan daaa 8 14 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side Chapters fUNCtION cccceeesesssseeeeeees 8 17 Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together Program Jobs TUNCUUON i cccc is cceseccepeececes cceeczecticezecetesectecectessuscdk lt cesse cutee desccdeeedecesuetecdvsocnecuedeenctas 8 21 Reversing black and white gradation of the original Neg Pos Reverse function 8 26 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread Book Copy function 8 27 Tiling copy images Image Repeat FUNCTION 2 ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeseseeeeeensseenees 8 33 Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF Page Separation TUMCUUOM i e 6 2 ese cece Rec cee de Rca ee chews Bea veces veces ee th vendetta Reattereaemedetiaed 8 38 Adding a binding margin to copies Page Margin fUNCtION eccesseeeeeeeeeneseeeeeeeeeeeees 8 41 Adjusting the image to fit the paper Image Adjust settings ecccssseeeeesssseeeeeeseseeees 8 44 Copying with the page layout of a booklet Booklet function ccssseeeteeseseeeeeeeeeeneeeneees 8 47 Erasing specified area of Copies EraSe cccssssseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessnsneeeeeesseeeeeeesessneeeeeeseees 8 50 Erasing black marks along borders Erase fUNCtION cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas
136. exceeds 100 pages refer to Scanning the original in separate batches Separate Scan setting on page 3 11 2 Touch Application and then touch Sheet Cover Chapter Insert To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled Copies JobList Ready to copy original setting original Type g B ase ETE E eeteckore 100 0 Page Margin A Image Adjust Booklet Stamp Composition Ho Save in User Box A 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 The Sheet Cover Chapter Insert screen appears 8 14 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 3 Touch Insert Image To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key To cancel the Insert Image function touch No Application gt Sheet Cover Chapter Insert The Insert Image screen appears 4 Using the keypad specify the pages where the image is to be inserted Job List Use the keypad to enter the location of inserted pages Copies Touch Sort to arrange the insert pages in ascending order Application gt Sheet Cover Chapter Insert gt Insert Image A4 D 100 0 Check Details 22 08 2008
137. fed Is the ADF slightly open Securely close the ADF Is the original one that does not meet the specifications Check that the original is one that can be loaded into the ADF See p 7 31 and p 7 32 Is the original correctly loaded Position the original correctly See p 3 9 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting Symptom Possible cause Remedy Finisher The finisher cannot be used Is no power supplied to the con nector Check that the cord is correctly in serted into the connector The pages cannot be sta pled Have the staples run out Replace the staple cartridge See p 9 7 The staple is incorrectly positioned by 90 degrees Is the staple position correctly specified Specify the desired position for stapling See p 3 71 The pages that were fed out were not uniformly loaded and the punched holes or staples are incor rectly positioned Is the paper curled Remove the paper from the paper tray turn it over and then load it again Is there a gap between the lateral guides in the paper tray and the sides of the paper Slide the lateral guides in the paper tray against the sides of the paper so that there is no gap Even though a Punch set ting was selected holes are not punched when the punch unit is installed on the finisher Did the message Empty the hole punch scrap box appear Empty th
138. for the desired display time PN Specify confirmation message length of time before exiting Enlarge Display due to system auto reset System Auto Reset Confi Yes To not display the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode touch No To display the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode touch the button 30 second 60 second 90 second or 120 second for the length of time that the message is to be displayed To cancel changes to the settings press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled 4 Touch OK The Accessibility Setting screen appears again 5 Touch Close or press the Accessibility key The Basic screen appears again Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy scanning and fax functions With the Enlarge Display mode text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily For details refer to the User manual Enlarge Display Operations As the factory default No is selected 4 32 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 4 8 5 Setting the Auto Reset Confirmation function When the automatic panel reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode a message can be displayed allowing you to choose either to continue operating without resetting the current settings or to reset the settings In addition it is possible t
139. front door and then open the vertical transport door Close the vertical transport door m l Le ba Eel j R A bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 5 2 4 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 2 2 amp Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Pull out tray 2 Remove any misfed paper Lift up the paper take up roller and then remove any paper remaining in the tray Load the paper into the tray again lower the paper take up roller and then close the tray Open the vertical transport door Ifa large capacity unit is installed open its large capacity tray front door and then open the vertical transport door bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 11 5 Troubleshooting Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section Close the vertical transport door 5 2 5 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 3 and tray 4 3 4 amp Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Pull out tray 3 or tray 4 Remove any misfed paper 5 12 bizhub 751 601 Versio
140. group can be specified for each user A single user can be registered in multiple access permission groups To specify the user group touch Apply Group Touch Yes touch the button for the desired group and then touch OK Touch the button for a group touch Details and then check the destinations and names of users belonging to that group Specify the group the user belongs to Administrator Settings gt Apply Levels Groups to Users gt Apply Group Utility Ply Levelss oups to Users I 02 02 2008 Memory To specify the user level touch Apply Level Touch Yes touch the button for the desired level and then touch OK Specify the access level allowed to user istrator Settings gt Apply Levels Groups to Users gt Apply Level No Access Allowed Level a a Sr Peis Peis apply Levels Groups to Users 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 15 12 Utility mode 12 2 4 Displaying the destination registration screen Follow the procedure described below to display the One Touch User Box Registration screen by pressing Utility Counter key 1 Press the Utility Counter key Utility Counter Cd 2 Touch 1 One Touch User Box Registration se the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection Meter Count 2 User Settings A 3 Administrator Settings Job De
141. gt Copy Protect gt Text Size aeyeck2Pe 100 0 Minimal Check Details 02 02 2008 Memory Background Pattern screen i Select desired Copy Protect Copies We Background Pattern type Application gt Copy Protect gt Background Pattern Sefece 100 0 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 Pattern 6 Check Deta T Pattern 7 Pattern 8 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 7 If desired touch Change Pos Delete and then change the arrangement of the text To change the arrangement order touch Change Position select the copy protection text to be moved and then touch either Up or Down Job List Select the Copy Protect you wish to change Copies position and then touch Up or Down Application gt Copy Protect gt Change Po on Delete geyeckePe 100 0 Preset Stamp Date Time Serial Number Insert Space Check Details Delete 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To add a space to the copy protection text touch Insert Space Touch either Up or Down to move the round mark that appeared beside the specified copy protection text type and then touch Insert bizhub 751 601 Version 2
142. gt In order to reduce the risk of electric shock do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds A CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot gt In order to reduce the risk of burns do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 19 5 Troubleshooting 5 2 11 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit 10 amp Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Open the right front door and the left front door Lower lever M4 and then pull out the ADU unit Remove all paper from the ADU unit Return the ADU unit to its original position Return lever M4 to its original position and then close the right front door and the left front door A WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine gt In order to reduce the risk of electric shock do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds 5 20 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 A CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot gt In order to reduce the risk of burns do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfe
143. in the ADU unit Paper misfeed in the ADU unit Paper misfeed in the ADU unit Paper misfeed in the ADU unit Paper misfeed in the ADF Paper misfeed in the ADF Paper misfeed in Finisher FS 524 FS 525 FS 610 or shift tray Paper misfeed in the post inserter Paper misfeed in Finisher FS 524 FS 525 FS 610 20 Paper misfeed in the Z folding unit 5 2 3 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 1 1 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Pull out tray 1 Ifthe misfed paper extends over tray 1 and tray 2 also pull out tray 2 Remove any misfed paper 5 8 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 Lift up the paper take up roller and then remove any paper remaining in the tray 4 Load the paper into the tray again lower the paper take up roller and then close the tray Pull out tray 2 and then pull out the horizontal transport unit Open the horizontal transport unit cover Remove any misfed paper in the horizontal transport unit Return the horizontal transport unit and tray 2 to their original positions bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 9 Troubleshooting 10 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section Open the vertical transport door Ifa large capacity unit is installed open its large capacity tray
144. information j MUSEZAL Device information Eg Authentication settings Item Value Address settings Registering n 172 1622 27 G User box Group name Default Group Model name KONICA MINOLTA bizhub 751 Device addre 172 16 22 27 The latest access date and time Function The latest access date and time Authenticati 2008 02 28 13 2710 Address setti 2008 02 28 13 2710 Current status 2008 02 28 13 27 10 Type Status A Printer Attention PaperNearEmptyT ray2 lt j Scanner Ready J Power sta Sleep mode E3 Refresh from the device The Device information pane appears 8 Select User authentication settings in the Function selection pane and then click Add KONICA MINOLTA PageScope Data Administrator Authentication settings Address settings Default Gro TOR W Elle Edit Tool Window Help TOP 3 Registration of Device Network Initial Setting Function selection User list O Z 1000 items 8 Device information 721 Status User name E Mailad Function restriction Total C Maximum eI Gg Authentication settings U authentication se CB External Server m Address settings User box E Column option amp 3 Refresh from the device kd 14 18 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 14 9 Selecta template and then click OK Select user template Please select an user templ
145. is ON and once the machine is used with the appropriate user authentication and account track information entered this setting allows the machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information by being synchronized with the authenticated account Do Not Synchronize This setting requires that all information be entered for user authentication and account track each time that the machine is used 9 Touch Ea The second screen is displayed 10 Specify a setting for When of Jobs Reach Maximum To skip the job when the limit specified with user authentication or account track is reached touch Skip Job To stop all jobs when the limit specified with user authentication or account track is reached touch Stop Job Select item and enter setting Administrator Settings gt User Auth Account Track gt General Settings ech makiman Skip Job Utility Administrator Ticket Hold Settings Time Setting yee authentications account Track 06 19 2008 17 17 Memory 100 11 Specify a setting for Number of User Counters Assigned Press the C clear key to erase the value and then use the keypad to specify the desired value between 1 and 999 If user authentication and account track settings have been applied counters can be assigned to both accounts and users and counts for both can be totaled 12 Specify Ticket Hold Time Setting Use the keypad
146. is still blank Paper that has been printed on with a heat transfer printer or an inkjet printer Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin Folded curled wrinkled or torn paper Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time Damp paper perforated paper or paper with punched holes Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper or paper with an uneven surface Paper that has been treated such as carbon backed heat sensitive or pressure sensitive paper Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing Paper of a non standard shape not rectangular Paper that is bound with glue staples or paper clips Paper with labels attached Paper with ribbons hooks buttons etc attached Paper storage Store paper in a cool dark location with little humidity If the paper becomes damp paper misfeeds may occur Paper that has not been loaded should be kept wrapped or placed in a plastic bag and stored in a cool dark location with little humidity Store the paper laying flat not standing on its edge Curled paper may cause paper misfeeds Keep paper out of the reach of children Auto Tray Switch Function If the selected paper tray runs out of paper while a job is being printed and a different paper tray is loaded with paper meeting the following conditions the other paper tray is automatically selected so printing can continue If the optional large capacity unit LU 203 is installed a maximum of 5 650 copies c
147. it does not enter Enlarge Display mode 17 Power Save key Press to enter Power Save mode While the machine is in Power Save mode the indicator on the Power Save key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off To cancel Power Save mode press the Power Save key again 18 Access key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied press this key after entering the user name and password for user authentication or the account name and password for account track in order to use this machine 19 Brightness dial Use to adjust the Brightness of the touch panel 20 User Box key Press to enter User Box mode While the machine is in User Box mode the indicator on the User Box key lights up in green For details refer to the User manual Box Operations 21 Fax Scan key Press to enter Fax Scan mode While the machine is in Fax Scan mode the indicator on the Fax Scan key lights up in green For more details refer to the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations 22 Copy key Press to enter Copy mode As a default the machine is in Copy mode While the machine is in Copy mode the indicator on the Copy key lights up in green Reminder Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel otherwise it may be scratched or damaged Never push down on the touch panel with force and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2
148. machine will be turned on off at the specified time Settings can be specitied to require a password in order to turn the machine on or to allow fax and print jobs to be received after the machine has been turned off by the timer Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Settings screen can be combined For details on the various settings refer to Overview of weekly timer settings on page 12 44 Restrict User Access Parameter Description Default Setting Copy Program Lock Settings Select the registered copy programs that are pre vented from being changed or deleted Delete Saved Copy Program Select the registered copy programs to be delet ed Restrict Ac Changing Job Pri Select whether or not to allow the print priority of Allow cess to Job ority jobs to be changed Settings 7 Delete Other User Select whether or not jobs from other users can Restrict Jobs deleted when the user authentication settings have been specified Registering and Select whether or not to allow registered destina Allow Changing Ad tions to be changed dresses Changing Zoom Select whether or not to allow stored zoom ratios Allow Ratio to be changed Change the Select whether or not to allow the specified From Allow From Address address to be changed Change Regis Select whether or not to allow registered image Allow tered Overlay overlays to be changed Restrict Op Restrict Broad Select whether to preve
149. mode Box passwords Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols e A password that consists of a repetition of the same charac ter cannot be registered e The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered amp Note Specify 8 characters numbers or as the fax transmission password for boxes Confidential document passwords Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols e A password that consists of a repetition of the same charac ter cannot be registered amp Note If any password not following the Password Rules Secure Print cannot be performed 12 86 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 12 12 Enhanced Security Mode When enhanced security mode is applied on this machine various security settings are set in order to increase security when managing scan data Restrictions are applied to user operations public user access is prohibited and box operations and print jobs are limited There are various settings that must first be specified or are forcibly set in order for Enhanced Security Mode to be set to ON Before setting Enhanced Security Mode to ON be sure to check the settings for the security functions amp Reminder If there are settings that are incompatible with the enhanced se
150. of the copy and fax scan operations in the Enlarge Display mode Q Detail For details on the Administrator Security Level parameter refer to Security Settings on page 12 38 For details on the default settings and the factory default settings refer to page 2 37 To change the default settings for Fax Scan mode press the Fax Scan key enter Utility mode and then select a setting for this parameter 12 3 4 Scan Fax Settings Parameter Description Black Compression Level Specify settings for scanning For details refer to the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations Default Scan Fax Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings 12 3 5 Printer Settings Parameter Description Basic Settings Specify settings for printing For details refer to User manual Print Opera tions IC 208 Paper Settings PCL Settings PS Setting XPS Settings TIFF PDF Image Paper Setting Print Reports The Print function settings can be printed as a report For details refer to User manual Print Operations IC 208 Image Shift Settings Make adjustment on Image Shift function used in Printer mode For details refer to the User manual Print Operations IC 208 Stamp Settings Specify settings for Stamp function used in Printer mode For details refer to the User manual Print Operations IC 208 Available paper types depend on the paper tray 12 3
151. overwrite the registered overlay with the new image select a registered overlay and then touch Overwrite To delete a registered overlay select a registered overlay and then touch Delete 8 82 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 After touching the button for the registered overlay the date that the overlay was registered appears op list Register new overwrite or delete U overlay images Application gt Registered Overlay gt Register Overlay Image Overlay Image over lay1 auyeckerer 100 0 1 7 10 Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Image Name Registration screen appears 6 Type in the image name and then touch OK Touch the buttons in the keyboard that appears in the screen to type For details on typing in text refer to Entering text on page 15 3 Use the keyboard or keypad to type image name Press C to erase image name entered Application gt Register Overlay Image gt New cancel bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 83 Application functions Check the original size of Original Size and then touch OK Ifthe original size cannot be detected automatically or to specify the original size touch Original Size and then specify the original size from any of the screens To can
152. panel Only when a hard disk is installed See p 4 6 10 Start key Press to start the copy scan or fax operation When this machine is ready to begin the operation the indicator on the Start key lights up in blue If the in dicator on the Start key lights up in orange the operation cannot begin Press to restart a stopped job For details on jobs refer to Overview of Job List screen on page 11 3 2 24 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies No Part name Description 11 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received Lights up in blue when a print job is queued to be printed or while it is being printed The indicator lights up in blue when there is saved fax data or unprinted fax data 12 C clear key Press to clear a value such as the number of copies a zoom ratio or a size entered using the keypad 13 Keypad Use to type in the number of copies to be produced Use to type in the zoom ratio Use to type in the various settings 14 Help key Press to display the Help Menu screen From this screen descriptions of the various functions and details of opera tions can be displayed See p 4 22 15 Enlarge Display key Press to enter Enlarge Display mode 16 Accessibility key Press to display the screen for specifying settings for user accessibility func tions If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager
153. panel Invalid Input Sound When incorrectly pressing a key in the control panel or a but ton on the touch panel Basic Sound When switching settings and the default setting is selected Successful Completion Completed Operation When an operation is completed successfully Sound Sound Completed Transmis When a communication operation is completed successfully sion Sound Completed Preparation When a device has finished setting up Sound Caution Sound Simple Caution Sound When it is almost time to replace supplies or a replaceable Level 1 part and a message appears in the touch panel Simple Caution Sound When a user has performed an operation incorrectly Level 2 Simple Caution Sound When an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by re Level 3 ferring to the message that appeared or the user manual Severe Caution Sound When an error occurs that cannot be corrected by the user or requires a service representative 4 38 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen and then touch to display the next screen For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen refer to Displaying the accessibility setting screen on page 4 27 2 Touch Sound Setting or press the 2 key in the keypad DA Use the menu buttons or A keypad to make a selection Accessibility Setting Message Display Time 2 2 Sound Setting J 1 2 3 ne
154. paper tray Touch Application and then touch Book Copy Repeat To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled Copies JobList Ready to copy Basic Original Setting original Type_ f guteckerer 100 0 _ _ 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Book Copy Repeat screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 33 Application functions 4 Touch Image Repeat Joblist Ready to copy Application gt Book Copy Repeat guyeckerer 100 0 ES E Book Copy A Image Repeat A i Page Separation 06 19 2008 14 49 Memory 100 The Image Repeat screen appears 5 Under Layout touch With Margin or Without Margin or touch 2 4 8 Repeat To cancel the Image Repeat function touch No 8 34 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions interval can be selected Interval Settings Touching 2 4 8 Repeat displays the 2 4 8 Repeat screen where the number of repeats and the When selecting 2 Repeat touch 2 Repeat Detail Settings to specify Image Direction and Repeat 5 Multiple copies of the document can be printed To on the selected paper Application gt Image Repeat gt 2 4 78 Repeat fa A4 D 100 0 a a ARAA AA 4 Repeat 8 Repeat
155. password and then touch OK The user password is set 10 Touch E Mail Address The E Mail Address screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 75 12 Utility mode 11 Type in the e mail address up to 320 characters and then touch OK The e mail address is set If the e mail address exceeds 69 characters Detail appears in the User Registration screen Touch Details to display the E Mail Address Details screen and the entire e mail address 12 To use the account track function touch Account Name Account Name appears only if Account Track on the General Settings screen been set to ON The Account Name screen appears 13 Touch the button for the desired account and then touch OK Before an account name can be selected accounts must have been registered For details on registering accounts refer to Account Track Registration on page 12 80 The account is set 14 Touch Max Allowance Set The Max Allowance Set screen appears 15 To specify the maximum number of prints allowed use the keypad to type in the desired value To specify no maximum for prints touch No Limit gt Maximum settings can be set for the selected user uch All Users to apply the settings to all users Ss Administrator Settings gt Edit gt Max Allowance Set User Name All Users Utility Total Allowance Administrator Settings User A o Registration Edit 02 02 2008 10 10
156. s F Search w oeration BERCE Ed s gt 02 02 2008 Memory Item Description Function Use to search for descriptions from a Help menu divided by the function types and names Search by Operation Use to search for descriptions from a Help menu divided by the opera tions Function Map Displays the Function Map screen which contains a chart of the available functions and settings Other Functions Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by useful function Name and Function of Parts Displays the Help menu for the name and function of each part Use to check the description of the main unit and its options Service Admin Information Displays the name extension number and e mail address of the admin istrator Replace Consumables Use to view the maintenance procedures for the machine Detail The Help screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed While scanning while printing a proof copy during Enlarge Display mode during Accessibility mode While the Help screens are displayed the following keys are not available Start Stop C clear Interrupt Proof Copy Accessj Mode Memory Enlarge Display Items in the Help Menu screen and other Help screens can be selected by touching the button or by pressing the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item To display the next screen higher in the menu structure touch Close Touch Exit to exit the Help mode a
157. setting If a decimal value is displayed in the screen press the C clear key and then use the keypad to type in the setting For details on switching between decimal and fraction values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value Touch OK Specify any other desired copy settings Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies Press the Start key 8 52 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 8 14 2 Erasing black marks along center fold Center Erase function This function erases black marks along the center fold of printed sheets which tend to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book Use this function also for the original already having black marks along the center fold With frame erasing the same width can be erased along all four sides of the original or a different width can be erased along each side of the original 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Touch Application and then touch Erase To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functio
158. setup procedure includes installing IC Card Driver USB Driver of the authentication unit then installing Data Administrator IC Card Plugin XQ Reminder Data Administrator ver 3 0 or later must first be installed on the computer For details on the operating environment and installation procedure for Data Administrator refer to the user manual for the Data Aaministrator Checking the currently installed version 1 From the Help menu of Data Administrator click Version Information If the version appears as 3 x This software cannot be used Install version 4 x If Data Administrator ver 3 x is installed it is removed when version 4 x is installed Click the Plug in version button From the Plug in information list check the version of the Data Administrator plug in Ifthe plug in version appears as 4 x This software can be used x Plug in information list Plug in Name Plug in Version Patt Font Management Utility 2 4 0 11031 Details Data Administrator 4 0 0 10231 14 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 1 4 Setup 1 Turn off the machine with the main power switch and then disconnect the authentication unit from the machine 2 Install IC Card Driver USB Driver Plug the cable from the authentication unit into the USB port on the computer The Found New Hardware Wizard starts 3 Select Yes now and every time
159. so that the original image fills the paper For details refer to Adjusting the image to fit the paper Image Adjust settings on page 8 44 asc m ABC Copying with the page layout of a magazine Copies can be made with the pages arranged in a layout for center binding such as for a magazine For details refer to Copying with the page layout of a booklet Booklet function on page 8 47 JJ Erasing sections of copies Areas such as the shadows of punched holes bindings edges of books and transmission information in received faxes can be erased in copies For details refer to Erasing black marks along borders Erase function on page 8 51 ABC p ABC bizhub 751 601 Version 2 1 7 Introduction Printing a sample copy Before printing a large number of copies a single sample copy can be printed so that it can be checked For details refer to Printing a proof to check the settings Proof Copy on page 4 6 Printing date time or page number on copies The date time page number copy protect hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying or account track number per set can be printed on copies For details refer to Printing the date time or page number on copies Stamp Composition functions on page 8 56 The print status of copy jobs can be checked and the jobs can be managed Managing jobs For details refer to Managing jobs on page 11
160. text box Use the keyboard or keypad to type in the Administrator password Press C to erase the entered the Administrator password 02 26 2010 10 11 Memory 90 amp Note To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed touch Cancel To clear all entered text press the C clear key Some buttons may not appear depending on the characters being entered Q Detail To change a character in the entered text touch and to move the cursor to the character to be changed touch Delete and then type in the desired letter or number 15 1 3 List of available characters Type Alphanumeric characters symbols Characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijkimnoparstuvwxyz spaca amp 11 lt gt _ 7 0123456789 15 6 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Appendix 15 15 2 Glossary The words used in Copy mode are described below Abbreviation ADF Automatic document feeder Can be used to automatically scan the original ADU Automatic duplex unit used to print automatically on both sides of paper APS Auto Paper Select setting ATS Automatic paper tray switching feature ATS Auto Tray Switch LCT Large capacity tray can be loaded with a large amount of paper to feed it into the copier main body A Auto Zoom Select this setting to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio after an original is placed on the ori
161. the language and then click OK Choose Setup Language em Select the lanquage for this installation from the choices below SPIE er tees v The installer starts up bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 13 1 4 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 10 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation 11 Click Next Plugin for IC Card Authentication Unit AU 201 Welcome to the PlugIn for IC Card Authentication Unit AU 201 This wizard will install Plugin for IC Card Authentication Unit AU 201 on your computer To continue click Next WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties 12 Select accept the terms of the license agreement and then click Next i Plugin for IC Card Authentication Unit AU 201 License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Please choose the language to display the End User License Agreement English 5 Software End User License Agreement PLEASE READ CAREFULLY THE LICENSE AGREEMENT BELOW BEFORE OPENING THE PACKAGE OF THIS SOFTWARE SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OPENING THE PACKAGE OR DOWNLOADING INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED YOUR LAWFUL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS BELOW TE VATT NA NAT AGDER TA THERA NA NAT NOAUINT AAN TRICTATT oi QI do not accept the terms in the licens
162. the original glass by wiping it with a soft dry cloth LT Reminder Never use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean the original glass bizhub 751 601 Version 2 10 3 1 0 Care of the machine 10 1 3 Cleaning the document pad Keep the pad clean otherwise spots may be copied Raise the ADF and clean the document pad by wiping it with a soft dry cloth Reminder Never use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean the document pad 10 1 4 Cleaning the paper take up roller Keep the roller clean otherwise soil marks may be copied resulting in dark lines on the copies Clean the paper take up rollers by wiping them with a soft dry cloth Reminder Never use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean the paper take up roller 10 1 5 Cleaning the main unit Clean the surface of the main unit by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent Reminder Never use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean the main unit 10 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Care of the machine 1 0 10 1 6 Cleaning the control panel Clean the control panel by wiping it with a soft dry cloth Ne Reminder Pressing too hard on the control panel or the touch panel may damage them Never use a mild household detergent glass cleaner benzin or thinner to clean the control panel or touch pane
163. tings on page 12 36 6 Copier Settings Auto Zoom Platen Auto Zoom ADF Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Print Jobs During Copy Operation Tri Fold Print Side Automatic Image Rotation Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass Refer to Copier Settings on page 12 21 7 Printer Settings USB Timeout Network Timeout Print XPS Errors Refer to Printer Settings on page 12 23 8 Fax Settings 1 Header Information 2 Header Footer Position 3 Line Parameter Setting 4 TX RX Settings 5 Function Settings 6 PBX Connection Set ting 7 Report Settings 8 Job Settings List 9 Multi Line Setting 0 Network Fax Setting Refer to Fax Settings on page 12 38 12 6 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 First level menu Second level menu Third level menu Details 3 Administrator Settings 9 System Connection 1 Open API Settings 2 Admin transmission 3 Prefix Suffix Automatic Setting Refer to System Connec tion on page 12 38 0 Security Settings 1 Administrator Pass word 2 User Box Administrator Setting 3 Administrator Security Levels Refer to Security Set tings on page 12 38 4 Security Details 5 Enhanced Security Mode 6 HDD Settin
164. to copy copies Basic original setting original Type 29029 100 0 ij a Sheet Cover 7 O A J Page Margin _ _Inage Adjust Booklet Z E el Check Details Ta 4 22 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Chapter Insert 4 Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat Stamp Compos ition Save in User Box The Stamp Composition screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 63 Application functions Touch Stamp To cancel the Stamp function touch No Copies ob tist Ready to copy Application gt Stamp Composition a A4 D 100 0 d Date Time A Page Number OE BO Copy Protect Stamp Repeat j Overlay ne E E Registered Overlay A Header Footer 4 7 Check Details Watermark 02 26 2010 09 44 Memory 90 The Stamp screen appears Select the desired stamp under Stamp Type Preset Stamps or Stamp Type Registered Stamps Job List Select stamp type Copies Application gt Stamp Composition gt Stamp Auto Paper 100 0 Select Stamp Type Preset Stamps PLEASE REPLY n TOP SECRET copy l ast Page only DO NOT COPY IMPORTANT Text Size F CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT sta Print Pos Top Right 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 Touch or to disp
165. to type in the time 1 to 60 minutes Specify the holding time of Kerveros authentication ticket The holding time setting is applied when Active Directory is selected as the authentication server type 13 gt Touch OK If the setting for User Authentication Account Track or Number of User Counters Assigned was changed the message Are you sure you want to clear all data appears 12 70 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 14 Touch Yes and then touch OK To stop clearing the usage data without changing the settings touch No If the setting for any of the following is changed the data is not cleared Public User Access When of Jobs Reach Maximum Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track or Ticket Hold Time Setting To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key The authentication method is set Continue by specifying settings for user authentication and account track amp Reminder Do not use a name including uppercase and lowercase of the same character for the user name of the external server Since bizhub 751 601 cannot differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters the operation may not be performed correctly amp Note Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track can be specified if User Authentication is set to ON External Server or ON MFP and Account Track is set to ON If Synchronize
166. touching or if the paper is wrinkled touch to change the adjustment Each time or is touched the value is increased or decreased by one increment 8 Touch OK To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key The angle of the punched holes is adjusted If no adjustment of the angle of the punched holes was necessary in step 6 this completes the procedure 9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy 10 Check the print result Check that the angle of the punched holes was adjusted If more adjustment is necessary repeat steps 7 through 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 57 Utility mode 12 6 8 1st Z Fold Position Adjustment 2nd Z Fold Position Adjustment The first and second folding position when printing with the Z Fold setting can be adjusted for each paper size Note 1st Z Fold Position Adjustment and 2nd Z Fold Position Adjustment do not appear if optional Z folding unit is not installed Y Before making any adjustments use the Z Fold setting to print a single sample copy Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created In addition to adjust both the 1st and 2nd folding positions for Z folding be sure to adjust the 1st folding position first 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings scree
167. values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 29 8 Application functions To cancel the Book Copy function touch No Frame Erase screen i Use and the keypad to specify Copies Job List the width of the area to be erased Application gt Book Copy gt Frame Erase Right 10 0 mm Bottom 22 08 2008 17 30 Memory 100 Center Erase screen What do the Book Erase functions do gt The shadow of the book binding and the shadow of the book edges can be erased from the copies The Frame Erase and Center Erase functions can be used together 9 How are settings specified for the Frame Erase and Center Erase functions gt Refer to Erasing black marks along borders Erase function on page 8 51 In addition if the Frame Erase or Center Erase function in the Application screen is previously specified Frame Erase or Center Erase under
168. was selected all page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover SURVEYOR S REPORT Press the Start key 8 32 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 8 9 Tiling copy images Image Repeat function An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper The possible number of repeating images is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original the specified paper size and the zoom ratio The following repeating formats and settings are available Setting Description With Margin Multiple copies are printed of the entire image within the specified area The area around the image appears as a margin Without Margin Multiple copies of the selected area of the image are printed to fill the paper however a part of the image may be cut off 2 4 8 Repeat A fixed number of copies of the selected image area are printed in the paper The number of repeating copies can be set to 2 4 or 8 times However any part of the image that does not fit within its specific section of the paper is cut off ABC ABC ABC ABC Original ABc With Margin Without Margin Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Load the paper to be used into the desired
169. 00 0 Copy Protect Type Registered Stamp Preset Stamp r Detail Settings Date Time Other Z 02 02 2008 Memory Touching Registered Stamp or Preset Stamp displays a screen containing buttons for the available stamps Touch the button for the desired stamp and then touch OK Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp For details on registering stamps refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility The selected copy protection text formats appear in a column at the center of the screen Up to eight text lines can be combined Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected Select desired preset stamp to apply to U E document Application gt Copy Protect gt Prese mp Copies guto Paper 199 0 Select Preset Stamp Type Invalid Unauthorized Confidential Copy Private Draft Illegal Copy 02 02
170. 02 2008 10 10 Close Memory 100 Touch Close 9 Select the desired setting under Pages and specify the desired settings for Text Size and Print Position 10 Touch OK Q Detail To print the header footer only on the first page touch 1st Page Only 12 7 2 Editing headers footers 1 In the Header Footer Settings screen touch the button of the header footer to be edited 2 Touch Check Edit T Enter new edit or delete header footer To edit a registered header footer select desired header or footer and then touch Edit AHinistrator Settings gt System Settings gt Header Footer Settings Utility Header Footer Bazester 4 Settings System Settings Check Edit 4 Stamp Settings 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To delete the header footer touch Delete The Check Edit screen appears 3 Touch OK 12 66 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 12 8 Authentication Method Specify user authentication and account track settings in order to control the use of this machine User authentication settings are specified to manage individuals and account track settings are specified to manage groups and multiple users By specifying both user authentication and account track settings the number of prints made by each account can be managed for each individual user amp Note A total of 1 000 users and accounts can be registered on t
171. 1 11 1 2 Multizjob feature dsdi Ais he al edie ead ed arg tevin eee eae 11 3 11 1 3 JODIMISUSCrEGNS 2 cecgedis hecho ch oti e e e aa pia Ea Oda a enean den e eve ear ae cree ee 11 4 11 1 4 Left panel JOB List cc 2ioas i F TE E Leal E E tes nibee A EA E 11 7 11 2 Performing Operations ON jODS ccccssseeeeeesseeeeeeeenseeneneeeesseneeeeeeseeeneeeeeeseeenaeeeeseseeaeeeeeeseneaeeesesaes 11 8 11 2 1 Deleting 2 o o EAEE TT satin speenactegspldn asthe cess A E T ET agiauges tana hate 11 2 2 Checking job settings 11 2 3 Checking JOB detalls 2iccsccidssacetssanseaesieveanscensscedeacecacdenzhcestecuaaecees acceaaesieeusgececaseded aa aiaiai EEEa eah 11 2 4 Displaying the Current Jobs list stored jobs and active jobs cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeee 11 12 11 2 5 Displaying the Job History list goii rania etaa aaa taaa A ae aaa iaa aaa iyana 11 13 11 2 6 Printing a proof copy of a stored jOD cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeeed 11 14 11 2 7 P inting a stored jOD wi prato inana tation el lene he aes doe ee ee ee 11 15 11 2 8 lncreasing printing priority misiis er ied niente 11 17 12 1 Overview of Utility Mode parameters cccsseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseseeeeeeeeseeeneseesseneneeeessneenanees 12 3 12 1 1 List of registration information and parameters ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeesecaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenees 12 3 12 2 Registering a Gestination i
172. 1 Backar dana e eeeoooor ex s Paper Zoom Come ine Ea 100 When scanning is finished touch Finish Nare Status Copy PrintWait 8eeo0moo000 Number of Sets Po ols Insert Document 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 9 Place the original to be inserted on the original glass For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 10 Press the Start key Scanning begins 11 Touch Finish canning is stopped Place document you wish to insert on the glass and press Start BSekarddna Paper Zoon Rome ine 0 0 BA4 D 10 When scanning is finished touch Finish Hame Statis COPY PrintWait 0000m0000 0 0000m0000 0 Number of Sets Insert Document Number of Originals on veain 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To insert a multi page original repeat steps 9 and 10 until all pages of the insertion original are scanned in the order that they are to be inserted 12 Press the Start key 8 16 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 8 5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side Chapters function When making double sided copies the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the front side of the paper If the original was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back side of a page the page is left blank and the
173. 1 17 Icons that appear in the SCIEON cceeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeaaaeeeeseseaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeee 2 28 2 2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel ccsssseeeeceseeseeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeseeneeeessenaeeeeeeeseeeaneeenennes 2 29 2 2 1 To adjust the angle of the Control Panel cccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeteceaeeeeeeeeeaee 2 29 2 3 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary POWe ccccsssseeceeeeseeeeneeeesseeeneeeeseeeeneeeeseeeeees 2 31 2 3 1 TUPMINGEOMN TS IMACIING ise ceaee cased ceca cee ueledecccedaes peau guasuteasaibessavaeuy dusdevesstgvssavevsudtessbudeseusetusudlhduatued 2 31 2 3 2 SCANNING GUMNG Warm UP sssi ipinin anaana auand NEEE E DE AOA TAE Ea eE a a en enaa 2 32 2 3 3 Tu rningoff TNE MACHING ss ciseececectesutesewunedsatvuentene coon ccysaeneeusutevanbecueverscestsvvussteuusieneseevdnivdesusubeenvestvs 2 33 2 3 4 Automatically clearing settings Automatic panel reset eeeeeeeseeeeneeeeneeeeeeaeeeesneeeesaeeeeeeeeeaes 2 34 2 3 5 Automatically canceling the mode screen System Auto ReSEt e ceecceeeseeeereeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeee 2 34 2 3 6 Automatically conserving energy LOW Power mode e ceeecceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeteaeeeaeeeetees 2 34 2 3 7 Automatically conserving energy Sleep mode eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeeeaeeeeeseeeee 2 35 2 3 8 Manually conserving CNeryecsicieccivisaz
174. 1 and Key 2 Key 1 Scan Fax Key 2 Copy lt Advanced Preview Setting gt Parameter Description Default Setting Original Direction Confir Configure settings to fax or scan a document For details re ON mation Screen fer to the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Op erations 12 4 2 Administrator Machine Settings Parameter Description Administrator Registration Specify the administrator information displayed in the Service Representa tive Administrator Information screen of the Help screen and the From address for sending e mail from the machine Input Machine Address Register the name of the machine and its e mail address The registered ma chine name is added to the names of files that are sent and to originals saved in user boxes As the factory default the machine name is specified as KMBT_751 601 The registered e mail address is used with Internet faxing Note When entering the device name while registering the machine address do not use characters that cannot be used by the operating system 12 4 3 One Touch User Box Registration Parameter Create One Touch Destination Create User Box Description Specify settings for registering fax scan and user box destinations For details refer to the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations and the User manual Box Operations One Touch User Box Registration List The lists of address
175. 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 3 Application functions Touch Application and then touch Sheet Cover Chapter Insert To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled Job List E 8x11 D 100 0 Check Details Ready to copy Basic Original Setting Original Type Tj Z ehaBt r YRS rt Neg Pos Reverse O A Page Margin A Image Adjust Q Stamp Composition A 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Book Copy Repeat Save in User Box A 4 Booklet 57 The Sheet Cover Chapter Insert screen appears Touch OHP Interleave Job List Check Details Ready to copy Application gt Sheet Cover Chapter Insert Copies ai ul OHP Inter leave Cover Sheet 7 4 ot 2i Insert Image Chapters B Insert Sheet A H amp m a Program Jobs 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The OHP Interleave screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 6 Select the paper tray loaded with the interleaf paper To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key To cancel the OHP Interleave function touch No wus Ready to copy Copies Application gt Sheet Cover Chapter Insert gt OHP Interleave Interleave Paper Transparency 2 A4 DB Inter leave r e
176. 11 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit 9 Lever M4 Lowered to the left in order to pull out the ADU unit when clearing paper mis feeds 10 Transport lever Switched when printing on A5 size or 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 thick paper 11 Dial M9 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit 12 Dial M7 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit 13 Lever M5 Lowered to the left when clearing paper misfeeds 14 Cover M8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit 15 Cover M6 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit 16 Fusing unit Fuses the image that was formed onto the paper 17 Dial M10 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit 18 Main power switch Used to turn the machine on and off 19 Toner cartridge securing le Pull toward you to remove the toner unit when replacing a toner cartridge ver 20 Toner cartridge Replaced when the toner is empty bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 9 2 Before making copies 2 1 4 Large Capacity Unit LU 405 Reminder Do not climb on or place objects on this unit to prevent any damage Large Capacity Unit LU 405 No Part name Description 1 Upper cover Opened when loading paper or clearing paper misfeeds 2 Lateral guides Secures the sides of the paper to be loaded 3 Tray bottom plate Raised as the paper is used Lower by pressing the bo
177. 11x17 ato 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 W Foolscap 8K Ga 16K wide paper A3W Ca to A5W iy 11x 17WG to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W 9 Loading Capacity 2 sheets to 9 sheets binding 100 sets 2 10 sheets to 20 sheets binding 50 sets 21 sheets to 30 sheets binding 30 sets 31 sheets to 40 sheets binding 25 sets 41 sheets to 50 sheets binding 20 sets 1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga 8 x 13 Ga one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative 2 The value is for when using paper of which the length is 417 mm or less The value will be 50 sets if the length exceeds 418 mm Maximum number of bound pages 50 sheets 60 g m to 80 g m bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 71 Basic copy operations In the Basic screen touch Finishing Copies Ready to copy Check Job eEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeeEeeeee a ginal Setting Original Type Application Density Duplex Background Combine Naas Status pasty r E a oo Background z Auto Paper IE Removal Select momaranonn U A D2 A lj A S EN a Finishing Separate Scan 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Finishing screen appears Under Staple touch either Corner or 2 Position Copies DT Ready to copy Finishing SeYece 100 0 D Corner 2 Position cc Anaona
178. 12 3 9 Change ICON aaiae eae npea ar aaa aa Taara aa reaa Aaaa EA Aaaa ra Aa aA aap eaaa aa arp EAEAN TEANS 12 24 12 3 10 Displaying the User Settings SCrCN 0 2 eeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaneeeeaeeeesaaeeseaeeeesaeeeeseneeseaeeeeeneeeess 12 24 12 4 Specifying administrator Settings ccccsseeeeceeesseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeenseeeaeeeeesneneeesesseeneaeeeesseeeeeeeesseneaee 12 26 12 4 1 DYSTOM SSTINGS ceass ccasachtasesececaantanasa cian ticeshaseahaadaeeacibadsabedensuatavaawsendaaheanaciasavieeusanteenavateeiacananancasecdts 12 26 12 4 2 Administrator Machine Setting ceecceeeseeeesneeeeseeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeaeeeeeneeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeneeneeeens 12 32 12 4 3 One Touch User Box Registration ceccceseceeeeneeeeeeneeeeeneeeesaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeaaeeenaeesesaeeeseaseeeeeaeeeeaaes 12 32 12 4 4 User Authentication ACCOUNT TraCk ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseaneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 12 33 12 4 5 Network SOttinQSics iaticasncebesteacsaceciats cxcsndvted Satccuusnpcuscaauavs Suadanuephsivs chsunovsnentenpocavdudrensuslegeuet caueeeeaas 12 36 12 4 6 Copier Setting ii aniline dan el dase ee A 12 37 12 4 7 PRINTS Settings asri aaan aaa daa aaea aeaa a aa Aaa aa couvecuvaceedvens couucevaaeerasdeaus aautneadieceassteeseas 12 37 12 4 8 Erea ao P EE E E A A A TN 12 38 12 4 9 SYSTOM COMNECHION eseeeticcadictecaduncsveace cea sd ecadd saa r a a ara aAa A a ra aaraa A ra ASEA EA cat iuetadbecedeentenaddndes
179. 12 51 Utility mode Check the sample copy for the punch positions and for the center of the paper Ifthe punch positions are too far above the center of the paper touch under Adjust Value to increase the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 5 0 mm Each time or is touched the value is increased or decreased by one increment Ifthe punch positions are too far blow the center of the paper touch under Adjust Value to increase the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 5 0 mm Touch OK To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key The vertical position of the punched holes is adjusted If no adjustment of the vertical position of the punched holes was necessary in step 7 this completes the procedure Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy Check the print result Check that the vertical position of the punched holes was adjusted f more adjustment is necessary repeat steps 6 through 9 12 52 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 12 6 5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment The horizontal position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper Note Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher For details on the Punch settings refer to Punching holes in copies Punch settings on page 3 74 Before mak
180. 128 g m Z Folding Unit ZU 604 ZU 605 Z fold 50 g m to 90 g m Shift Tray SF 602 52 g m to 216 g m Output Tray OT 505 52 g m to 216 g m bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 3 7 Copy paper originals 7 1 3 Paper Tray Output Tray capacity Paper trays Capacity Main unit paper tray 1650 sheets 64 g m Tray 1 Main unit paper tray 1100 sheets 64 g m Tray 2 Main unit paper tray 550 sheets 64 g m Tray 3 4 Large capacity unit 4000 sheets 80 g m LU 405 Large capacity unit 4000 sheets 80 g m LU 406 Bypass tray Plain paper 100 sheets 80 g m Special paper 1 sheet Post Inserter PI 504 200 sheets 80 g m Equipment Capacity Automatic Duplex Unit Unlimited Finisher FS 524 Main finishing tray Tray 2 B4 or larger 1500 sheets 80 g m A4 to B5 3000 sheets 80 g m A5 or smaller 500 sheets 80 g m Staple 100 to 20 sets 60 on to 3 g m Sub finishing tray eh 1 200 sheets 80 g m Finisher FS 525 Main finishing tray Tray 2 B4 or larger 1500 sheets 80 g m A4 to B5 3000 sheets 80 g m Ja A5 or smaller 500 sheets 80 Staple 100 to 20 sets 60 on 20 g m Sub finishing tray tray 1 200 sheets 80 g m Finisher FS 610 Main finishing tray Tray 2 B4 or larger 1500 sheets 80 g m A4 to B5 2500 sheets 80 g m divs A5 or smaller 500 sheets 80 g m Staple 100 to 20 sets 60 on to n g m
181. 17 12 Memory 100 There are two Insert Image screens Touch and EH to display a different screen The inserted original is added after the specified page To arrange the page numbers in order starting with the lowest number touch Sort To remove a page number that has been specified touch the button for the page to be removed and then press the C clear key Ifthe original scanned from the original glass has more pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen the extra pages of the insertion original are printed at the end of the original Ifthe original scanned from the original glass has fewer pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen the missing insertion pages are not printed If the same page number is specified twice two insertion original pages are added at the specified location f the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main original the corresponding insertion original page is added at the end of the original copy 5 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears 6 Specify any other desired copy settings 7 Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 15 8 Application functions 8 Press the Start key Scanning begins canning is stopped Place document you wish to insert on the glass and press Start Job No
182. 2 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box 9 9 2 3 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS 610 Open the front door Grab handle FN6 and then pull out the stacker unit Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible Remove the staple cartridge holder Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder and then pull PSS ay a AN the holder up to remove it on P S i eo PSS SS gt By A bizhub 751 601 Version 2 9 15 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge holder Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder Do not remove the remaining staples otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced Slowly peel off the stopper tape Install the staple cartridge holder Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted as far as possible bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box 9 Return the stacker unit to its original position When returning the stacker unit to its original position do
183. 2 Contents 7 15 Appendix 15 1 Entering text 2 2cer cecil aT a tee araa raaa a E aaa Taa Aaaa ee A aca ce eee ee atl EASA 15 3 15 1 1 Enlarging the keyboard su ccccatasccesthih cased uate cece ctventetcanduues caatepcabbateanshedhwecualean aae aaraa nia 15 5 15 1 2 Totype text ccvan cid nici a bic ti eens 15 6 15 1 3 List of available Characters csic fiv a a aa a aa igo A ra aa a dates ie aaae aaa naaa aE i aiaa 15 6 15 2 GOSS ANY E A T T A ded ue veh A T T 15 7 16 Index Contents 8 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 Introduction Introduction 1 OOO 1 Introduction Thank you for choosing this machine This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of the machine precautions on its use and basic troubleshooting procedures In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently carefully read this manual as needed For descriptions on trademarks and copyrights refer to Trademarks Copyrights The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views of the actual equipment 1 1 Available features Automatically selecting the paper The most appropriate paper size can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified zoom ratio For details refer to Automatically selecting the paper size Auto paper setting on page 3 36 Adjusting copies to the size of the paper The most appropriate zoom ratio can autom
184. 2 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Select whether or not the user is logged off when scanning of the document is finished after the user has logged on to this machine 2 Specify the settings for logging off after document scanning is complete l dministrator Settings gt Authentication Device Settings gt Logoff Settings utility Administrator Settings Comor D RaEhentication Account Track Authentication Device Settings 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch OK 10 Touch Close and then touch Close in the next screen that appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 7 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 14 2 2 Registering users There are two methods for registering users Connecting the authentication unit to this machine and registering directly from the machine e Connecting the authentication unit to a computer and registering using Data Administrator Detail Registered user data is stored on the hard disk of this machine If the user authentication method on the machine is changed or the hard disk is reformatted the registered user data is erased Registering from the control panel of this machine 1 From the control panel of this machine touch 4 User Authentication Account Track on the Administrator Settings screen and then touch 2 User Authentication Settings then 2 User Registration 2 Touch the button for a registrati
185. 2 53 Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 2 72 2 14 2 15 2 16 Punch Resist Loop Adjustment 72 56 Punch settings 3 64 3 74 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment 72 55 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment 72 57 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment 72 49 O Queuing copy jobs 3 90 Quick copy screen 2 26 R Recall Copy Program 4 20 Replacing the staple cartridge 9 7 Save in User Box 8 93 Security Settings 72 38 Selecting the output tray 3 68 Separate Scan 3 77 Set Zoom 3 48 Shift Tray SF 602 2 22 Simple troubleshooting 5 43 Single sided copying 3 57 Sleep mode 2 35 Sort 3 64 3 66 Sound Setting 4 38 Special Size settings 7 24 Stamp Composition 8 56 Standard Size 1 settings 7 23 Staple cartridge 9 7 Staple settings 3 64 3 71 Stored jobs 77 14 11 15 System Auto Reset 2 34 System Auto Reset Confirmation 4 37 System Connection 72 38 System Settings 72 77 12 26 Tab Original Settings 3 24 Temporarily stopping 3 97 Text Enhancement 3 67 Text entry 75 3 Toner cartridge 9 3 Touch panel 2 26 4 27 Transport lever 2 60 Tray 1 2 5 2 50 Tray 2 2 5 2 50 16 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Index 16 Tray 3 2 5 2 57 Tray 4 2 5 2 57 Tri Fold 3 77 3 87 Tri Fold Position Adjustment 72 60 Trouble code 5 3 Trouble shooting 5 3 User authentication 2 38 User Authentication Setting 72 72 User Authentication Account Track 72 33 User manuals 7 77 User Settings 72 77 Utility mode 72 3 Warm up 2 32
186. 2008 Memory 8 68 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 Touching Date Time displays the Copy Protect gt Date Time screen Select the desired settings under Date Format and Time Format and then touch OK The copy protection date and time that is printed is the date and time when the original is scanned f Select desired data and time to apply to Copies pe document Application gt Copy Protect gt Date Time e gefece 100 0 Used Space Date Format Time Format Jan 23 2007 23 1 07 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touching Other displays a screen for specifying settings for other stamps Touch the button for the desired stamp and then touch OK To cancel the changes to the settings in each copy protection settings screen touch No To print the copy job number touch Yes under Job Number To print the serial number of this machine touch Yes under Serial Number For details on specifying settings for the serial number contact your service representative To print the copy distribution number touch Yes under Distribution Control Number A distribution number between 1 and 99 999 999 can be specified j i 7 Select desired Copy Protect to apply to Copies EE document Application gt Copy Protect gt Other Job Number Serial Number Seiece P 100 0 Used Space es
187. 3 x 19 Ga Foolscap ar 8K Ga 16K Ga H wide paper ASW Ga to ASW 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W Ga Q Custom sizes 100 mm x 139 mm to 331 mm x 488 mm Staple Standard sizes i A3 Ga to A5 U 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 H Foolscap 2 8K 16K Ga wide paper A3W ca to ASW Wy 11 x 17W Ga to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W D Custom sizes 182 mm x 139 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Output tray capacity Main finishing tray Tray 2 B4 or larger 1500 sheets A4 to B5 3000 sheets A5 or smaller 500 sheets Sub finishing tray Tray 1 200 sheets Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets 100 sheets 60 g m to 80 g m Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consump 80 W or less tion Dimensions 680 800 W x 656 D x 990 H mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out Weight 60 kg Consumables Staple cartridge 1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings 2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga 8 x 13 one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative bizhub 751 601 Version 2 6 7 6 Specifications 6 2 5 Finisher FS 610 Item Description Name FS 610 Function Straight delivery sorted grouped Offset delivery sort and offset group and offset Staple hal
188. 4 Raise the paper take up roller Load the paper into the tray Load the paper so that it is flush against the right side of the tray 4 Slide the lateral guide to fit the size of paper being loaded Move the lateral guide while holding the release button pressed When the button is released the guide is locked in place Fully push in the paper tray Reminder Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the W mark amp Reminder Make sure that the trailing edge guide is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper If there is space between the trailing edge guide and the paper or if the trailing edge guide is not correctly positioned the paper will not be fed correctly Make sure that the lateral guide is correctly positioned against the edge of the loaded paper If the lateral guide is not positioned correctly the paper size will not be correctly detected or the punched holes will not be correctly positioned If custom sized paper is loaded there may be some space between the paper and the trailing edge guide When loading the paper make sure that it fits well against the right side of the paper tray not the trailing edge guide bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 51 2 Before making copies XQ Reminder Do not close the paper tray with too much force otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply an impact to the machine that
189. 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 H Foolscap 8K Ga 16K U wide paper 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W W ASW to A5W W Custom sizes 182 mm x 139 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Paper capacity 200 sheets for each of the upper and lower trays Power requirements Supplied from finisher Maximum power consump tion 30 W or less Dimensions 511 W x 620 D x 220 H mm Weight Approx 10 5 kg A Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga 8 x 13 Ga one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative Shift Tray SF 602 Item Description Name SF 602 Function Straight delivery sorted grouped Offset stack sort and offset group and offset Amount of shift 30 mm Paper types Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m thick paper 91 g m to 216 g m thin paper 52 g m to 59 g m OHP transparencies 1 trace paper 1 tab paper 1 Paper sizes Standard sizes A3 Gi to A5 G g B6 1 A6 11 x 17 Gato 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 G q 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 Ga 1 Q 1 Foolscap 2 8K Ga 16K U Custom sizes 105 mm x 139 mm to 305 mm x 458 mm 1 139 mm x 139 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Output tray capacity A4 to B5 1250 sheets B4 or larger A5 J 500 sheets A5 G or smaller 100 sheets Power requirements Supplied from main unit Dimensions 400 490 W x 600 D x 480 H mm The value in parentheses is the dimension whe
190. 6 Change Password Description The password for the user who is currently logged on can be changed After typing in the current password type in the new password This parameter is available when User Authentication is set to ON MFP 12 3 7 Change E Mail Address Description The e mail address for the user who is currently logged on can be changed This parameter appears only when a user other than a public user is logged on Note Change E Mail Address appears only if the Administrator Security Levels parameter in Administrator mode s set to Level 2 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 23 12 Utility mode 12 3 8 Toner Supply Description When the toner density becomes low the density level can be restored while the machine is stopped 12 3 9 Change Icon Description The icon registered for the user who is currently logged on can be changed This parameter appears only when a user other than a public user is logged on 12 3 10 Displaying the User Settings screen Follow the procedure described below to display the User Settings screen by pressing Utility Counter key 1 Press the Utility Counter key Utility Counter 2 Touch 2 User Settings An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button For 2 User Settings press the 2 key in the keypad Job List e the menu buttons
191. 6 bees cccicctessecetescecaateaeadivcvvcissdecdhsaecacecedsctesdsecebades anstecdaaYeavasaleatavaneuiachnare 2 11 2 1 6 Finisher FS 524 Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 eeseesseesceeseeeeseeseeeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeesaeessaeesaeeeseeseeeesaeeeses 2 12 2 1 7 Finisher FS 525 Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 eesceesseeseeseeeeeceseeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeesaeesseeeaeeeseeseeeeseeeeneas 2 14 2 1 8 Finisher FS 610 Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 eeeceesceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeaeesaeeeeeeeaeesaaeesaeesaeeseaeenaeeeaes 2 16 2 1 9 Z Folding Unit ZU 604 ZU 605 o oo eee neinei earan ereen aasa E EGE a aa TaN areia 2 19 2 1 10 Post Inserter PI 504 o oo eceeeeceeeeeeeseee eee eeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeesaaaeeeseeseaaeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 2 21 2 1 11 Shift Tray SF 602 s ieciiece eke ied es hed ep ie es ee ee lied 2 22 2 1 12 Output Tray OT 505 0 eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeseeeesaeeeaeesaeesaeeeseeseaeeeaeessaeseaaeesaessaseseeeeesessessaeseaseseeeseaeeeees 2 22 2 1 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 0 eeceeeeceeeeeeeeneeseaeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeaeeteaeetaeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeae 2 23 2 1 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 o oo eee ceeeeseeteeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeseeseaeeeaeesnaeeeaeeeeeeseeeteaeeeaeeee 2 23 2 1 15 Control PAN scccccascescsdescasepcenascncescnsezaaskauaacdcaasaeevecnceaasedaavanccaacutesazesccaaaes lavadaiaascdeasiqereiens cataaneagaazaians 2 24 2 1 16 Basic Settings SCrOGMS snoin nanne ea i aaa aa iaa aeaa ia ea adaa adaa aiae 2 26 2
192. 8 emory 10 10 100 Scanned Batches Number of Sets o 1 Number of Originals 10 Specify any other desired copy settings Touch Proof Copy to copy 1 set Use the keypad and C to chang of sets Finish Scanning gt Change Setting Basic Settings Hane Status Print List Use individual settings Dy ali lt lt Finishing Job Details 6 19 2008 14 47 100 Cancel Start Application Image Shift 4 Cover Sheet Stamp Composition Touch Print List and then specify the printing method for the entire scanned original be applied to nned Status All Simplex Delete Job Details 13 11 2006 Memory All Duplex Is there more information about the settings gt Refer to the appropriate section 8 24 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 11 Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies 12 Touch Start or press the Start key If Cancel is touched a message appears requesting confirmation to delete the data To stop printing touch Yes and then touch OK bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 25 Application functions 8 7 Reversing black and white gradation of the original Neg Pos Reverse function Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the ori
193. 8 51 Erasing black marks along center fold Center Erase function eseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeees 8 53 Erasing outside areas of the original Non Image Area Erase fUNCtION eieeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeee 8 55 Printing the date time or page number on copies Stamp Composition functions 8 56 Printing the date time Date Time function ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaeeeeesecaeeeeeeseceeeeeeteaees 8 57 Printing the page number Page Number fUNCtION 2 2 cecceeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaee 8 60 Printing previously registered stamps Stamp function 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeea 8 63 Printing copy protection text Copy Protect fUNCtION ccceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeeeteeeaee 8 66 Printing repeating stamps Stamp Repeat function 2 02 2 ce ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaes 8 73 Printing the image scanned first overlapped by the remaining original pages Overlay function 8 78 Saving a scanned image as a registered overlay Registered Overlay function eeeeeeee 8 81 Using a registered overlay Registered Overlay FUNCTION eeeseeeeeseeeteeeeeteneeeeeeneetesaeeeeeeeeeeas 8 85 Printing a header footer Header Footer function cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesecieeeeeeeeeaes 8 87 Printing the distribution control number Distribution Control Number
194. 8 71 Application functions JobList Select Insert Space scrren guto Paper 100 F Use Up Down keys to move cursor to where Copies you wish to insert a space and touch Insert Application gt Copy Protect gt Change Position Delete 0 Used Space Preset Stamp Date Time Serial Number Check Details imen Delete 8 Change Position 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 text to be deleted To delete the copy protection text touch Delete and then touch the button for the copy protection Select Delete scrren Job List guto Paper 199 9 Check Details 7 Select desired Copy Protect to delete Copies Application gt Copy Protect gt Change Position Delete Used Space Preset Stamp Date Time Serial Number 8 Change Position Insert Space 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 8 Touch OK and then touch Close in the next screen that appears 9 Specify any other desired copy settings To cancel the setting and 10 Using the keypad type in the 11 Press the Start key select the default press the Reset key desired number of copies 8 72 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 15 5 1 2 Printing repeating stamps Stamp Repeat function Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Tou
195. Accessibility key The Basic screen appears again Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy scanning and fax functions With the Enlarge Display mode text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily For details on the Enlarge Display mode refer to the User manual Enlarge Display Operations If OFF is selected in the Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation screen the screen is not displayed 4 36 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 4 8 7 Setting the Message Display Time function It is possible to specify the length of time for displaying warning messages which appear for example when an incorrect operation is performed As the factory default 3 seconds is selected 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen and then touch E to display the next screen For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen refer to Displaying the accessibility setting screen on page 4 27 2 Touch Message Display Time or press the 1 key in the keypad aN Use the menu buttons or A keypad to make a selection Accessibility Setting 1 Hessage Display Time TY 2 Sound Setting J 3 The Message Display Time screen appears LIN O 3 Select setting for the desired amount of time that messages are displayed Touch 3 seconds or 5 seconds to select how long messages are displaye
196. Ae ARa aiei 12 84 Password Rules 2 226 E E E TT 12 85 Conditions of the password rules ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesecaaeeeeeeescaeeeeseesecaeeeeeesenneees 12 85 Enhanced Security Mode ccssssseccccsseseeeeeeeesseeneeeesseneneeeessseeeeeeessneneeeesssnaeaeeeessneeeaeeeeseeeaeeeeeas 12 87 Safety information Using Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 nnsssnnnnenunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 13 5 Settings of this MACHING sass ccetisccethestrecnsecchatsneshasecipecchegashceanecnsenecs feadbeeweawiecadedal Acad iaaiiai 13 6 REGISTERING USCIS sc seececad secs dnra a aa eves avasenveaeabacaseddath dein sats a ARa aaea a aaa 13 8 Logging on to this MAaCHING v 04 ait eet wens a aT TENE a a Taataa rat a 13 20 D amp P UN O a a eae Se she AC aae eS e aa Nn 13 22 nit I 201 Safety Inform ation ccs aaea raana e aaa cece ys sates a aaa cece nn ceedtecay sect cnceadeccustucdee ss ecedcusecdeshcccvedsusecdeeese 14 3 Using Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 ccccseeeeeeseneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeneeeeeeseeeneeeeesseeees 14 5 Settings OF THIS MACHING sson iriri kendenan hinat eed le teiseateeaverebescvesatinecanaeuelevecadungescieidee day 14 5 Registering SerS asioin iaaea easet io a ia earet a a Eea aed ane vee 14 8 Logging t THIS MACHING serrr aaiae anaa taeae a En AA EAA ARAA A RAE EAA AEEA anarei 14 22 IDS aae aleio a ERE TS E E E E E TE 14 24 bizhub 751 601 Version
197. B Background Removal 3 67 3 63 Basic screen 2 26 Binding Position 3 29 Biometric authentication 2 45 Book Copy 8 27 Booklet 8 47 Bypass tray 2 6 2 55 C Call service representative 5 3 Center Staple amp Fold 3 77 3 79 Center Staple Position 72 45 Change Icon 72 24 Chapters 8 17 Check Job 4 3 Cleaning 70 3 Combined pages 3 55 Conserving energy 2 34 2 35 2 36 Consumables 9 3 Control panel 2 24 2 29 Copier Settings 72 27 12 37 Cover Sheet 8 6 Create One Touch Destination 72 8 Create User Box 72 8 Custom Display Settings 72 79 Custom Size settings 7 74 7 25 D Deleting jobs 77 8 Density 3 67 3 62 Destination registration 72 8 72 32 Double sided copying 3 52 E Emptying hole punch scrap boxes 9 78 Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation 4 35 Enlarge Reduce settings 3 44 Entering text 75 3 Erase 8 50 8 57 8 53 8 55 F Face Up 3 64 3 69 Fax Settings 72 38 Fax Scan Settings 72 23 Features 7 3 Finisher FS 524 2 72 Finisher FS 525 2 74 Finisher FS 610 2 76 Finishing 3 64 Folding 3 77 Full Size 3 40 Fusing unit 2 9 G Glossary 75 7 Glossy 3 67 Group 3 64 3 67 H Half Fold 3 77 3 78 Half Fold Position 72 47 Header Footer 72 64 Help 4 22 l IC card authentication 2 47 Icons 2 28 Image Adjustment 8 44 Image Repeat 8 33 Increase Priority 77 17 Individual Zoom 3 45 Insert Image 8 14 Insert Sheet 8 70 Internal 2 8 Interrupt 4 75 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 16 3 16
198. Book Erase appears highlighted 6 Touch OK and then touch Close 8 30 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 7 11 In the Basic screen touch Paper and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper a Ready to copy copies Density Duplex Background 3 Combine Check Details 22 08 2008 17 34 Memory 100 Specify any other desired copy settings To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies Press the Start key For details on positioning the original refer to Scanning a multi page original from the original glass on page 3 15 Position the next page and repeat step 10 until all pages of the original are scanned Scanning begins If Book Spread or Separation is selected printing begins If Front Cover or Front and Back Cover is selected continue with step 11 After all original pages have been scanned touch Finish If Front and Back Cover was selected the back cover is scanned after the front cover and then all page spreads are scanned in order SURVEYOR S REPORT bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 31 8 Application functions If Front Cover
199. Display Time FUNCTION ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeseeeeeneeteeeees 4 37 4 8 8 Setting the Sound Setting functions 0 0 eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeseaeeeeeneeeeenneeseneeess 4 38 iI OL 5 1 When an error code appearS sssssssssseuunnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnn ennnen nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 5 3 5 2 When the message misfeed detected appearS sssssnsssseuunsnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 5 5 5 2 1 Location of paper misfeed and illustration 0 0 eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeaeeeeeneeeeseaeeneneees 5 6 5 2 2 Paper misteed indications EE E A EE E E E A 5 7 5 2 3 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 1 1 oo eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeaeeeeaeeeesaeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeaneeseneeeeseeeeeaes 5 8 5 2 4 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 2 2 a asssssssunsencrrnnrsnnerunnrruutnrnnennnnannnnunnntunnenannnnannnnunnnannanne nanena 5 11 5 2 5 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 3 and tray 4 3 4 ee eeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeenneeeeeeees 5 12 5 2 6 Clearing a paper misfeed in the LCT Large Capacity Unit 5 oo ee eeeseeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeees 5 14 5 2 7 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray 6 eee eeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeess 5 15 5 2 8 Clearing a paper misfeed in the vertical transport section 7 oo eeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeetes 5 15 5 2 9 Clearing
200. ESerVALION s s cei cccteccdes con decccec ccc eaoaai ces cnceteeendnce ceed aa eana a eain a AASER aeaa a ectuscupasstennctees lt aduce 3 90 3 16 Temporarily stopping scanning printing ccseccesenecesseeenseeeeenseeeeseneeensneeenseeeeseeeenseeeseneeesneeenens 3 91 3 17 Deleting a paused JOD acai cic i 0ass sndes cacedactcedencecncctestegdececderececestessucuctecesstucnestessucnseeceesshacecearsaecntees 3 92 tional copy operations 4 1 Checking the copy settings Check JOD cssccssseecesseeeesseeesseeeenseeeeeneeeseneeeeessneeenseeeeeseeeenseeeeess 4 3 4 1 1 To Check The Settings i a hes 0 cca ed eeeueg ea dd sae aaa a eaa E aa E e a a pasgeeties ads a a AE AAAA an ENAA 4 3 4 1 2 Toschanige the Setge i ra chaps a a a E aaa a aa aaa aaa aa aa Acted cade oboe bendy 4 5 4 2 Printing a proof to check the settings Proof COpy sssssssuunnnnnnnunnnnnnnunnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 4 6 4 3 Checking the print image as a preview image Advanced Preview s ssssssenunnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 4 9 4 3 1 ENEE ET a E EN Sea ATE E a N E EN 4 9 4 3 2 Checking the advanced Preview cccscseessnecesceceeseeeeeeseeeeeseneseseeeeseenaeeseaeesseeeeseseeeeeseneseseeeneneeeees 4 13 4 4 Interrupting a copy job Interrupt MOde ccccesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeessneeeeeeesseneeeeeeensnneaeeeeesseeeeeeeesaees 4 15 4 5 Registering Copy programs Mode Memory ecccesseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesenneneeeessnaeeeseeseeeeeeee
201. En Copy Protect Stamp Repeat Overlay Registered Overlay Header Footer Bistripution Check Details Control Number 4 Watermark 02 26 2010 09 44 Memory 90 The Date Time screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 57 8 Application functions 4 Touch buttons under Date Format Time Format and Pages to specify the various settings Job List Select desired date time type Copies Application gt Stamp Composition gt Date Time Date Format T 23 Jan 2007 i ist Page Only Jan 23 2007 29 1 07 1 23 07 02 02 2008 Henory To cancel the Date Time function touch No To print the date time only on the first page touch 1st Page Only The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet Insert Sheet and Chapters functions Can the time be omitted gt If None is selected the time is not printed 5 Touch Print Position and then select the printing position F tist Oe copies Application gt Date Time gt Print Position Print Position Top Right No Adjustment Center i Right No Adjustment P Bottom left f Botton Botton Right Adjust Position ia 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 To make fine adjustments to the printing p
202. Hane Status coPY StopPrint f Page Margin 4 Sheet Covers Chapter Inser Stamp Composition d A Finishing Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 10 Press the Proof Copy key to print another proof copy 11 Touch Print To stop the proof copy while scanning or printing perform the operation described in Temporarily stopping scanning printing on page 3 91 The remaining copies are queued as a copy job bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 3 Checking the print image as a preview image Advanced Preview Print image can be checked as a preview image before printing This prevents print errors from occurring If an optional hard disk is not installed print image cannot be checked with the Preview screen displayed 4 3 1 Preview screen In the Preview screen originals that have been scanned in a wrong direction can be rotated and settings specified before scanning can be changed Screen Layout Hane Status Copy PrintWait Scanning will be finished If the display size is changed View Finishing will not be available Rotate current page fe Select page s to rotate f Change Setti No Item Name Description 1 Prev Page Next Page Moves to the previous or next page from the current page 2 The preview image appears Press View Finishing to apply the fini
203. Max 100 sheets 80 g m er Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consump 53 W or less tion Dimensions 625 W x 576 D x 154 H mm Weight Approx 12 9 kg Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga and 8 x 13 Ga one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative 6 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Specifications 6 2 Option specifications 6 2 1 Large Capacity Unit LU 405 Item Description Name LU 405 Paper types Normal paper 60 g m to 90 g m thick paper 91 g m to 200 g m Paper sizes Standard sizes A4 U B5 W 8 1 2 x11 W 16K Wy wide paper A4W U BSW iy 8 1 2 x 11W U Custom sizes 182 mm x 257 mm to 223 mm x 314 mm Paper tray capacity 4 000 sheets 80 g m Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consump 82 W or less tion Dimensions 430 W x 639 D x 690 H mm Weight Approx 30 kg Configuration 1 paper tray 6 2 2 Large Capacity Unit LU 406 Item Description Name LU 406 Paper types Normal paper 60 g m to 90 g m thick paper 91 g m to 200 g m Paper sizes Standard sizes A3 a B4 a A4 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 G Q Foolscap 8K a 16K WJ wide paper ASW B4W ca A4W 11 x 17W 8 1 2 x 11W a Q Custom sizes 195 mm x 210 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Paper tray capacity 4 000 sheets 80 g m Power requirem
204. NO PORS TUV WXYZ etc Tevel76roup 1A Level 0 0001 Destinationi Administrator Settings Limiting Access to Destinations Apply Levels Groups to Dest Memory 100 12 12 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 6 Touch the button for the desired setting Either an access permission level or an access permission group can be specified for each destination Only one access permission group can be specified for a single destination To specify the destination group touch Apply Group Touch the button for the desired group and then touch OK Touch the button for a group touch Details and then check the destinations and names of users belonging to that group Specify the group the user belongs to Utility cereale 07 08 09 10 4 Limiting Access to Destinations Ib Address Book 01 02 Groupi 06 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To specify the destination level touch Apply Level Touch the button for the desired level and then touch OK Apply access level to destination inistrator Settings gt Address Book gt Apply Level Utility Administrator Settings rr Apply Levels Groups to Dest eo E os oe Address Book ene 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 13 12 Utility mode Specifying a user leve
205. Protection Utility overlapping pages Copy Protect Print copies with copy protection text hidden text that prevents unauthorized copying such as a preset stamp or the date Stamp Repeat Print copies with text such as registered stamps preset stamps or the date repeating throughout the page Overlay Copies can be printed with the contents of the first original page overlapped by as an overlay image the remaining original pages Registered Overlay A previously scanned image can be stored on the HDD Register Overlay Image and recalled when needed to printed overlapping a document Recall Overlay Image Header Footer The date and time or a distribution number can be printed on each page This function is available only when specified by the administrator Distribution Control Print four digit distribution number to fill the background of each copied set Number Watermark Print the desired letter type selected from preset watermarks in the center of printed page background 1 05 1 23 1 REPORT Detail The Registered Overlay key appears only when the machine is equipped with in HDD To use Header Footer function a header footer should be registered in advance from Administrator mode For details on registering headers footers refer to Specifying headers footers on page 12 64 Detail For details on printing a date time stamp refer to page 8 57 For details on printing a page number stamp refer to page 8 60 For details on printing a stamp r
206. Reset key Copies Job list Ready to copy Basic original setting original Tyre Bij G BRSBECEONRS re C Book Copy Repeat O A J Page Margin Image Adjust _ Booklet Z a E G Stamp Composition 4 Save in User Box A Z 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Sheet Cover Chapter Insert screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 11 Application functions 4 Touch Insert Sheet To cancel the Insert Sheet function touch No The Insert Sheet screen appears 5 Touch a button for a page number and then use the keypad to type in the number of the page where the paper is to be inserted There are four Insert Sheet screens Touch jj or to display a different screen To arrange the page numbers in order starting with the lowest number touch Sort To remove a page number that has been specified touch the button for the page to be removed and then press the C clear key If the same page number is entered multiple times copying is not possible Delete repeated page numbers If the entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the original paper is not inserted Post Inserter appears if the optional post inserter has been installed If the insertion sheets are loaded into a paper tray of
207. Setting changes may not be applied Basic Settings Application Document 2 Sided Image Shift BEERS B na SES Hane Status jm Neg Pos Reverse Zoon Original Size Binding Position Tab Original Engage Original Type Job Details 2 06 19 2008 11 15 Memory 100 To print a single copy to be checked press the Proof Copy key Repeat steps 5 to 7 until all originals have been scanned The amount of memory available can be checked beside Memory in the lower left corner of the screen In addition the number of original batches can be checked beside Scanned Batches When the memory is full a message appears Select whether to delete the last part of the data and scan it again delete the last part of the data and print or delete all of the original data To cancel changes to the settings touch Cancel Scanning begins After scanning is finished touch Fix and then touch OK Is there more information about the settings Refer to the appropriate section 8 Afterall original pages have been scanned touch Finish A message appears requesting confirmation that scanning is finished bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 23 Application functions 9 Touch Yes and then touch OK If No was selected touch Change Setting to change the copy settings Finished scanning Ea petits Status Are you finished scanning the originals 02 200
208. Settings Paper Tray utility 1 A4D User Settings 2 A4D System Settings Paper Tray Settings 22 08 2008 15 05 Memory 100 Paper Type Settings Paper Size The Paper Size screen appears Type in the length X and width Y of the paper Touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction and then touch and to type in the length of side X 139 7 mm to 458 0 mm Touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction and then touch and to type in the length of side Y 182 0 mm to 314 0 mm If a decimal value is displayed in the screen use the keypad to type in the length For details on switching between decimal and fraction values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 f a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value Utility Y System Settings Paper Tray Settings Paper Type ize Settings 22 08 2008 15 09 Memory 100 l Job List elect paper size for Tray 3 lity gt Paper Type Size Settings gt Custom Size COE EDMEE 182 0 314 0 139 7 458 0 Touch OK 7 26 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 7 3 5 To select a sett
209. Shift Settings 9 Stamp Settings 6 Change Password Changes the password for the user who is currently logged on Refer to Change Password on page 12 23 7 Change E Mail Address E Mail Address Changes the e mail ad dress for the user who is currently logged on Refer to Change E Mail Ad dress on page 12 23 8 Toner Supply Refer to Toner Supply on page 12 24 8 Change Icon Changes the icon for the user who is currently logged on bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 First level menu Second level menu Third level menu Details 3 Administrator Settings 1 System Settings 1 Power Save Settings 2 Output Settings 3 Date amp Time Settings 4 Daylight Saving Time 5 Weekly Timer Settings 6 Restrict User Access 7 Expert Adjustment 8 List Counter 9 Reset Settings 0 User Box Settings next screen Refer to System Settings on page 12 26 1 Size Settings 2 Stamp Settings 3 Blank Page Print Set tings 4 Page Number Print Po sition 5 Skip Job Setting 6 Application Key Set tings 8 Advanced Preview Set ting For details of 1 Size Set tings contact your service representative 2 Administrator Machine Settings 1 Administrator Registra tion 2 Input Machine Address Refer to Administra
210. The destinations that can be accessed by users can be limited according to the access permission levels specified for the user and destination For example a level 2 user can access destinations in levels 0 through 2 but cannot access destinations in levels 3 through 5 A level 5 user can access all destinations in levels 0 through 5 Destinations Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 5 user ieee is access range Level 2 Level 2 user access Level 1 range Level 0 amp Note For details on the access permission level settings for user refer to User Authentication Account Track on page 12 33 As a default the access permission level specified for public users is level 0 Group In addition to users and destinations groups with access permissions can be created and given a name When users and destinations are registered in these groups a destination registered in a group can be accessed by users registered to the same group In addition by applying access permission levels to groups users not registered in a group can be given access permissions according to the conditions of the specified level A destination can be registered in only one group However a user can be registered in multiple groups Access Allow Level 3 oo l l l l E r csc I e l l l bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 9 Utility mode Specifying a group setting 1 6
211. The essentials of imaging KONICA MINOLTA bizhub 751 601 User s Guide Copy Operations Contents 1 Introduction 1 1 Available feature isite coi sccasectateccncdeteysccatencetecdetanedescnansecetecegnac tis ceseuandedacsectethvaateuenncdextecenscessteddanctexsed 1 3 1 2 Explanation of Manual CONVENTIONS cccccssseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeesseneeeesesseneeeesessennaeeeeseeneees 1 9 1 3 Descriptions of originals and paper cccssseecceeseeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeneesesseeaeeeeesseneneeeeseenaees 1 10 1 4 USO MAN WANS isesee cscs cdecec cies ccesece sts E E scdeieniedsceeesesuertecstevee TE 1 11 1 4 1 Printed el eves cs eased vcs ech ens anan Eea AEEA eaae A EEE EEEE Sor Aei baa iaae eee Sele 1 11 1 4 2 Introduction to the user manual DVD cccccsccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeaee 1 11 2 Before making copies 2 1 Machine configUrati M icisisiccescscccect citi cecscsecerceaseceeddcxccecewecetecauececessuesventernecencecs taccawcsteteeueuddevendaseeeed 2 3 2 1 1 OPONSE en ese ces ca at dace ss cedar tun vate wa cusuGineViue E E pec cucnenea wat 2 3 2 1 2 External A A E he de A de Se eee 2 5 2 1 3 WME STV A saeco scence case a peak ceca A E sen setaaet tc ches vnateu E A I E E ATT 2 8 2 1 4 Large Capacity Unit LU 405 iciccicsisssengesscenasncacassecacsaiendcantdanancanasaedenssiasaeaeacavacieaaseddaseeaandeaseanteneasets 2 10 2 1 5 Large Capacity Unit LW 40
212. Used Space Date Time 8 Change Position Serial Number Insert Space Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch OK and then touch Close Specify any other desired copy settings Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies Press the Start key 8 15 6 Printing the image scanned first overlapped by the remaining original pages Overlay function Copies can be printed with the contents of the first scanned original page overlapped by the remaining original pages In addition a scanned original can be stored as a registered overlay and recalled and used later REPORT 2 REPORT 2 8 78 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 1 Position the original for the overlay 2 Touch Application and then touch Stamp Composition Job list Ready to copy Original Setting Original Type BEICEePer 100 07 Eji F ehSBter YRS re 4 Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat 4 O Hi J Page Margin Image Adjust Booklet rs E Stamp Compos ition Save in User Box A Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Stamp Composition screen appears 3 Touch Overlay To cancel the Overlay function touch No list Ready to copy copies Application gt Stamp Composition A4 D 100 0 O E_ Date Time Page Number Stamp Z amp H En Copy Protect Stamp Repeat Overlay 7 Che
213. User Reset Modes 2 Error Details 2 User Name User Box box number box name hours Job Start Prints Original 1 Displayed only for jobs on the Current Jobs list 2 Displayed only for jobs on the Job History list 11 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Managing jobs 11 Displayed only for jobs on the Currently Jobs list transmitted to multiple destinations 1 Touch Job List in the left panel and then touch Job Details The Job List screen appears Display the list containing the job whose details are to be checked Select the job whose details are to be checked and then touch Detail If an incorrect job was selected select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it The Detail screen appears Job No 13 Details Status Printing No User Name User Name COPY Document Name Tray 1 Output Trag hours Sere 02 02 2008 09 59 Prints Original 1 Beth 9 on veain 10 10 02 02 2008 4 After the desired information has been checked touch Close or press the Reset key To return to the screen displayed before Job Details was touched touch Close To return to the Basic screen press the Reset key Q Detail To delete the job touch Delete in the Detail screen If Detail appears in the Detail screen for a job selected trom the Send tab detailed information is available on the mu
214. User Authentication amp Account Track is set to Synchronize even when Public User Access is set to Allow Public User Access changes to Restrict Number of User Counters Assigned for Users can be specitied if User Authentication is set to ON External Server or ON MFP and Account Track is set to ON If the number of user counters is set to 50 up to 950 accounts can be registered Q Detail For details on external server authentication refer to the User manual Network Administrator If Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track was set to Do Not Synchronize use by a public user is not permitted If both user authentication and account track settings have been applied Account Name amp Password is selected A public user can be set to provide temporary access to this machine If public user access is permitted it is recommended that limitations be placed on the machine functions that can be used For details refer to User Registration on page 12 74 If account track settings have been applied while User Authentication is set to ON MFP or ON External Server type in the user name and password in the user authentication screen and then type in the account name and password in the account track screen When ON MFP is selected and Account Track is ON and once the machine is used with the appropriate user authentication and account track information entered the authe
215. W 0 Custom sizes 100 mm x 139 mm to 331 mm x 488 mm Staple Standard sizes 3 A3 Gato Ad W 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Q Foolscap 2 8K Ga 16K Ga wide paper A3W ca to ASW iy 11 x 17W Ga to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W D Custom sizes 182 mm x 139 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Booklet tray Standard sizes Half fold center staple amp fold A3 aa B4 A4 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8K wide paper A3W ca B4W A4W 11 x 17W 8 1 2 x 11W Standard sizes Tri fold A4 a 8 1 2 x 11 16K Custom sizes Half fold center staple amp fold 210 mm x 279 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Output tray capacity Main output tray Tray 2 B4 or larger 1500 sheets A4 to B5 2500 sheets A5 or smaller 500 sheets Sub output tray Tray 1 200 sheets Booklet tray Half fold 3 sheets 25 to 33 sets Center staple amp fold 5 sheets 15 to 20 sets Tri fold 1 sheet 50 sets Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets 50 sheets 60 g m to 80 g m Maximum number of sheets bound with center staple amp fold 20 sheets 60 g m to 80 g m Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consump tion 80 W or less Dimensions 680 800 W x 656 D x 990 H mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out 6 8 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Specifications
216. aan dacs sucavevstteuatecunshoucestveed svanedath saadeePesanedvneuead 3 68 3 11 4 Outputting copies with their front sides facing up Face UP settings eeeeeeeseeeeesneeeeeneeeeseeees 3 69 3 11 5 Stapling Copies Staple settings 0 0 eceeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeessaaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeees 3 71 3 11 6 Punching holes in copies PUNCH settings csccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeseseeaaeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeaee 3 74 3 12 Selecting a folding Stung aaaea nara aaraa cease cate cate aeaa aaa a r aAa raa aE Ea Hecchewdee deccennieeseescetee ec 3 77 3 12 1 Folding copies in half Half Fold Setting ccccceeceseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeesecaaeeeeeseeeneeeeeees 3 78 3 12 2 Binding copies at the center Center Staple amp Fold setting eesessesessesreerrrserressrrerrrnerrnnerrnsees 3 79 3 12 3 To fold copies in three Tri Fold Setting ccccceccenceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeescueeeeeeeeesaaees 3 81 3 12 4 Z Folding and outputting papers Z Fold Setting cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseaaeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeaees 3 83 Contents 2 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 13 Manually using the fimisher cccssseeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesenneneeeensneeeeseeseseeneeeessneaeeaeeeseeeeeeeeseenaees 3 14 Selecting not to rotate the image 3 15 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed NEXtJOb F
217. ace your finger on the authentication Unit Print amp Access Access Hane Status Name Job Details 03 03 2010 14 10 Memory 100 2 Log in to the machine Place the IC card you have registered on the authentication unit when IC card authentication has been specified Place the IC card you have registered on the authentication unit and enter the password when IC card authentication password has been specified Ready to copy copies Check Job m pmm peal ginal Setting Original Type Application Density Duplexs Backgr6und Combine Density i Auto DE Background Auto Paper Removal Select SGGHHGG000 1 1 Hane Status 7 Finishing 4 Separate Scan _ Auto Rotate OFF Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The user is authenticated and the Basic screen appears 3 Press the User Box key in the control panel User Box e QO 14 32 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 4 Touch Use Document ect an operation User Box Operations Status Save Document Use Document S File Document A Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 5 Touch System User Box elect the
218. after the last page of the copy The same operation is performed with double sided copying 3j 1 REPORTI j 1 m REPORT 4 1 1 ORT Note f the optional post inserter is installed outer front and back cover pages can be inserted from the post inserter Cover page settings can be specitied for paper loaded in the post inserter and in the paper trays Paper loaded in the post inserter is added at the front when it is specified as the outer front cover or it is added at the back when it is specified as the outer back cover Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Foran original that exceeds 100 pages refer to Scanning the original in separate batches Separate Scan setting on page 3 11 Load the paper for the cover pages and the paper for the main body of the original into separate paper trays Use paper with the same size for the cover pages and for the main body of the original and load them in the same orientation 8 6 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 3 4 Touch Application and then touch Sheet Cover Chapter Insert For details on using thick paper for the cover sheets and on loading the paper refer to Paper weight on page 7 3 and Loading paper into the bypass tray on page 2 55 To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset
219. ain 2 56 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 Reminder When loading OHP transparencies load them in the d orientation as shown in the illustration Do not load OHP transparencies in the Ga orientation Load OHP transparencies one sheet at a time When loading tab papers load them in the d orientation as shown in the illustration Do not load tab papers in the G orientation Load label sheets one sheet at a time bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 57 2 Before making copies Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up and select Letterhead for the paper type of the bypass tray Note The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the bypass tray Q Detail For details on the paper sizes refer to Copy paper on page 7 3 For details on selecting a setting for standard size paper refer to Selecting a paper size setting Size setting on page 7 10 For details on selecting a setting for non standard size paper refer to Specifying a non standard paper size Custom size settings on page 7 12 For details on selecting a setting for wide paper refer to Selecting a setting for oversized paper Wide paper settings on page 7 17 2 58 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 2 8 Loading paper of a different size into p
220. aking double sided copies or combined copies specify the original orientation otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and back page arrangement Note As the factory default the first setting with the top of the original at the top toward the back of the machine is selected Original loading orientation Using the ADF Using the original glass Icon Description Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the back of this ma chine Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the front of this ma chine e Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine e Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine e Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine e Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine 3 26 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 4 6 To select an original direction setting 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 In the Basic screen touch Original Setting Ready to copy Copies Check Job j
221. al face down onto the original glass For details on positioning the original refer to Placing the original on the original glass on page 3 10 3 Close the ADF 4 Inthe Basic screen touch Duplex Combine D Auto G88 e00 The Duplex Combine screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 15 Basic copy operations 5 Touch 1 Sided gt 2 Sided Copies zoon Bone sne Original Setting Original Type Application Auto Paper 100 0 es Original gt Copy Combine sided gt sided_ lt Binding Position gt E 3 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 6 Touch Binding Position select the binding position for the copy and then touch OK For details on specifying the binding position refer to Selecting double sided copies on page 3 52 pecify the binding position If the original Copies s not set upright select the direction lt Duplex Combine gt Binding Position Original Binding Position Output Binding Position Suig Ear 100 0 a a Left Bind Right Bind as 6 ute 02 02 2008 10 10 0 Memory 100 7 Touch Original Direction select the orientation of the loaded original and then touch OK For details on specifying the original orientation refer to Selecting the original orientation Original Direction sett
222. all version 4 x If Data Administrator ver 3 x is installed it is removed when version 4 x is installed Click the Plug in version button From the Plug in information list check the version of the Data Administrator plug in If the plug in version appears as 4 x This software can be used x Plug in information list Plug in Name Plug in Version Patt Font Management Utility 2 4 0 11031 Details Data Administrator 4 0 0 10231 13 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 1 3 Setup 1 Turn off the machine with the main power switch and then disconnect the authentication unit from the machine 2 Install BioDriver USB Driver Plug the cable from the authentication unit into the USB port on the computer The Found New Hardware Wizard starts 3 Select Yes now and every time connect a device and then click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software es this time only O No not this time Click Next to continue 4 Insert the application DVD included with the authentication unit into the DVD drive of the computer 5 Select
223. alled correctly Install toner cartridge and close all doors The toner cartridge is not installed correctly Reinstall the supplies or parts or contact your service representative Replenish paper The indicated tray has run out of pa per Load paper into the indicated tray See p 2 50 p 2 51 and p 2 55 No more staples Replace the staple cartridge or can cel stapling The staples have run out Replace the staple cartridge See p 9 7 Misfeed detected Since a paper misfeed occurred the machine is unable to make copies Clear the paper misfeed See p 5 5 Reinsert the following of originals After clearing a paper misfeed it is necessary to reload certain pages of the original that have already been fed through the ADF Load the indicated original pages into the ADF An internal error occurred Open and then close the front door If the trouble code appears again contact your Service Rep The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies Clear the error by following the on screen instructions If the error can not be cleared or released contact your service representative with the error code displayed on the screen Malfunction detected Please call your Service Rep The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies Inform your service representative of the code displayed on the touch pan el Now Downloading Program Data f
224. ally selecting the zoom ratio Auto zoom Setting The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size vY Ifthe Auto Zoom setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the original load the original with the same orientation as the paper Y Ifthe Auto Zoom was selected at the Auto Paper Select setting the Paper screen appears 1 In the Basic screen touch Zoom Ready to copy Check Job Density Background Hane Status Density Auto Select eee eoo0o0 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Background E auto Paper Removal Copies j Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF The Zoom screen appears 2 Touch Auto JobList Ready to copy Copies ginal Type Application Sefece 100 0 22 08 2008 13 41 Memory 100 3 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 39 Basic copy operations 3 6 2 Specifying the zoom ratio of the original Full Size setting A copy that is the same size as the original 100 is produced Y Touch to enlarge the zoom ratio and touch to reduce the zoom ratio in 0 1 i
225. am Shift 5 After typing in the name touch OK The current copy mode set 5 Will be regis in the program name g the keyboard Press C to delete the entered program name Recall Copy Program gt Register Copy Program General Affairs Shift 02 25 2010 Memory The copy program can be given the same name as a copy program that has already been registered To stop specifying the name of the copy program touch Cancel bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations The Recall Copy Program screen appears again The copy program is registered and a button with the entered copy program name appears Can the copy program name be corrected gt To change the entered copy program name touch the button whose name is to be changed and then touch Edit Name The Edit Name screen appears Return to step 4 and repeat the procedure to change the copy program name Can the specified settings for a copy program be checked gt To check the programmed copy settings touch the button for the desired copy program and then touch Check Program Settings For details refer to Copying with programmed copy settings Mode Memory on page 4 20 Touch OK or Cancel To return to the Basic screen press the Mode Memory key Q Detail To stop registering the program press the Reset key or the Mode Memory key N
226. an 22 08 2008 16 37 Memory 100 7 Select Copy or Blank Selecting Copy will copy the original image also onto interleaves To leave the interleaves blank touch Blank 8 Touch OK 9 Specify any other desired copy settings The number of copies is set to 1 and cannot be changed 10 Press the Start key bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 5 8 Application functions 8 2 Adding cover pages Cover Sheet function Copies can be made using paper different from the main body of the original excluding the cover pages and cover pages can be added using paper different from the copy The following types of cover pages and front and back cover page settings are available Setting Description Front Cover Front Copy The first page of the original is copied onto paper for the front cover sheet With double sided copying the second page of the original is copied onto the back of the front cover sheet Front Blank Paper for the front cover sheet is added as the first page of the copy The same operation is performed with double sided copying Back Cover Back Copy The last page of the original is copied onto the back cover page With double sided copying a double sided copy of the last two pages of the original is printed on paper for the back cover sheet if the original contains an even number of pages Back Blank Paper for the back cover sheet is added
227. an aaaea 12 67 User authentication and account track ccccceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeeeeeesecaaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 67 When user authentication and account track are synchronized escecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenaees 12 67 When user authentication and account track are used Separately sesseesresssresrreerrrrreesrrnsees 12 68 Selecting an authentication MethOd eeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaaeeseeeeeesaeeeeeneeeeeaaes 12 69 User Authentication Setting cccccsseececeessseeneeeeeseeeeeeeesesneeeeeeessnneaeeeeesseeeeeeeesseneeeeeeseseeneeeseas 12 72 Administrative SettingS List ccc csecesccecsseceinersecaasnccaastaeedsaneysanssaenaceassdedeaseccasscvedhaesevatanecessaceustacanaie 12 72 Default FUNCtION PermiSSiON i a aaaea a a a ee et cage idles Sod Md aaar a ia aaas 12 73 Publie Yser AO ESS a e a a E aa a aa aa a a a aa a ied si Ee e stig asd i aa aaeain 12 74 USS REGIStALON ssia en ae apa ana a aA ead a Aae a A eataa 12 74 DSA OTTAA E E A E R T EAA A E E een tetas 12 78 Viewing ser Counters saaara ar o a E e dea destvandecnenatttenendve 12 79 Account Track Setting seada arana aa aat a Tarrasa aa a aaa araa a aa a a aaa aaa a Aa aaao Enarari raik entice 12 80 Account Track Re istraion ameniona a A O N AON Tarai 12 80 Acco ntTrack Co nter n isan aaa ee Se ee ee ee aea aaiae 12 83 Viewing ACCOUNT COU E Sarara a Te aa ar aeaa ae anaa aa a a a Eaa iaa A Aaa eA aANT
228. an be made continuously The paper tray is automatically switched only if the ATS Permission parameter in the Utility mode is set to Permit Operating Conditions Set the following condition at 1 System Setting gt 3 Paper Tray Setting of User Setting Select the paper trays to be selected automatically by Auto Tray Select Setting if Auto paper select is functioned Tray Priority is available Select Allow at Auto Tray Switch ON OFF Select the same paper type at Paper Type Load the following paper into the paper trays e The same size in the same orientation The same paper type bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 7 2 7 2 1 Selecting the paper settings for bypass tray This section describes the procedures for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in bypass tray Q Detail For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray refer to Loading paper into the bypass tray on page 2 55 Automatically detecting the paper size Auto Detect setting The size of the paper loaded into bypass tray can be detected automatically 1 In the Basic screen touch Paper Check Job Density Background Hane Status View Density __ Auto z Background Renoga piolololota imm Finishing Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 Ready to copy Separate Scan Copies J original setting original Tyr Paper 4 S E
229. aper trays The paper loaded into the tray 3 and 4 can be changed to that of a different size amp Note To load paper of a different size into the tray 1 and 2 and the LCT contact your service representative 2 8 1 Changing the size of paper that is loaded Pull out the tray 3 or 4 Raise the paper take up roller Remove the trailing edge guide and then insert it at the position for the desired paper size Press the button to remove the trailing edge guide Insert the trailing edge guide into the hole corresponding to the size indicated on the bottom plate Load paper of the new size and then slide the lateral guide to fit the size of the paper Move the lateral guide while holding the release button pressed When the button is released the guide is locked in place Fully push in the paper tray f paper other than standard size paper or thick paper was loaded specify the settings for the loaded paper in the Paper Type screen Refer to Paper type setting for a tray on page 7 21 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 59 Before making copies Reminder Be sure to insert the trailing edge guide at the position for the specified size If there is space between the trailing edge guide and the paper the paper will not be fed correctly Make sure that the lateral guide is correctly positioned against the edge of the loaded paper If the lateral guide is not positioned corre
230. appears again 4 40 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 7 To enable disable the sound setting collectively from 2 to 5 touch Sound ON OFF Settings or press the 1 key in the keypad FN Use the menu buttons or C keypad to make a selection Sound Setting Sound ON OFF Settings confirmation Sound 2 Ey Successful Completion Sound Completed Preparation Sound 5 Caution Sound The Sound ON OFF Settings screen appears 8 Select On or No for the desired setting item You can turn ON OFF all the sounds C by selecting Al Sounds sound ON OFF Settings on Successful Completion Sound Completed Preparation Sound Caution Sound Confirmation Sound No No No No 9 Touch OK The sound Setting screen appears again 10 Touch Close The Accessibility Setting screen appears again 11 Touch Close or press the Accessibility key The Basic screen appears again bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 41 4 Additional copy operations 4 42 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 5 ll 5 5 1 Troubleshooting When an error code appears There are three types of errors errors that can be cleared by opening and closing the front door errors that can be cleared by turning the power off on and errors that cannot be cleared Clear the err
231. appears if scanning is not possible within the limited period of time For details on the scanning time consult with the technical repre sentative The message Failed to read data Place your fin ger once again and click the Start reading button appears on a computer where registration failed With the authentication unit the scanning time is limited to five sec onds for each scan This message appears if scanning is not possible within the five second time period Refer to the Quick Guide Authenti cation Unit Biometric Type AU 101 and check how to position the finger for authentication and scan ning in order to complete scanning within the limited period of time Correctly position the finger to be scanned on the scanner and do not move the finger until the scan ning results are received If the area of the finger to be scanned is dirty or chapped a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed Wash your hands and try scanning again or try to correct chapped fingers If the area of the finger to be scanned is too wide or too thin outside of the finger width range of 10 mm to 25 mm acorrect image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed Try widening your fin ger or inserting it deeper or less deep into the scanner bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 45 Troubleshooting Trouble Possible cause Remedy Scanning does not begin Is the
232. arate Scan Job Details _ 06 19 2008 16 36 close 4 After checking the settings touch Close or press the Reset key To return to the screen displayed before Check Job Set was touched touch Close To return to the Basic screen press the Reset key 11 2 3 Checking job details The following information can be checked from the Job List screen Print tab Status Receiving Print Wait Printing Stop Print Print Err Job Stored 1 Result Job Complete Deleted Due To Error Deleted by User Reset Modes 2 Error Details User Name Document Name Output Tray hours Job Start Job End Prints Original of Sets External Server Information Send tab Status Transferring Waiting Dialing Waiting To Redial 1 Result Job Complete Deleted Due To Error Deleted by User 2 User Name Document Name Address Type E Mail FTP File SMB TWAIN Fax WebDAV Others Dest Detail hours Job Start Type Prints Document External Server Information Receive tab Status Receiving Dialing only with polling reception Print Wait Printing Stop Print Print Err Saving to Memory 1 Result Job Complete Deleted Due To Error Deleted by User Reset Modes 2 Error Details E User Name Document Name Output Tray hours Job Start Type Prints Document box number box name External Server Information Save tab Status Receiving Saving to Memory Result Job Complete Deleted Due to Error Deleted by
233. arge sized paper Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with print operations e Total Total number of printout pages Large Size Total number of printout pages printed on large sized paper Fax Scan Total Total number of pages scanned total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes Large Size Total number of pages scanned total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes for paper specified as large size paper Original Counter This counter shows the number of original pages that were scanned Paper Counter This counter shows the number of pages used for printing Fax TX Fax TX Total number of pages transmitted with fax operations amp Note Counting automatically continues with user counters when using external server authentication The public user access is counted as public of the counter The user box administrator access is counted as BoxAdmin of the counter 12 78 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 9 6 Viewing user counters 1 7 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 Touch 4 User Authentication Account Track The User Authentication Account Track screen appears Touch 2 User Authentication Settings The User Authentication Setting screen appears Why is 2 User Authentication Settings not ava
234. aring paper misfeeds 12 Misfeed clearing dial FN7 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 13 Handle FN6 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit 14 Booklet tray Collects copies printed using a Fold Bind setting 15 Guide lever FN10 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 16 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replac ing the staple cartridge Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 No Part name Description 17 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Fin isher FS 610 18 Hole punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 1 9 Z Folding Unit ZU 604 ZU 605 a sk PIN EAN S Ly l bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 19 Before making copies No Part name Description 1 Z folding transport unit Pulled out when removing jammed paper 2 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 3 Hole punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings 4 Fron
235. as logged on 1 One Touch Destination User Box Registration appears tems for registering fax destinations appear only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available 12 2 2 Create User Box Parameter Description Public Personal User Box Specify settings for registering user box destinations For details refer to the User man i ual Box Operations and the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Opera Bulletin Board User Box tions Relay User Box Note 2 Bulletin Board User Box and 3 Relay User Box appear only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available f an optional hard disk is not installed the Confidential RX User Box key appears instead of the Public Personal key 12 2 3 Limiting Access to Destinations Access Level Using the Access Level settings on this machine the security of registered destinations can be managed by permitting prohibiting viewing of the destination information or fax transmissions to the destination Access permission levels can be set to one of six levels between 0 and 5 with the higher number indicating higher security Note The access level that is set for user destination and group level on the Limiting Access to Destinations can be used when user authentication settings have been specified 12 8 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 Level settings The access permission level can be specified for each user and destination
236. ate Use a Template No Template name Permitted function Max allowance manag 1 system Permit copy function The User settings dialog box appears 10 Type in the user name and password click the IC card authentication tab f desired type in the e mail address User settings User Name Password E Mail Address t Maximum numker of boxes Reference Allowed Setting i Card T ype FeliCa Scan Result Unregistered Card ID Read the data from the Card Input the card ID directly HEX 16 digit ex 11223344556677ER x Required field 11 Position the IC card on the authentication unit and then click Start reading The card ID can also be registered by selecting Input the card ID directly bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 19 41 4 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 12 Click 0K Repeat steps 8 through 12 until all users have been registered User settings User Name user Password pook E Mail Address Maximum number of boxes Reference Allowed Setting IC card authentication Card Type FeliCa Scan Result Update Card ID Read the data from the Card Input the card ID directly g 15E40048 HEX 16 digit ex 11223344556677 E 13 Click Export to the device To change the registered data select the user name and then click Edit
237. atically be selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size For details refer to Automatically selecting the zoom ratio Auto zoom Setting on page 3 39 Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios By specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios copies of the original can be resized as desired For details refer to Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios Individual zoom settings on page 3 45 mp ec ae Scanning the original in separate batches An original with a large number of pages can be divided and scanned in separate batches Double sided copies can be produced by using the original glass or the original pages can be alternately loaded onto the original glass or into the ADF and then all pages can be copied together as a single job For details refer to Scanning the original in separate batches Separate Scan setting on page 3 11 and Scanning a multi page original from the original glass on page 3 15 Carrying out half fold center staple amp fold tri fold Z fold finishing process Copies can be folded at their center Half Fold setting or bound with staples after being folded in half Center Staple amp Fold setting In addition the copies can be folded in three Tri fold setting or Z folded Z fold setting For details refer to Selecting a folding setting on page 3 77 K Bit 6 3 Half Fold Center Staple amp Fold
238. ating the status of jobs and the machine are displayed 4 Auto Rotate OFF button Touch to copy with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper 5 Separate Scan button Touch to scan the original in separate batches An original scanned in different batches can be treated as a single copy job 6 Finishing button Touch to specify settings for collating grouping stapling or hole punching 7 Left panel When the Job List button is pressed a screen showing the jobs currently be ing performed or waiting to be performed is displayed When the Check Job button is pressed a screen showing the result of the specified settings is displayed 8 Check Job button The result of the specified settings is displayed Job List button Jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed are displayed Various commands for checking and managing jobs are available Detail The basic settings screen Basic screen or Quick Copy screen that appears can be set with the Copier Settings parameter in the Custom Display Settings screen displayed from the User Setting screen in Utility Counter mode The arrangement of the buttons and screens differ with the Basic screen and Quick Copy screen however the functions that can be set are the same As a default Basic is selected This manual contains descriptions of procedures using the Basic screen that appears when Basic is selected The Quick Copy screen displays all of the set
239. atus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada 13 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 1 3 13 2 Using Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 The Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 is a biometric authentication system that performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in a finger Log on to this machine and print job operation can be authenticated with finger vein patterns when using this machine with user authentication settings specified The status of the authentication unit is indicated by a status indicator and tone Status indicator Device status Lit green Standing by authentication completed Flashing green Authenticating scanning Lit red Authentication failed scanning failed Off The authentication unit is not detected Tone Device status One short beep Starting to scan One short beep Retrying after authentication failed One short beep Authentication completed Two short beeps Authentication failed In order to use the authentication unit user finger vein patterns must first be registered with the machine A registered user can log on to this machine or print a print job after completing authentication with their finger vein patterns The following procedures describe how to specify the necessary settings on the machine register users and p
240. atus is displayed in the left panel Ready to accept another job Copies Check Job riginal Settin iginal Type Applicati Density Duplexs Background Cc as fe ombine Job 10 status F 7 Density f i E 122 Printing Auto 3 le Background t Auto Paper 2 jemoual Select 191 Nunber of Originals f R Number of Sets Total g oF Pages Brinted Finishing Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF 06 19 2008 16 31 Memory 100 To display the Job List screen touch Job Details To delete a job select the job from the job list and then touch Delete When there are more jobs than the seven that can be displayed at one time touch EJ and EJ to display other jobs Detail As the factory default the display for the sub display area is that when Job Display Setting is set to List Display For details on specifying the default display for the left panel and the display method for the left panel Job List refer to Custom Display Settings on page 12 19 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 11 Managing jobs 11 2 11 2 1 Performing operations on jobs Deleting a job A queued job or job being printed job on the Current Jobs list can be deleted 1 Touch Job List in the left panel and then touch Job Details Ready to accept another job Copies Check Job Densitys Backar und Hame Status Density COPY Printing Auto Duplex Combine Backg
241. auxiliary power key while it is scanning or sending or receiving data otherwise all scan data or transmission data will be deleted Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be printed otherwise the jobs will be deleted Q Detail The following are cleared when the main power switch and Power auxiliary power key are turned off Settings that have not been programmed Jobs queued to be printed bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 33 2 Before making copies 2 3 4 Automatically clearing settings Automatic panel reset If no operation is performed for a specified length of time even if the Reset key is not pressed settings that have not been programmed such as the number of copies are cleared and return to their default settings This is the automatic panel reset operation As the factory default the automatic panel reset operation is performed after 1 minute Q Detail The length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed and whether or not it is performed can be set from Utility mode For details refer to System Settings on page 12 26 Whether or not the automatic panel reset operation is performed when there is a change of user can be set from the Utility mode For details refer to System Settings on page 12 26 2 3 5 Automatically canceling the mode screen System Auto Reset If no operation is performed for a specified length of
242. ayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value To cancel changes to the settings touch Cancel Job List Specify the size using the keypad or the Copies menory buttons Change Tray Settings gt Bypass gt Custom Size Z Store 22 08 2008 14 28 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 6 Touch the memory button where the paper size is to be stored Job List Copies Change Tray Settings gt Bypass gt Store Cus hemory1 2 A4 D 100 0 memory2 memory3 menory4 Check Details memoryS NM Change Custom Size Name 07 11 2008 13 22 Memory 100 To change the name of a memory key touch Change Custom Size Name and then touch the key to be renamed Choose the memory key you wish to store this Copies LOSES paper size A4 D 100 0 memory3 memory4 Check Details ba menoryS e y Change C Size Nal Ha 11 07 2008 10 31 Memory 100 Using the keyboard that appears
243. be loaded Job List Select paper size for Tray 3 Utility gt Paper Type Size Settings gt Special Size Utility System Settings Paper Tray Settings Paper Type Size Settings 22 08 2008 15 07 Cancel 0K Memory 100 4 Touch OK 7 3 4 To specify a non standard paper size Custom size settings If custom sized paper is being used in the tray 3 and 4 specify a setting for custom sized paper The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for custom sized paper loaded into the tray 3 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen touch 5 Paper Type Size Settings For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen refer to To display the paper tray setting screen on page 7 21 For details on changing the paper size for the tray 3 and 4 refer to Loading paper into the bypass tray on page 2 55 Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection Utility gt System Settings gt Paper Tray Settings Auto Tray Switch ON OFF 4 8 Z User Settings System Settings p Print Lists Z Paper Type Size Settings 06 19 2008 11 07 Close Memory 100 The Paper Type Size Settings screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 25 Copy paper originals 2 4 Touch the button for the tray 3 and then touch Custom Size under Paper Size Job List elect paper type and size for each Tray lity gt System Settings gt Paper Type Size
244. being typed in In addition the size can be changed 7 2 6 Specifying a paper type for bypass tray If paper other than plain paper such as OHP transparencies or special paper is loaded in bypass tray be sure to change the paper type setting 1 In the Basic screen touch Paper Ready to copy Copies Check Job aa original Setting original Type Application _ Density Duplexs Background Combine Density i Auto i a Background Auto Paper r Removal ce Sele eG OHeG000 1 1 Hane Status 4 Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF i PA m Finishing Job Details 7 02 02 2008 10 10 __ a 100 The Paper screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 19 Copy paper originals Touch the button for the bypass tray If a setting for special paper is selected the bypass is not selected automatically with the Auto Paper setting The auto tray switch feature applies only to paper trays specified with the same paper type setting Touch Change Tray Settings Select the appropriate setting for the type of special paper that is loaded Touch the button for the desired paper type Job List Ready to copy Change Tray Settings gt Bypass Copies 2 A4 D 100 0 Special Paper Thin Paper Check Details colored Paper Trace Transparency Thick Paper Letterhead
245. ber indicates the number of the 12 screens that is currently displayed To display the previous screen touch ij To display the next screen touch WI Press the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item in the Function Map screen To display the Help screen for Function that contains the selected item touch Close in the Help screen displayed by selecting an item in a Function Map screen To quit the Help mode press the Help key or touch Exit 4 24 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 4 7 2 Displaying main help screens As an example the following procedures describe the Help screens that are displayed for copy operations by using Function 1 With the Basic screen displayed press the Help key The Help Menu screen appears 2 Touch Function or press the 1 key in the keypad Help O Job list Help Menu Bookmark ar 1 Function 4 2 Bey EA 3 Function Map 4 Other Functions A 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 w s eee d 7 Replace Consumables j The Help screen for Function appears Is there more information about the buttons of the Help screens gt Refer to Overview of help screens on page 4 22 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 25 4 Additional copy operations 3 Touch Copy or Open or press the 1 key in the keypad Job list Select a function using the keypad
246. book destinations group destinations program destina tions and titles text can be printed to be checked For details refer to the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations Maximum Number of User Boxes Specify the maximum number of user boxes for each user For details refer to the User manual Box Operations 12 32 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 4 4 User Authentication Account Track General Settings Description Default Setting Specify user authentication and account track settings in order to control the use of this machine User Authentication Select either External Server Authentication or ON MFP as the user authenti cation method To quit user authentication select OFF Public User Access Select whether or not the machine can be used by an unauthenticated user This cannot be selected if User Authentication is set to OFF The machine can be used without authentication if ON Without Login is touched when logging on as a public user When logging on as an authorized user the Ac cess key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen Account Track Select whether or not account tracking is used to control the machine Account Track Input Method To authenticate using an account name and password touch Account Name amp Password To authenticate using only a password touch Password Only No set ting can be selec
247. can be prevented when scanning or faxing a document saved in a box Depending on the function limitation settings that are specified a different Basic screen may appear when logging on The Basic screen that appears changes in the following order Copy gt Scan gt Fax gt Box f no operation is permitted user authentication cannot be performed 21 Touch OK The function permissions are set 22 Touch Forward ES and then touch Icon Select the icon to be displayed on the User List 03 01 2010 10 19 Memory 90 The Select Icon screen appears 23 Select an icon to display in the user list and then touch OK The icon is set 24 Touch OK To cancel the settings in the current screen touch Cancel To delete the selected user information touch Delete in the User Registration screen bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 77 Utility mode 12 9 5 User Counter The following data for each user can be checked Copy Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy and print operations Total Total number of printed pages Max Allowance Limits specified during user registration for the number of pages Large Size Total number of pages printed on large sized paper Copy This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy operations e Total Total number of copied pages Large Size Total number of pages copied on l
248. can be specified manually Specify the paper size according to the corresponding procedure depending on the desired copy settings As the factory default Auto is selected amp Note fa setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray that tray is not selected automatically with the Auto Paper setting However a paper tray set to Single Side Only is given priority to be selected with single sided printing Be sure to specify a paper setting when special paper is loaded into a paper tray For details refer to Specifying a paper type for bypass tray on page 7 19 If the Auto Paper Select was selected at the Auto Zoom setting the Zoom screen appears Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio The Auto Paper setting cannot be combined with the Auto Zoom setting For details on specifying the priority of paper trays refer to Specifying user settings on page 12 17 Automatically selecting the paper size Auto paper setting The size of the loaded original is detected and copies are produced using paper of the same size If the Full Size Zoom setting was specified paper of the same size as the original is selected If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased a paper size that corresponds to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected 1 In the Basic screen touch Paper Job Details 4 The Paper screen appears 3 36 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operati
249. ccess key Status User Name 4 User01 Password Job Details 2 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Type in the password and then touch OK Use the keyboard or keypad to type in the password Press C to erase the entered password User Authentication gt Enter Password KSR Status Delete Job Details FNS Enlarge 27 gt ON Memory Shift ee a Touch Login or press the Access key The Basic screen appears If account track settings have been applied the account track screen appears However if Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track has been set to Synchronize the account track screen does not appear if the users and accounts are synchronized Make copies using the desired copy settings 2 40 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 Z When you are finished printing press the Access key A message appears requesting confirmation to log off A Are you sure you want to log out User Name User01 Hane Status Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 OK Memory 100 8 Touch Yes and then touch OK The user authentication screen appears Q Detail For details on specifying user authentication settings refer to User Authentication Account Track on page 12 33 It is possible to specify so that the logging off confirmation screen does not appear For details refer to User A
250. ceassescdasncatancancovasnacancacainegsanstennaesavavslcetesaetaaueaeaceteaeetataaseazanees 2 36 2 3 9 Automatically turning the machine on off Weekly Timer cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeee 2 36 2 3 10 Controlling each user s use of this machine User Authentication ccecceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 38 2 3 11 Controlling each account s use of this machine Account Track cccsscceessseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeteneees 2 42 2 3 12 Controlling use of this machine with Authentication Unit Biometric Type eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 2 45 2 3 13 Controlling use of this machine with the Authentication Unit IC Card Type n se 2 47 2 4 Loading paper into the tray 1 Or 2 ccsccicce seeds ob cece cecces scenes cecebe nce cetececcecediseecisieccedscusiecucbctececeeescadees 2 50 2 5 Loading paper into the tray 3 Or 4 ces eiscesecesce cee siees cxecteusecet ect cece vec ecdscndiae ceteddedasvecteatedecseaucceevsszceubcs 2 51 2 6 Loading paper into the LCT LU 405 LU 406 ccssccsseeesseeeesseeeeseeeeeneneeenseeeensneesnsneeesseeeesenes 2 52 2 7 Loading paper into the bypass tray cccsssseececeessseeeeeessseeeeeeeesseeneeeeesseneaeeesensenaeeeeeseenaeeeeeesanes 2 55 2 8 Loading paper of a different size into Paper trayS ccssseccceseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeessneeneeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeanes 2 59 2 8 1 Changing the size of paper that is loaded 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeaeeese
251. cel changes to the settings touch Cancel Job List Ready to copy copies Application gt Registered Overlay gt Original Size Se ecE2er 100 0 Check Details 25 08 2008 09 45 Memory 100 Touch OK and then touch Close Set the original with the overlay image GHEE you wish to register Application gt Stamp Composition gt Registered Overlay auro Paper 100 07 Register Overlay Image Pages All Pages 1st Page Only Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Specify any other desired copy settings Press the Start key 8 84 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 11 The original is scanned then saved as a registered overlay Please wait Image Data will be saved in the HDD Image Name overlay1 Register Overlay Running 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 amp Note With the Restrict User Access parameter in Administrator mode changes to a registered overlay without administrator permission can be prevented 8 15 8 Using a registered overlay Registered Overlay function 1 Position the original for overlay 2 Touch Application and then touch Stamp Composition Job list
252. ch Application and then touch Stamp Composition To cancel all settings for the Application functions press the Reset key Job List Sereceore 100 0 Ready to copy Basic Ri Sheet Covers Chapter Insert 4 O Page Margin 10 10 100 02 02 2008 Memory The Stamp Composition screen appears Touch Stamp Repeat original sett Neg Pos Reverse Stamp Compos ition 4 Save in User Box 4 Copies ing Original Type z Book Copy Repeat A moo N Image Adjust 4 Booklet E 5 Job List A4 D 100 0 Ready to copy Application gt Stamp Composition Copies Date Time Copy Protect A Registered Overlay Watermark A Header Footer 4 Stamp Page Number Overlay E Distribution Control Number 4 Stamp Repeat A 09 44 90 02 26 2010 Memory The Stamp Repeat screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 73 Application functions Select the desired type of repeating stamp To cancel the Stamp Repeat function touch No ag Touch Registered Stamp or Preset Stamp to display a screen containing buttons for the available stamps Touch the button for the desired stamp and then touch OK Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp For details on registering stamps refer to the
253. changed or the job can be printed or deleted Check Job Set button The settings for a job in the Current Jobs list can be checked For details refer to Checking job set tings on page 11 10 Deleted Jobs button Finished Jobs button All Jobs button displayed on the Job History list of the Print tab Touch to select the type of jobs displayed in the Job List screen Change the display mode by touching the appropriate button Detail button Touch to display screens for checking the status results error details user name queued time completed time number of original pages and number of copies for jobs in the Current Jobs and Job History lists For details refer to Checking job details on page 11 10 EH and E buttons When there are more jobs than the seven that can be displayed at one time touch these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list higher or lower in the printing order Close button Touch to quit Job List mode and returns to the screen that was displayed before Job List was touched 1 Displayed when the Current Jobs list is displayed bizhub 751 601 Version 2 11 Managing jobs The following information is listed in the Print tab Item Name Description No Job identification number assigned when the job is queued User Name Displays the type Source of the job COPY is displayed for copy jobs Status Current Job
254. changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled Job List Copies Ready to copy Basic J original Setting Original Type Peeigcbere 100 02 ij Za Sheet covers Chapter Insert Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat A O Check Details A Page Margi n Ml A Inage Adjust O s8 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Stamp Compos ition 4 J Booklet t Save in User Box Z The Stamp Composition screen appears Touch Distribution Control Number Job List Ready to copy Application gt Stamp Composition A4 D 100 0 Date Time Copy Protect Registered Overlay gE Watermark 4 Check Details Page Number Stamp Repeat Header Footer Stamp A a Over lay Distribution Control Number 4 02 26 2010 09 44 Memory 90 The Distribution Control Number screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 89 Application functions Using the keypad type in the starting distribution control number for printing To cancel the Distribution Control Number function touch No Select the desired setting under Pages To print the distribution control number only on the first page touch 1st Page Only The distribution control number will not be printed on blank pages inserted using Cove
255. ches For details refer to Scanning the original in separate batches Separate Scan setting on page 3 11 vY Ifthe original is not loaded correctly it may not be fed in straight or an original misfeed or damage to the original may occur 1 Slide the adjustable lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the largest page The possible combinations of original sizes differ depending on the widest original loaded position of the adjustable lateral guides For details on the mixed original sizes that can be loaded in the ADF refer to Originals that can be loaded into the ADF on page 7 31 amp Align the originals as the references so that the side to be scanned faces up Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original Load the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the back or the left side of the machine bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 21 Basic copy operations In the Basic screen touch Original Setting Ready to Check Job Density Background Hane Status Density Auto Background Removal oiolololota mim Finishing Job Details a 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 copy Original Setting original Type Application amp a N ice a Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF
256. ck To display the next screen touch Forward EJ 5 Check the copy settings registered with the selected copy program 6 Touch Close Check Job Settings Basic 1 4 ors Bsee rdina Paper Zoon Bomb ation may o Nay Background Auto Oval ri 1971 doooomooeng Copies Finishing Output Tray Group 1 Tray 1 The Recall Copy Program screen appears again 7 Again touch the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled If OK is touched with no copy program selected the Basic screen appears again without a copy program being recalled 8 Touch OK The programmed copy settings are recalled and the Basic screen appears again 9 Press the Start key Copying begins with the recalled copy settings amp Note To stop recalling a copy program press the Reset key or the Mode Memory key or touch Cancel bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 21 Additional copy operations 4 7 Displaying function descriptions Help Descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be viewed There are two methods for displaying the Help screens Main Help screens from the Basic screen Help screens for settings from screens other than the Basic screen 4 7 1 Overview of help screens The following items are provided in the Help Menu screen Help Menu screen 1st level J list Help Menu Bookmark U
257. ck Details Registered Overlay Header Footer BaREF ST Nanber 4 Z The Overlay screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 79 Application functions 4 Select the desired settings for Pages To print the overlay image only on the first copied page touch 1st Page Only under Pages Touch Close Specify any other desired copy settings Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies O NOA Press the Start key Q Detail f you cannot save a job with an overlay specified in a user box select Utility Counter User Settings Copier Settings Separate Scan Output Method and set to Page Print For details refer to Custom Display Settings on page 12 19 8 80 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 15 7 1 2 Position the original to be stored as overlaying image Touch Application and then touch Stamp Composition Saving a scanned image as a registered overlay Registered Overlay function 8 Job List Ready to copy Basic foriginal Setting geY2o8aPer 100 0 Bj z Sheet Covers Chapter Insert O Page Margin Ge A Neg Pos Reverse A Image Adjust Stamp Composition Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Copies original Type Book Copy Repeat J Booklet fe A Save in User Box 4
258. connect the authentication unit If the authentication unit is connected to the computer continue with step 4 When the machine is turned off then on again with the main power switch wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable otherwise the cable may be damaged 2 Turnon the machine with the main power switch 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer installed with Data Administrator Do not connect other USB devices to the same port where the authentication unit is connected If enough USB power is not provided Authentication unit IC Card Type may not operate correctly When using a USB hub be sure to use a self powered USB hub that can provide 500 mA or more After connecting the authentication unit wait at least 5 seconds before operating it Ifthe data have already been read out proceed to 7 4 Find this device in the window then double click it KONICA MINOLTA PageScope Data Administrator TOP TOX t3 Eile Function Tool Window Help 3 Registration of Device Network Initial Setting Basic Settings Settings for multiple device Application initial setting Number of Displayed Device list Function Selection State Status Group Registered Model i E Authentication Sett Display name F ae
259. copy Copies Check Details 22 08 2008 14 01 100 To cancel the Punch setting touch None A Punch setting cannot be used together with the Face Up setting 3 Touch Position Setting Au se wist Ready to copy Copies ecte 100 0 Position Setting output Tray 22 08 2008 14 10 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 75 3 Basic copy operations Select the punched hole position and then touch OK i Specify the position in relation to the Copies l Hoi document orientation Finishing gt Position Setting Punch Top Punch Punch Right 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch Auto to automatically determine the position of the punched holes according to the orientation of t
260. creen For details refer to the User manual Net work Scan Fax Network Fax Operations Receive button Touch to display the Receive tab of the Job List screen For details refer to the User manual Net work Scan Fax Network Fax Operations Store button Touch to display the Store tab of the Job List screen For details refer to the User manual Box Operations A selected button indi cates which job list is currently displayed Current Jobs button Job History button Touch to switch from the Job History list to the Current Jobs list This lists the jobs that are cur rently being performed and the jobs that are queued waiting to be performed Touch to switch from the Current Jobs list to the Job History list This list the jobs that have been performed Delete button A job can be deleted from the Current Jobs list For details refer to Deleting a job on page 11 8 Increase Priority button displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab The next job to be printed after the current job is finished can be changed For details refer to In creasing printing priority on page 11 17 The buttons that appear differ depending on the tab or list Current Jobs or Job History that is dis played Release Held Job button displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab Touch to display the list of stored jobs The set tings of a stored job can be
261. creen appears Copies Ready to copy Check Job AEA EAE fe SOS Original Setting Original Type Application Duplexs Combine Density Background Hane Status F P Density Z Auto ie Background Auto paper Removal Select f anorning 1 Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 XQ Note f the authentication unit IC card type cannot be usea it is possible to use this machine by entering a user name and password bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 49 2 Before making copies 2 4 Loading paper into the tray 1 or 2 To load paper tray 1 or 2 Pull out the tray 1 or 2 2 Raise the paper take up roller Load the paper into the tray Load the paper so that it is flush against the right side of the tray l Fully push in the paper tray Reminder Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the W mark Make sure that the trailing edge guide is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper f there is space between the trailing edge guide and the paper the paper will not be fed correctly Do not close the paper tray with too much force otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply an impact to the machine that may cause damage 2 50 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 2 5 Loading paper into the tray 3 or 4 To load paper tray 3 or 4 Pull out the tray 3 or
262. creen appears Touch 7 Expert Adjustment The Expert Adjustment screen appears Touch 5 Finisher Adjustment The Finisher Adjustment screen appears Touch 1 Center Staple Position The Center Staple Position screen appears Select a paper size and then use keys to specify the adjustment ministrator Settings gt Finisher Adjustment gt Center Staple Position Paper Size Adjust Value 12 8 12 7 step 0 1 Expert Adjustment Tl D tx D ES 06 19 2008 16 46 Memory 100 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted Ifthe paper size to be adjusted is not displayed touch E and EA until the desired paper size is displayed bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 45 12 Utility mode Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper Ifthe staple position is too far to the left of the center of the paper touch to increase the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 12 7 mm Each time or is touched the value is increased or decreased by one increment Ifthe staple position is too far to the right of the center of the paper touch to reduce the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 12 8 mm Touch OK To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key The stapling position is adjusted If the stapling
263. creen while a job is being performed gt Empty the hole punch scrap box To continue the job cancel punching cancer l Punching 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 lt Display in Enlarge Display mode gt Empty hole punch scrap box Detail When performed by user f the hole punch scrap box has become full while a job is being performed the job being performed is paused To continue the job without canceling the Punch setting empty the hole punch scrap box To cancel the Punch setting and continue the job touch Cancel Punching When performed by service representative f the hole punch scrap box has become full while a job is being performed the job being performed is paused To continue the job touch Cancel Punching However the continued job is printed without holes being punched bizhub 751 601 Version 2 9 19 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box 9 3 1 To empty the hole punch scrap box of the finisher Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole punch scrap box Open the front door Pull out the hole punch scrap box gt L Le Empty the hole punch scrap box Insert the hole punch scrap box into its original position C
264. ctly the paper size will not be correctly detected Do not close the paper tray with too much force otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply an impact to the machine that may cause damage 2 8 2 When 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 or A5 size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray If 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 or A5 size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray the bypass tray or the LCT the transport lever must be correctly set in order to prevent paper misfeeds To set the transport lever o ww Open the front doors left and right Turn lever M4 to the left and then pull out the ADU unit Set the transport lever to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5 Thick paper Return the ADU unit to its original position Close the front doors left and right Note After using 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 or A5 size thick paper be sure to reset the transport lever to NORMAL 2 60 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 Basic copy operations Basic copy operations 3 a 3 Basic copy operations 3 1 General copy operation This section contains information on the general operation for making copies The following procedure describes how to copy a single sided original using basic copy operations Dra Note The maximum loading capacity of the output trays for the optional finisher may be limited depending on the paper size and selected Finishing settings With continuo
265. cur Depending on the selected Finishing settings the paper path changes resulting in different locations in the Z folding unit where paper misfeeds may occur Open the machine s front door bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 39 5 Troubleshooting Raise guide lever FN1 and then remove any paper ee i Return guide lever FN1 to its original position Lower guide lever FN8 and guide lever FN2 of the finisher and Sheer o then remove any paper Grab handle FN2 and then pull out the Z folding transport unit Slowly pull out the Z folding transport unit as far as possible Lower guide lever FN3 and then remove any paper 5 40 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 Ifthe paper cannot be removed turn misfeed clearing dial FN4 to feed out the paper Lower guide lever FN6 and then remove any paper Raise guide lever FN7 and then remove any paper Ifthe paper cannot be removed turn misfeed clearing dial FN5 to feed out the paper Return guide lever FN6 to its original position bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 41 5 Troubleshooting 10 Retur
266. curity Mode Enhanced Security Mode cannot be set to ON Q Detail Certain conditions must be met in order for the enhanced security features to be applied For details contact your service representative The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set cannot be changed after Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON Required settings The following settings must first be specified in order to set Enhanced Security Mode to ON Administrator mode parameters Settings User Authentication Account Track General Settings Select ON External Server or ON MFP User Authentication System Connection Open API Settings SSL The button must be displayed Security Settings Administrator Password Specify a password that meets the password rules Security Settings HDD Settings HDD Lock Password Specify the hard disk locking password Otherwise install the optional security kit Security Settings Security Details Prohibited Functions Specify 5 minutes or longer When Authentication Error Release Time Settings Security Settings Flash Memory Lock Password Specify the flash memory locking password Q Detail If Account Track is set to ON in the General Settings screen set Account Track Input Method to Account Name amp Password SSL appears when a certificate is registered with PageScope Web Connection bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 87 Utility mode C
267. d Front Cover The front cover and separate copies of each page in the page spreads are printed in the original page order Front and Back Cover The front cover separate copies of each page in the page spreads and the back cover are printed in the original page order SURVEYOR S REPORT VY Place the original on the original glass Be sure to keep the ADF open throughout the scanning job Place the pages on the original glass starting with the first page For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 If Front and Back Cover was selected the front cover is scanned before the back cover and then all page spreads are scanned in order How are the front and back covers copied gt Scan the front cover then the back cover and then scan the remainder of the original Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 27 Application functions 3 Touch Application and then touch Book Copy Repeat To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled st Ready to copy Basic i Original Setting Original Type BEIBCEPer 100 0 ij F gbsspseoyerz Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat 4 Chapter Insert 4 O A Page Margin A Image Adjust A Booklet a S Stamp Compositio
268. d To cancel changes to the settings press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled AR Specify the message appearance time on panel AY Message Display Time O K bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 37 Additional copy operations Touch OK The Accessibility Setting screen appears again Touch Close or press the Accessibility key The Basic screen appears again 4 8 8 Setting the Sound Setting functions With the Sound Setting functions The sound level can be adjusted by selecting on from 16 levels provided for the sounds that are produced for example when a key is pressed Specified sound can also be muted in this setting For details see the table below As the factory default 8 is selected for all operation sounds Operation Confirmation Sound Sound ON OFF Settings All Sounds Select to turn on off all sounds in Sound Setting Operation Confirmation Select to turn on off all sounds in Operation Confirmation Sound Sound setting Successful Completion Select to turn on off all sounds in Successful Completion Sound Sound setting Completed Preparation Select to turn on off the Completed Preparation Sound set Sound ting Caution Sound Select to turn on off all sounds in Caution Sound setting Operation Confirmation Input Confirmation When pressing a key in the control panel or a button on the Sound Sound touch
269. d Press C to erase the entered the Administrator password Utility gt Administrator Settings 02 26 2010 10 11 GSS Bpiarse Memory 90 The Administrator Settings screen appears Administrator Settings v2 KETS E3 er ec 2 ASBATAS EEECS oo sd 3 Rosset ex E ro oro 02 26 2010 Memory 10 13 90 amp Note To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode press the Utility Counter key Otherwise exit the Utility mode by touching Close in each screen until the screen for the Copy Fax Scan or Box mode appears amp Reminder The default administrator password is 12345678 The administrator of this machine should change the administrator password Be sure to keep the administrator password in a safe place If the administrator password is lost it must be specitied by the service representative For details contact the service representative bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 43 Utility mode 12 5 Overview of weekly timer settings Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Setting screen can be combined A general procedure is described below VY Ifthe weekly timer has been set leave the machine plugged into the electrical outlet even if the machine has been turned off Y Press the Utility Counter key touch Administrator Settings then System Settings then Weekly Timer Setting and correctly specify t
270. d and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interface by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help A WARNING The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control gt Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations INTERFERENCE CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD ICES 003 ISSUE 4 For Canada Users This Class B digital appar
271. d number of copies N of f Press the Start key bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 49 8 Application functions 8 14 Erasing specified area of copies Erase When the original is scanned from the original glass black copy marks may be produced along borders and center line and also around punch holes Use this function to eliminate them from the copies and lower the toner consumption at the same time The following three settings are provided for the Erase function These are compatible with each other Setting Description Frame Erase This function erases black marks along the borders of printed sheets which tend to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book Use this function also for the original already having black marks along borders Refer to Erasing black marks along borders Erase function on page 8 51 Center Erase This function erases black marks along the center fold of printed sheets which tend to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book Use this function also for the original already having black marks along the center fold Refer to Erasing black marks along center fold Center Erase function on page 8 53 Non Image Area Erase This function detects the original size placed on the original glass and erases outside area of the original Refer to Erasing outside areas of the original Non Image Area Erase function o
272. d paper Special size settings If standard centimeter sized paper is being used in the tray 3 and 4 specify a setting for standard special sized paper The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for standard special sized paper loaded into the tray 3 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen touch 5 Paper Type Size Settings For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen refer to To display the paper tray setting screen on page 7 21 For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4 refer to Loading paper into the bypass tray on page 2 55 se the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection lity gt System Settings gt Paper Tray Settings veiw menre EM Auto Tray Switch ON OFF User Settings No Matching Paper an Tray Setting 4 System Settings N Print Lists 2 S Paper Type Size Settings 06 19 2008 11 07 Memory 100 The Paper Type Size Settings screen appears Touch the button for the tray 3 and then touch Special Size under Paper Size Job List elect paper type and size for each Tray lity gt System Settings gt Paper Type Size Settings Paper Tray Paper Type Settings Utility A4 D Paper User Settings 2 A4 D Paper Size system Settings Em Ex Paper Tray Settings 22 08 2008 15 05 Memory 100 7 24 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 7 3 Select the size of the paper to
273. d rules is considered a failed attempt during authentication For details on the password rules refer to Password Rules on page 12 85 When Overwrite Temporary Data is set to Mode 2 it cannot be changed to Mode 1 even if Enhanced Security Mode is ON For details on the changed network settings refer to the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations User operation limitations When Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON an icon appears in the screen and limitations are placed on the user for the following operations A public user cannot use this machine The list of users does not appear in the user authentication screen When user authentication has failed the specified number of times the control panel can no longer be operated If operation of the control panel is restricted touch Release and then select the items whose operation restrictions are canceled The destination cannot be changed by the user This machine s counter data cannot be retrieved by PageScope Net Care or PageScope VISUALCOUNT MASTER An application performing the write operation with SNMP v1 v2c cannot be connected Write users using SNMP v3 must be authenticated Note For details on the limitations placed on the user for box operations refer to the User manual Box Operations For details on the limitations placed on the user for printing refer to the User manual Print Operations For detail
274. d the lever on the staple cartridge holder to pull it up a YS I and then pull it downward and out to remove it A SSA 3 VOD CSMA O Ron e LA bizhub 751 601 Version 2 9 11 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box Push the portion of the staple cartridge holder indicated by PUSH to open the cover of the staple cartridge holder Remove the empty staple cartridge Load a new staple cartridge Remove the tape from the staple cartridge and then close the cover of the staple cartridge holder Do not remove the remaining staples otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced 9 12 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box 9 8 Install the staple cartridge holder Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted as far as possible 9 Return the stacker unit to its original position bizhub 751 601 Version 2 9 13 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box When returning the stacker unit to its original position do not grab any part other than handle FN7 otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched 10 Close the front door 9 14 bizhub 751 601 Version
275. dded at the end For details on stapling refer to Binding copies at the center Center Staple amp Fold setting on page 3 79 For an original that exceeds 100 pages refer to Scanning the original in separate batches Separate Scan setting on page 3 11 The width of the binding margin is automatically specified Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Touch Application and then touch Booklet To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled Job List Copies Sefece 100 0 To Page Margin Save in User Box 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 47 Application functions 3 Touch Left Bind or Right Bind If the original contains only pages in the landscape orientation they will be bound at the top regardless of which setting is selected To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key To cancel the Booklet function touch No wust Ready to copy conse Application gt Booklet Breer Per 64 7 gt tly sil 7 2 C ARED gt A a Right Bind 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To adjust the image position widthwise and lengthwise as desired touch Image Shift specify the shift amount then touc
276. de paper ASW B4W A4W aa 11 x 17W a 8 1 2 x 11W Custom sizes 210 mm x 279 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Maximum number of sheets that can be bound in the center 20 or more sheets 60 80 g m2 or 19 1 sheets 200 g m2 Capacity e 20 copies or less e 15 copies or less paper length 299 mm or less 1 In the Basic screen touch Finishing Check Job Ready to copy j Orisinal Setting original Tyre Del 4 Background rennet Density Auto Background packace Lojojojo ojala alate Auto Paper Select ly NG Finishing Separate Scan 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Application Copies Duplex Combine Auto Rotate OFF bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 79 3 Basic copy operations The Finishing screen appears 2 Touch Fold Bind Copies _toblist Ready to copy guyeckorer 100 0 Corner 2 Hole One 2 Position 4Hole Output Tray 22 08 2008 14 01 Memory 100 The Fold Bind screen appears 3 Touch Center Staple amp Fold Job List Select a Fold Bind ing gt Fold B
277. duct is designed manufactured and intended for general business use Do not use it for applications requiring high reliability and which may have an extreme impact on lives and property Applications requiring high reliability Chemical plant management medical equipment management and emergency communications management Use with other authentication devices is not guaranteed In order to incorporate improvements in the product the specifications concerning this product are subject to change without notice For safe use Warning Symbol e Do not this product near water otherwise it may be damaged e Do not cut damage modify or forcefully bend the USB cable A malfunction may occur as a result of a damaged or cut USB cable e Do not disassembly this device otherwise it may be damaged OO 2 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 3 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 Regulation notices USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES For U S A Users FCC part 15 FCC Declaration of Conformity Product Type Authentication unit Biometric type Product Name AU 101 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference and this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE This equipment has been teste
278. duction of this unit conform to FCC regulations and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control gt Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations INTERFERENCE CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD ICES 003 ISSUE 4 For Canada Users This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada 14 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 1 4 14 2 14 2 1 Using Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 is an IC card authentication system that performs user authentication by IC cards Log on to this machine and print job operation can be authenticated with IC cards when using this machine with user authentication settings specified In order to use the authentication unit user IC card IDs must first be registered with the machine A registered user can log on to this machine or print a print job after completing authentication with their IC card IDs The following procedures describe how to specify the necessary settings on the machine register users and perform the logon and print job operations after completing authentication XQ Reminder Do not disconnect the USB cable while the authentication unit is being used otherwise the s
279. e scccecsescsccecrvs scsccceees pis cce persed cece nensne anavai aada aiaa daaa aaraa aaa Sada iaaiiai 12 8 12 2 1 Greate One Touch Destinations ccciscceegeccetenecan shane igeceecneeseegeoctehanacusenenant cuca eeevevascedeetivaliiceesteneteeese 12 8 12 2 2 Greate USer BOX EERE T seta easee eid aa tena aden miei tds sce pie tact ian EE 12 8 12 2 3 Limiting Access t Destinations T chek scade a e reaa aaa aae coed dundgasbdbauiateeeeeiee 12 8 12 2 4 Displaying the destination registration SCIrEON cccccceeececeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeess 12 16 12 3 Specifying User SCtUINGS sea 2 cc ca2 sccesnsecnccedetacen ccc cgeeneececscuseumecesdencaecadeansausecesdeictnaectresssccadeceetnaccece 12 17 12 3 1 DYSTOM SOINGS vcissercansciesedibedensscd cessed ca es epaencdvnanageashbadensuc dasaedeaieneeavalesineccsadsoadenssaiaataesseanceaedcasaciis 12 17 12 3 2 Custom Display Settings ccnivenwetiin n a nen N a 12 19 12 3 3 Copier Settings m senare aaa ra ar Aaa raa a a Era aE Tea EE E ara aAA REAT A 12 21 12 3 4 SCa n FaX Settings riain ra a aa en a 12 23 12 3 5 PRINTER EAO ER E E E A E A A A E T E EE E ES 12 23 12 3 6 Change PassWord sriain ant an aadi A a a Aa a a a a 12 23 12 3 7 Change E Mail Address enti ara panana aaiae daceubad aea e aaa aaao Taa aa aa Enie 12 23 12 3 8 Toner SUPPLY svesessassszecassigcaucseaeasscenavstedacaoecatasetnanegiaddcessnansgeaetcenaacacavacnessaneeaaauscqasdicnaaagshoscdipacceaaasea 12 24
280. e Scan Auto Rotate OFF Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 When 1 to 1 authentication has been specified 1 Type in the user name After entering the User Name place your finger on the Authentication Unit Hane Status f Derete Job Details 02 26 20 Memory 2 Place your finger on the authentication unit biometric type 2 46 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 2 3 13 The basic screen appears Copies Ready to copy Check Job Applica Densitys Duplexs Background Combine user T Hane Status mei a Auto DLJ Background Auto paper Removal Select 8 88MHH000 T B j a a Finishing a Separate Scan Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 amp Note f the authentication unit biometric type cannot be used it is possible to use this machine by entering a User name and Password Controlling use of this machine with the Authentication Unit IC Card Type An authentication unit IC card type can be used with this machine to perform authentication The authentication unit IC card type authenticates users by reading the information registered on their IC card XQ Note Card Authentication Authentication is performed simply by positioning the IC card Card Authentication Password Authentication is performed by positioning the IC card and entering the passw
281. e agreement InstallShield 14 14 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 13 Click Install i Plugin for IC Card Authentication Unit AU 201 Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard InstallShield pen Install O Cancel 14 Click Finish if Plugin for IC Card Authentication Unit AU 201 Setup Completed The wizard has successfully installed Plugin for IC Card Authentication Unit AU 201 Click Finish to exit the wizard Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is installed and the setup is completed bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 15 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 Registering users amp Reminder In order to register users with Data Administrator the authentication unit must be connected to the USB port of the computer and the computer and machine must be connected over a network Z USB oc D Network lt J o o This machine Computer Authentication unit 1 If the authentication unit is connected to this machine turn off the machine with the main power switch and then dis
282. e button for the desired setting Whether or not a user name list button appears is set 12 72 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 12 9 2 Default Function Permission If external server authentication was selected limitations can be placed on the machine functions that can be used by an authorized user The default setting is Allow The following operations can be limited 7 Copy operations Scan operations Fax operations Printing from a printer Saving documents on the hard disk Printing the transmitted document Saving the document to the external memory Manual destination input XQ Note To limit machine use by registered users specify settings in the User Registration screen With Print Scan Fax TX printing can be prevented when scanning or faxing a document saved in a box Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 Touch 4 User Authentication Account Track The User Authentication Account Track screen appears Touch 2 User Authentication Settings The User Authentication Setting screen appears Why is 2 User Authentication Settings not available gt 2 User Authentication Settings is not available if User Authentication on the General Settings screen is set to OFF Touch 1 Administrative Settings Touch Default Function Perm
283. e hole punch scrap box See p 9 18 Trouble Possible cause Remedy Authenti cation Unit Bio metric Type The USB cable is connect ed between the authenti cation unit and the machine but the status in dicator is not lit in green The USB port of the machine may be malfunctioning Turn the machine off with the main power switch and temporarily dis connect the USB cable from the authentication unit or the machine before connecting it again and waiting 10 seconds before turning on the machine with the main pow er switch The USB cable is connect ed between the authenti cation unit and the computer but the status indicator is not lit in green The USB port of the computer may be malfunctioning Restart the computer Is the authentication unit correctly installed Refer to Registering from Data Administrator and check if the driver is correctly installed on the computer p 13 9 A tone does not sound from the machine when scanning begins and when authentication is complet ed Has the tone setting on the ma chine been set to OFF Refer to Registering users and set the tone setting to ON p 13 15 The message Failed to register appears ona machine where registra tion failed Logon failed The message Failed to Authenticate appears on the machine With the authentication unit the scanning time is limited for each scan This message
284. e making copies Finisher FS 524 No Part name Description 1 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge 2 Main finishing tray Tray 2 Collects printed pages 3 Sub finishing tray Tray 1 Collects printed pages 4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 6 Misfeed clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 8 Stacker unit Removed when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge 9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replac ing the staple cartridge 10 Handle FN7 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit 11 Misfeed clearing dial FN6 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 12 Guide lever FN5 Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds No Part name Description 13 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Fin isher FS 524 14 Hole punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies Finisher FS 525 Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505
285. e making copies 2 Q Detail The length of time until the machine enters Low Power mode can be changed For details refer to System Settings on page 12 17 and page 12 26 2 3 7 Automatically conserving energy Sleep mode If no operation is performed for a specified length of time the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled to begin printing again therefore taking more preparation time than Low Power mode As the factory default the machine enters Sleep mode after 60 minutes To recover from Sleep mode Press the Power Save key Power Save oS O 2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up The touch panel comes on again and after the machine has finished warming up it is ready to begin printing Note The Sleep mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch panel Q Detail As a default the machine enters Low Power mode if no operation is performed for 15 minutes and then the machine enters Sleep mode after 60 minutes have elapsed The length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode can be changed For details refer to System Settings on page 12 17 and System Settings on page 12 26 Specify whether to bring the machine to the same condition as mains power of
286. eaaees 7 25 7 3 5 To select a setting for oversized paper ceceecceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeaaeeseseenaaeeeeesenaees 7 27 7 3 6 Specityi g a Paper TYPC saccade wish anea oa N a a aaea aa E 7 29 7 4 aaaea E E E E L A 7 31 7 4 1 Originals that can be loaded into the ADF esccesssceeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseaeeeeesneeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeneeeenaeees 7 31 7 4 2 Precautions for loading originals into the ADF esseeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeesaeeeeeeeeeee 7 32 7 4 3 Originals that can be loaded on the original Glass 02 eeeeseeeeeneeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeeeeeesaeees 7 33 Contents 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 14 1 8 14 2 8 14 3 8 15 8 15 1 8 15 2 8 15 3 8 15 4 8 15 5 8 15 6 8 15 7 8 15 8 8 15 9 8 15 10 8 15 11 8 16 9 1 9 1 1 9 2 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 3 9 3 1 9 3 2 10 1 10 1 1 10 1 2 10 1 3 10 1 4 10 1 5 Inserting paper between OHP transparencies OHP Interleave function ccsssseeeeeeees 8 3 Adding cover pages Cover Sheet fUNCtION 2 cccsseeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeessneeeeeeessenneeseeseseeeaneees 8 6 Inserting different paper into copies Insert Sheet function eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 10 Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page Insert Image TUNnCti ON ii522e08 2 cece cece hese eee
287. ecessesesesseecsscnaaasaeeeeeseneeeenss 12 49 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment ecteeeeeee cence eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeaeeeeesenaaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeetes 12 51 Punch Horizontal Position ACjUStMEN 2 cccccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeees 12 53 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment ccceccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 12 55 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment ccesesceesereeeseeeeeeeneesesceeeeseneneneneeseeeeeseseeeseseesseseeeeeneeeeees 12 56 1st Z Fold Position Adjustment 2nd Z Fold Position Adjustment cccceeeseeteeeeeeteeteeeeeeees 12 58 Tri Fold Position AdjUStMetesiessssescscctepecichapiedshadveodd socetacd sx ds sea caneadbes Midd e aaa o a e Eaa 12 60 2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment ceeceeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeesenaeeeeeteesaneees 12 62 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment ee eeeeeesceeceseeeeeseeeeeseeenesceeesenenesenseseeeeeseseeeseseeeseseeenseeeeeees 12 63 Header Footer Setuings cscciicccei shin ceccescciccececcsetcceccad evcccpeeeccbicdeneecdvscusecceavenveencdeesescdeicusarteeccteeeczee 12 64 Specitying Neaders fOOters iian i ai rA A A NA 12 64 Editing headers f00tor Skannerid sien tandana naea aaae Aa Eaa aa aAa aea Daea aa aae E aa Ta aia Aa 12 66 Authentication Method drae maera aaa arae naain aa aaaea each i aaa AO na aa da aaa aa ada andae a kank
288. ecified paper is inserted for the 3rd sheet of the copy Blank sT 1 8 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 Q Detail The specified paper can be inserted at a maximum of 60 locations within an original of up to 999 pages In double sided originals one double sided page is considered to be two pages one for the front and one for the back XQ Note f the optional post inserter is installed paper can be inserted from the post inserter 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Foran original that exceeds 100 pages refer to Scanning the original in separate batches Separate Scan setting on page 3 11 2 Load the paper to be used for the insertions sheets and the main body of the original into the desired paper trays Use paper with the same size for the insertion sheets and for the main body of the original and load them in the same orientation To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled 3 Touch Application and then touch Sheet Cover Chapter Insert For details on using thick paper for the insertion sheets and on loading the paper refer to Paper weight on page 7 3 and Loading paper into the bypass tray on page 2 55 To cancel the setting and select the default press the
289. ect pages to rotate 4 i View Finishing Change Setting delete View Pages o E Press the Start key Start printing Q Detail When originals are scanned using the Program Jobs function the finishing image can be previewed after all the originals are scanned and Finish is touched For details on the Program Jobs function refer to Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together Program Jobs function on page 8 27 When originals are scanned with the insert pages specified the finishing image can be previewed both after the originals are scanned first and after the insert pages are scanned For details on the insert pages refer to Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page Insert Image function on page 8 14 When the Book Copy function or Booklet function is specified the finishing status cannot be checked Print and check the finishing bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 4 4 Interrupting a copy job Interrupt mode The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so an original can be copied with different copy settings This is convenient for quickly making a copy Q Detail For details on making a copy after printing of the current job is finished refer to Increasing printing priority on page 11 17 Position the original to be copied For details on loading the original refer to Loading the o
290. ecting a combined Copy Setting csseeccceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneneeeeeeesenenaeeseeseeeaeeeeneseeanenenss 3 55 3 8 1 Copying multiple original pages onto a single page Combined copy settings eee 3 57 3 9 Selecting the quality of the original ccsssseeeeeeeeseeeneeeesesneneeeesseeeeeeeeessneeeeeeesenneeeeessneeneeeess 3 59 3 9 1 Loading originals with small print or photos Original Type SettiNGS eeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeee 3 59 3 9 2 Fo select an original typ e Setting iseni snra eni apdare aaraa aaa a aaea a aa e ea aaa aa eaaa 3 60 3 10 Selecting the density settings s ssssssunnnrerennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 3 61 3 10 1 Adjusting the print density Density settings 0 0 eeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeesneeeesaeeeeeeeseeeneeeeaaes 3 62 3 10 2 Adjusting the background density Background removal settings csccceeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeee 3 63 3 11 Selecting finishing SettingS ecccssseeceeeesseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeessneneeesensneeeeeseenseneaeeeesseneaeesenseneaenenss 3 64 3 11 1 Separating copies by sets Sort Setting c cccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseneaaeeeesesaeeeeeeseeneeeseesaaees 3 66 3 11 2 Separating copies by pages Group Setting eeeeceeeeeessneeeeeneeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeessneeessaeeeeeeaeeesaeees 3 67 3 11 3 Selecting the Output Trays ech svat aeai aana oaea a
291. ed Press View Finishing again to cancel the finishing view of the preview image COPY PrintWait A Page Rotation Rotate current page Select page s to rotate 4 Change Setti ng View Pages bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations Change Setting In Change Setting settings for the original to be scanned next can be changed The following settings can be changed for the next set of scanned Margin Ple punch position will be applied to all igi el to cancel the changes Job No 8 Change Setting Preview Application Hane Status copy Printhait Frame Erase Center Erase A Binding Position A Original Size 4 Margin Position oO i 1 Delete Type na Job Details 03 01 2010 09 52 Cancel JA ok _ Memory 90 amp Note For details on the setting method refer to the appropriate description section Touching Preview in the left pane displays the preview image The settings displayed in the preview image are limited to those apply to all original pages bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 3 2 Checking the advanced preview In Preview finishing image of copies can be checked before printing 1 2 Place the original on the original glass or load the original into the ADF Select the desired copy settings 3 Press the Proof Copy key The Select Proof Copy Method screen appears Proof Copy A
292. ed by one increment 8 Touch OK The distance between the staples is adjusted If no adjustment of the distance between the staples was necessary in step 7 this completes the procedure 9O Use the 2 Position Staple setting to print another sample copy 12 62 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 10 Check the print result Check that the distance between the staples was adjusted If more adjustment is necessary repeat steps 6 through 10 12 6 11 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment The sensors for detecting the size of paper loaded in the paper trays of the optional post inserter can be adjusted amp eee Note Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment appears only if optional post inserter is installed 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 1 System Settings The System Settings screen appears 3 Touch 7 Expert Adjustment The Expert Adjustment screen appears 4 Touch 5 Finisher Adjustment The Finisher Adjustment screen appears 5 Touch Forward ES and then touch 2 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment The Post Inserter Tray Size Adj screen appears Please set A4 to the Post Inserter feeder Press Start to begin the adjustment Administrator Settings gt Finisher Adjustment gt Post Inserter Tray Size Adj Util
293. eds 5 2 12 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit 11 amp eee Note For details of the locations of paper misfeed s refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Open the right front door and the left front door Turn dial M9 and M10 to feed out the paper Remove all paper from the outlet Ifthe finisher shift tray or Z folding unit is installed clear paper misfeeds from each unit bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 21 5 Troubleshooting Lower lever M4 and then pull out the ADU unit j o Lower lever M5 Open covers M6 and M8 Turn dial M7 and then remove any paper Raise the lever for cover M6 and then close cover M6 Return the ADU unit to its original position Return lever M4 to its original position and then close the right front door and the left front door 5 22 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 A WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine gt In order to reduce the risk of electric shock do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds A CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot gt In order to reduce the risk o
294. eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeneetenaeees 3 19 3 4 2 Copying originals of mixed sizes Mixed Original Setting ceeeceeesseeeeseeeseneeeeeneeeeseneeeennees 3 21 3 4 3 Loading folded Z folded Originals c cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeieeeeeeseeaee 3 23 3 4 4 Loading tab paper Tab original settings ccccccccceeeeececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesecaaeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeees 3 24 3 4 5 Selecting the original orientation Original Direction settings ce eeeeeseeeeesneeeeeneeeeseeeeeeneeeeeaees 3 26 3 4 6 To select an original direction Setting ccccesceceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeetecaaeeeeeseaaeeeeeeseaaeeeeseeieeeeeseeenaees 3 27 3 4 7 Selecting the position of the binding margin Binding Position settings eeeeeeseeeeseeeeeees 3 29 3 4 8 To select a binding POSITION SETLING eee cess eeeneeeeeeneeteeneeeeeaeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeesaneeeeaeeeesaeeseeneeeesaes 3 4 9 Changing scan settings for each original 3 5 Selecting a paper Setting essssseeee 3 5 1 Automatically selecting the paper size Auto paper Setting ccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeteeees 3 36 3 5 2 Manually selecting the desired Paper size 0 0 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeueeeeeeseeeeeeeeaee 3 38 3 6 Specifying a ZOOM Setting 22 222 weecccs esses se cecte detec eaaa aM ee cae eee ee ee cee et neve renee 3 39 3 6
295. eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeesseneeeeeeensseeaeeeeseseneneneess 7 9 7 2 1 Automatically detecting the paper size Auto Detect Setting ceeeseeeeseeeeeneeteeneeeeseeeeeneeeesaees 7 9 7 2 2 Selecting a paper size setting Size setting snnsessssnnesesrnnnssrrnntresrttnnterrnnnnsstennnnnennennnnennnnn nen 7 10 7 2 3 Specifying a non standard paper size Custom size settings cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 7 12 7 2 4 Storing a non standard paper size Custom size SettiNGS ccceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeneeeees 7 14 7 2 5 Selecting a setting for oversized paper Wide paper settings ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeneeees 7 17 7 2 6 Specifying a paper type for DyPaSS tray eeeeeeeseeeeseneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaaeeseaeeeeneaeeeseaeeenaeees 7 19 7 3 Paper type Setting for a tray cccseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesneneeeeeessnneaeeeeeseneeeeeeeesseeeeeseessnaeaeeeesseenaeeeeeeas 7 21 7 3 1 To display the paper tray setting screen eceesceeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesesaaeeseteseaaeeeeeesinaees 7 21 7 3 2 To specify a standard size paper Standard Size 1 settings ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 7 23 7 3 3 To specify a setting for standard special sized paper Special size SettingS sscceeeeees 7 24 7 3 4 To specify a non standard paper size Custom size SettinGS cccccceecseeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeneeeeeee
296. eeees 2 59 2 8 2 When 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 or A5 size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray ccsccceesceeeeseeeeseteteseees 2 60 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Contents 1 3 1 General copy Operations i cc ccc a aa aaa seek atc ca ace sede ee Resets Senet indana Sadani 3 3 3 2 Operations that cannot be combined ccccsseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesenneeeeeessenneeeeeseeneaeeeesseeneneeenseeeeneeeeees 3 6 3 2 1 Operations where the setting specified last is given priority eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeees 3 6 3 2 2 Operations where the setting specified first is given POL ity eee eeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeee 3 8 3 3 Feeding the Original aaea eaaa arn raa daea aaaea L e era aera ea aaea e aa eaea aaeoa aaaea aaae aaa niaaa aaiae aa 3 9 3 3 1 Loading the original into the ADE re ei esi ene eiaeaen a aaa a a aaaea eea Eea eaaa Eataa 3 9 3 3 2 Placing the original on the original glass cecccsccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaaeeeeeesecaeeeeeeseecneeeeees 3 10 3 3 3 Scanning the original in separate batches Separate Scan Setting ccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 3 11 3 3 4 Scanning a multi page original from the original QlaSS ee eeesceeeeseeeeneeeeeeneeteneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 15 3 4 Specifying Original SettinGS s sirena aaraa aana amaaa ra ansaa deeded a aara aada rA riasan a asa aiaa 3 19 3 4 1 Specifying the original size Original Size settings 0
297. efer to page 8 63 For details on printing a copy protection stamp refer to page 8 66 For details on printing a repeating stamp refer to page 8 73 For details on printing an overlay refer to page 8 78 For details on printing a registered overlay refer to page 8 87 8 56 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions For details on printing a header footer refer to page 8 87 For details on printing a distribution control number refer to page 8 89 For details on printing a watermark refer to page 8 97 8 15 1 Printing the date time Date Time function 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Touch Application and then touch Stamp Composition To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled Job List Ready to copy Copies Basic Original Setting Original Type auyg gePer 100 0 ij i Sheeb cover Chapter Insert 4 Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat a Hi J Page Margin Image Adjust 4 Booklet a E el Stamp Composition A Save in User Box A Check Detai Nir 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Stamp Composition screen appears 3 Touch Date Time list Ready to copy copies Application gt Stamp Composition A4 D 100 0 d d Date Time A Page Nunber l Stamp H
298. election essibility Setting Touch Panel Adjustment Interval Time 2 Confirmation 2 Auto Reset Confirmation Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation The Key Repeat Start Interval Time screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 29 Additional copy operations 3 Touch and to specify the starting time and the interval for the key repeat feature A This is response interval of pressing key on LS LCD panel Enlarge Display mode only Key Repeat Start Interval Time Time To Start Interval To extend the time touch To reduce the time touch Both settings can be set between 0 1 and 3 0 seconds in 0 1 second increments To cancel changes to the settings press the Reset key 4 Touch OK The Accessibility Setting screen appears again 5 Touch Close or press the Accessibility key The Basic screen appears again amp Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy scanning and fax functions With the Enlarge Display mode text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily For details refer to the User manual Enlarge Display Operations As the factory default Time To Start is set to 0 8 second and Interval is set to 0 3 second 4 30 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 4 8 4 Setting the System
299. encies OHP Interleave function In order to prevent copies printed onto OHP transparencies from sticking together as a result of the heat that is produced during copying paper interleaves can be inserted between the transparencies The interleaf can be kept blank or copied from the same original as the transparency ABCD pee ABCD CD ABCD ABCD ABCD Hah ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 7 ABCD ABCD Y No Finishing setting can be used 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 For details on loading OHP transparencies refer to Paper weight on page 7 3 and Loading paper into the bypass tray on page 2 55 2 Load the OHP transparencies into the bypass tray and load the interleaf paper into the desired paper tray Use interleaf paper with the same size as the OHP transparencies 3 Select Transparency as the paper type for the bypass tray and then touch OK For details on specifying the paper type settings refer to Specifying a paper type for bypass tray on page 7 19 5 T Copies ob ist Ready to copy Paper Type Paper Size t mn ea SE omer Ea Thin Paper Letterhead Standard Size check Details 4 Colored Paper Custon Size 22 08 2008 11 33 Memory
300. entication parameters appear only if User Authentication on the General Settings screen is set to any setting other than OFF Save to External Memory appears if Save Document is set to ON displayed by touching User Box Settings on the System Settings screen then External Memory Function Settings f authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager User Registration does not appear Q Detail When user authentication is performed using an optional authentication unit by placing your finger or C card on the authentication unit jobs saved in the ID amp Print User Box can be printed Account Track Settings Parameter Description Account Track Registra Register the accounts using this machine In addition the password and number of tion prints allowed can be specified for each account Account Track Counter The copy print and scan fax use for each account can be checked x Note The account track parameters appear only if Account Track on the General Settings screen is set to ON f authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager Account Track Settings does not appear Print Without Authentication Description Default Setting Select whether or not printing is permitted without specifying a user or account If print Restrict ing is permitted prints are counted for public users Print Counter List Description Default Setting
301. ents Supplied from main unit Maximum power consump tion 100 W or less Dimensions 670 W x 639 D x 695 H mm Weight Approx 42 kg Configuration 1 paper tray Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga 8 x 13 Gy one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative bizhub 751 601 Version 2 6 5 Specifications Finisher FS 524 Item Description Name FS 524 Function Straight delivery sorted grouped Offset delivery sort and offset group and offset Staple delivery Output trays Main finishing tray Tray 1 sub finishing tray Tray 2 Offset width 30 mm Paper types Main finishing tray Tray 2 Sort group sort and offset group and offset Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m thick paper 91 g m to 200 g m thin paper 50 g m to 59 g m label sheets OHP transparencies trace paper tab paper special paper high quality paper user paper recycled paper colored paper letterhead Staple Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m recycled paper high quality paper user paper letterhead special paper thin paper thick paper colored paper Sub finishing tray Tray 1 Sort group Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m thick paper 91 g m to 200 g m thin paper 50 g m to 59 g m label sheets OHP transparencies trace paper tab paper Paper sizes Main finishing tray Tray 2 Sta
302. er of prints allowed can be specified for each account using this machine amp eee Note A total of 1 000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 4 User Authentication Account Track The User Authentication Account Track screen appears 3 Touch 3 Account Track Settings The Account Track Setting screen appears 4 Touch 1 Account Track Registration 5 Touch the button for the desired account and then touch Edit The Edit screen for the account appears If Account Name amp Password was selected Select the item to be registered changed Administrator Settings gt Account Track Registration gt Edit 4 utility Password Administrator Settings Account Track Setting Max Allowance Set Account Track Registration as amp e ree 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 12 80 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 If Account Name amp Password was selected the same account name cannot be used more than once If Password Only was selected Select the item to be registered changed dministrator Settings gt Account Track Registration gt Edit Utility 02 02 2008 10 10 Cancel OK Memory 100
303. er to page 3 50 For details on selecting the original image quality refer to page 3 59 For details on selecting a copy density setting refer to page 3 61 For details on specifying combined copy settings refer to page 3 55 For details on selecting Finishing settings refer to page 3 64 For details on selecting the Fold Bind settings refer to page 3 77 For details on specifying settings to not rotate the image refer to page 3 89 For details on specifying settings for the Application functions refer to page 8 3 4 Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies Brightness 23 User Box Fax Scan Copy Reset Ce we J 4 Power Save Access ABC DEF Interrupt Proof Co Cea oie a Accessibility GHI JKL 4 5A CD eee i 7 Help wt If the number of copies was incorrectly entered press the C clear key in the keypad and then specify the correct number of copies bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations Press the Start key To stop the copy operation being performed press the Stop key For details refer to page 3 91 The next copy operation can be queued while a copy operation is being performed For details refer to page 3 90 Start bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations
304. erations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may occur Depending on the selected Finishing settings the paper path changes resulting in different locations in the finisher where paper misfeeds may occur Open the machine s front door Lower guide lever FN2 and then remove any paper Return guide lever FN2 to its original position 5 34 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 Lower guide lever FN4 and then remove any paper j 46 ia ZY a 7 Aw Ifthe paper cannot be removed turn misfeed clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper Return guide lever FN4 to its original position Lower guide lever FN5 and then remove any paper Ifthe paper cannot be removed turn misfeed clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper a Return guide lever FN5 to its original position bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 35 5 Troubleshooting Grab handle FN6 and then pull out the stacker unit Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible Lower guide lever FN9 and then remove any paper J Open guide lever FN8 and then remove any paper Ifthe paper cannot be removed turn misfeed clearing dial FN7 to feed ou
305. erform the logon and print job operations after completing authentication amp Note Align the index finger with the indentation and notch in the scanner and then position the finger so that the tip lightly touches the edge of the scanner Place your thumb and middle finger down to hold the authentication unit in place on both sides and avoid moving the index finger being used for authentication Wa Reminder Do not place any object other than your finger in the scanner of the authentication unit while scanning otherwise the device may malfunction Do not disconnect the cable connecting the authentication unit to the computer while scanning otherwise the system may become unstable bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 5 1 3 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 13 2 1 Settings of this machine Q Detail User authentication on the machine must be set for machine authentication XQ Note This device does not support external server authentication To combine account track settings with user authentication settings set Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track to Synchronize When you set Do Not Synchronize the ID amp Print function cannot be used 1 From the control panel of the multifunctional product touch 4 User Authentication Account Track on the Administrator Settings screen and then touch 1 General Settings 2 Set User Authentication to ON MFP and then touch OK T
306. ersion 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 6 4 Slightly reducing the copy Minimal setting An original image can be printed slightly smaller 93 0 than the original size and centered in the copy Y The zoom ratio of the Minimal setting can be changed between 90 0 and 99 9 For details on changing the zoom ratio for the Minimal setting or programming custom zoom ratios refer to Storing the desired zoom ratio on page 3 48 1 In the Basic screen touch Zoom Ready to copy Copies Check Job i nal Setting Original Type Density 4 Duplex Background Combine Hane Status Density Auto Background Removal A oicioloololaiaimie i 7 sS Finishing 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Zoom screen appears 2 Touch Minimal ob tist _ Ready to copy Copies original setting Sefece 100 0 User Preset Zoom 400 0 Check Details 200 0 86 6 81 6 70 7 A3 B4 Baraga A3 AA A4 B5 Ba BS 50 0 22 08 2008 Memory 3 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 43 3 Basic copy operations 3 6 5 Selecting a preset zoom ratio Enlarge and reduce settings The most suitable zoom ratios for copying from common standard original sizes to standard paper sizes a
307. ersion 2 9 3 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box Display in Enlarge Display mode When the toner is about to run out appears on the screen Touch to display the following message Please prepare a spare toner cartridge When the toner is empty the screen shown below appears A WARNING Precaution for the empty toner cartridge If it is thrown into a fire the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation gt DO NOT THROW toner or the empty toner cartridge into a fire A CAUTION Precaution for storing and handling the toner cartridge If too much of toner is inhaled or toner gets in your eyes your health may be affected gt Vu Keep the toner cartridge away from children Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands If your hands become soiled with toner immediately wash them with soap and water If toner gets in your eyes immediately flush them with water and then seek professional medical attention bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box 9 9 1 1 To replace the toner cartridge vY Use the same number toner cartridge as described on the label applied on the upper left side of the to
308. eseneeees 4 16 4 5 1 Deleting a Copy program vawisie ceive eet ee ON SA ee el 4 19 4 6 Copying with programmed copy settings Mode Memory ccsssssseeeesseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeesseneeeeees 4 20 4 7 Displaying function descriptions Help ccsseccssseessseeessseeeensneeeeeeeeensneeenseeeseseeeeeseeeeeneenenees 4 22 4 7 1 Overview of help Sore EN Sa a aa Taa aea aa aa aa a aeaa aceon ad Eaa A AA araa a a a de E NEA A Eaa 4 22 4 7 2 Displaying main help Sore NS r a taana ar E rer aa eee hs eaaa A aeaa aeania aTi 4 25 4 8 Specifying control panel settings Accessibility mode ssssusnsensuunnnnnnnunnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 4 27 4 8 1 Displaying the accessibility setting SCrEON ccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeaeeeseesecieeeeeeeeaees 4 27 4 8 2 Setting the Touch Panel Adjustment fUNCTION eecceeseeeeeseeeeeneeteaeeeeeaaeeeeaneeseaeeeeeeneeeeeneeeneneees 4 27 4 8 3 Setting the Key Repeat Start Interval Time fUNCtIONS sssssseeesseesrressressrreerrrsrinnsinnnrinnernnnrennsrnnnne 4 29 4 8 4 Setting the System Auto Reset Confirmation fUNCtION ssseessssesressresrreerrrnsrnnsrinnsrinnrrnesrinnsrennne 4 31 4 8 5 Setting the Auto Reset Confirmation fUNCtION ssssessssessseesrreerresrinnstrnerinnrtnnntinnsinnntnnnntenstnnnsnnnne 4 33 4 8 6 Setting the Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation function eeteeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeneeeeaees 4 35 4 8 7 Setting the Message
309. ettings for using network faxing For details refer to the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations 12 36 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 4 6 Copier Setting Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Zoom Platen Select whether or not the Auto Zoom setting is automatical OFF ly selected when a paper tray is selected except when the Auto Paper setting is selected while an original is placed on the original glass Auto Zoom ADF Select whether or not the Auto Zoom setting is automatical ON ly selected when a paper tray is selected except when the Auto Paper setting is selected while an original is loaded into the ADF Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select which paper tray is selected when the Auto Paper setting is canceled e Tray Before APS ON The paper tray that was being used before the Auto Pa per setting was selected is selected e Default Tray Tray 1 is used Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages front cover inserted pages and chapter title pages Tray 2 Print Jobs During Copy Operation Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted for printing while a copy operation is being performed e Accept Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed e Receive Only Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation is fini
310. f s r aa aa fe Administrator settin Online Device Selection Filter Display All a 14 16 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 14 5 Click Import Import the device information Import the device information Registered group Default Group Registered name 17216_22 27 Device address 172 16 22 27 Scan settings Import functions Target of importing ea Authentication Settings Obtain from the device Address settings Obtain from the device 6 Click Yes PageScope Data Administrator Registered name 17216_22 27 Registered group name Default Group Model name KONICA MINOLTA bizhub 751 Device address 17216 22 27 A Device of non SSL communication is detected Continue If you ie want to activate SSL visit PageScope Web Connection and activate the SSL settings of bizhub OpenAPT bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 17 41 4 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 T Start up Data Administrator and then import the device information for this machine For details on importing the device information refer to the user manual for Data Administrator KONICA MINOLTA PageScope Data Administrator Authentication settings Address settings Default Gro TEOR J Eie Edit Tool Window Help EA TOP Registration of Device Network Initial Setting Eunction selection Device
311. f User Authentication Account Track User Authentication Settings Administrative Setting ID amp Print Settings ID amp Print is set to ON in the Administrator Settings of the machine general print jobs are also saved in the ID amp Print User Box 11 Specify the desired settings and then click OK 12 Click Apply and then click Print The print job is sent 13 Print a print job lt When 1 to many authentication has been specified gt gt Documents stored in the ID amp Print User Box can be printed J To check documents select Access Panel and fuser Print amp Access Access Hene Status User Name 4 Job Details 03 03 2010 14 11 Memory 100 Begin Printing The print job is printed Print amp Access The print job is printed and the user is logged in to the Basic screen Access The print job is not printed and the user is logged in to the Basic screen Make sure that either Begin Printing or Print amp Access is selected You can also select Access and select a print job to print For details refer to Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel on page 13 30 Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1 to many authentication has been specified Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1 to 1 authentication has been specified
312. f Fold Position The Half Fold Position screen appears Select a paper size and then use keys to specify the adjustment ministrator Settings gt Finisher Adjustment gt Half Fold Position Paper Size Adjust Value 278 eles step 0 1 B4 D Administrator sorties A4 D Expert Adjustment Tl D vl D Finisher Adjustment E aw Output A 06 19 2008 16 58 Memory 100 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed touch E and EH until the desired paper size is displayed bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 47 Utility mode Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper If the folding position is too far to the left of the center of the paper touch to increase the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 12 7 mm Each time or is touched the value is increased or decreased by one increment If the folding position is too far to the right of the center of the paper touch to reduce the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 12 8 mm C Touch OK To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key The center folding position is adjusted If the folding position was at the center of the paper in step 7 this completes the procedure
313. f burns do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds 5 2 13 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit 12 amp eee Note For details of the locations of paper misfeed s refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Open the right front door and the left front door Lower lever M4 and then pull out the ADU unit bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 23 5 Troubleshooting Open cover M11 Turn dial M9 and then remove any paper Return cover M11 to its original position Return the ADU unit to its original position Return lever M4 to its original position and then close the right front door and the left front door A WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine gt In order to reduce the risk of electric shock do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds A CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot gt In order to reduce the risk of burns do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds 5 24 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit 13 5 2 14 For details of the locations of paper misfeed s refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Note
314. f fold center staple amp fold tri fold Output trays Main finishing tray Tray 2 sub finishing tray Tray 1 Booklet tray Offset width 30 mm Paper types Main finishing tray Tray 2 Sort group sort and offset group and offset Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m thick paper 91 g m to 200 g m thin paper 50 g m to 59 g m label sheets OHP transparencies trace paper tab paper spe cial paper high quality paper user paper recycled paper colored paper letterhead Staple Plain paper 60 g m to 80 g m recycled paper high quality paper user paper letterhead special paper thin paper thick paper colored paper Sub finishing tray Tray 1 Sort group Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m thick paper 91 g m to 200 g m thin paper 50 g m to 59 g m tab paper Booklet tray Half fold tri fold Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m Center staple amp fold Plain paper 60 g m to 80 g m Paper sizes Main finishing tray Tray 2 Standard sizes A3 ato A5 Q 11 x 17 Gato 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 a Q Foolscap 2 8K 16K wide paper ASW ca to ASW fy 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W D Custom sizes i 182 mm x 148 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm 128 mm x 139 mm 1 Sub finishing tray Tray 1 Standard sizes A3ca to A5 Ga B6 ca A6 13 x 19 12 x 18 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Ga Q Foolscap 2 8K 16K wide paper ASW to ASW 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2
315. f the main unit 13 Tray 4 A maximum of 550 sheets of A3 to A5 plain paper 64 g m can be loaded 14 Tray 3 A maximum of 550 sheets of A3 to A5 plain paper 64 g m can be loaded 15 Tray 2 A maximum of 1 100 sheets of A4 to A5 plain paper 64 g m can be loaded 16 Tray 1 A maximum of 1 650 sheets of A4 to A5 plain paper 64 g m can be loaded 17 Right front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 18 Left front door Opened when turning the main power switch on and off and when clearing pa per misfeeds 19 Toner cartridge door Opened when replacing a toner cartridge 20 Machine status indicator Indicates machine status by combining the color blue or red and the state steady on or blinking 21 USB port type A Used for connecting external memory USB memory device USB 2 0 1 1 2 6 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies No Part name Description 22 Network connector Used for connecting the network cable when this machine is used for network 10Base T 100Base printing and network scanning TX 1000Base T 23 USB port type A Used for connecting the USB cable for the authentication unit biometric type USB 2 0 1 1 or the authentication unit IC card type 24 RS 232C port Used for connecting the modem for CS Remote Care 25 Telephone jack 1 Used for connecting
316. f when the machine enters Sleep mode or when the sub power switch is turned off For details refer to System Settings on page 12 26 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 35 2 Before making copies 2 3 8 Manually conserving energy The machine can be manually set to an energy conservation mode Low Power mode or Sleep mode gt Press the Power Save key or press the Power auxiliary power key As the factory default the machine enters Low Power Power Save mode E W Q Detail Whether the machine enters Low Power mode or Sleep mode when the Power Save key is pressed can be set from the Administrator Settings mode For details refer to System Settings on page 12 26 2 3 9 Automatically turning the machine on off Weekly Timer The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a usage schedule determined by the administrator so the machine s use can be limited This is the Weekly Timer Follow the procedure described below to use the machine while the Weekly Timer is being used Q Detail As the factory default the Weekly Timer is not set For details on setting the Weekly Timer refer to System Settings on page 12 26 Press the Power Save key Power Save CY O 2 36 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 Type in the password up to 8 digits for non business hours It is now non hour To use the i enter ord
317. finger correctly positioned Refer to the Quick Guide Authenti cation Unit Biometric Type AU 101 and check how to position the finger for authentication and scan ning Correctly position the finger to be scanned on the scanner and do not move the finger until the scanning results are received If the area of the finger to be scanned is dirty or chapped a correct im age cannot be created and scan ning may not be completed Wash your hands and try scanning again or try to correct chapped fingers If the area of the finger to be scanned is too wide or too thin outside of the finger width range of 10 mm to 25 mm a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed Try widening your fin ger or inserting it deeper or less deep into the scanner Was the machine restarted after the authentication unit was con nected to it Turn the machine off with the main power switch and temporarily dis connect the USB cable from the authentication unit or the machine before connecting it again and waiting 10 seconds before turning on the machine with the main pow er switch The Add New Hardware Wizard starts when the au thentication unit is con nected to the computer Is the authentication unit connect ed to the same USB port used when the driver was installed If the authentication unit is con nected to a USB port different from the one used when the driver was installed the Add New Hardware Wiza
318. fit the size of the paper Press the Finishing key or Punch key and then select the desired Finishing settings When the Corner or 2 Position Staple settings or the Center Staple amp Fold or Tri Fold setting is selected press the Finishing key and the indicator lights up When a Punch setting is selected press the Punch key and the indicator lights up A Punch can be selected at the same time as the Corner or 2 Position Staple setting If the settings are selected at the same time the indicator lights up when the Finishing key is pressed When only a Punch setting is selected all indicators except the one on the Punch key go off 4 Press the Start Stop key Press the Start Stop key during an operation to stop the operation 3 88 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 14 Selecting not to rotate the image Copies can be printed with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper Auto Rotate OFF Original ABC Auto Rotate amp Note Depending on the paper size and zoom ratio some parts of the image may be lost Inthe Basic screen touch Auto Rotate OFF bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 89 Basic copy operations 3 15 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy
319. fix Automatic Setting is set to ON the other settings will be re stricted For details refer to the User manual Network Administrator amp Note 2 Administrator Settings is displayed when the machine is managed by CS Remote Care 12 4 10 Security Settings Administrator Password Description Default Setting The administrator password used to specify the Administrator mode settings can be 12345678 specified or changed The administrator password can contain between 0 and 8 digits characters If the Password Rules parameter is set to Enabled only an administra tor password with 8 digits can be specified User Box Administrator Setting Description Specify settings for using boxes For details refer to the User manual Box Operations 12 38 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode Administrator Security Levels Description Default Setting Specify the range of Administrator mode parameters available to users Prohibit e Level 1 Low Power Mode Settings Auto Zoom Platen Auto Zoom ADF Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Automatic Image Rotation are avail able to users e Level 2 Low Power Mode Settings Output Settings Density for Original Page Number Print Position Blank Page Print Settings Auto Zoom Platen Auto Zoom ADF Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Automatic Image Rotation Co
320. g and then use the keypad to type in the size If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen use the keypad to type in the setting For details on switching between decimal and fraction values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 If the orientation of the loaded paper does not match the sizes specified for X and Y Input error appears even if the values are within the allowable range In addition do not enter the same size for X and Y If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value 7 18 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 7 To cancel changes to the settings touch Cancel Job List Use the keypad or the preset paper size Copies buttons to specify the size of the wide paper Change Settings for Selected Tray gt Wide Paper gt Change Size 2 A3WD 100 0 F Check Details 22 08 2008 15 00 Cancel Memory 100 8 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next two screens that appear The Basic screen appears again e Note The selected size button is programmed with the entered paper size so that the paper size is available to be selected again without
321. g during warm up on page 2 32 After the machine has finished warming up the scanned image will be printed Refer to Main unit on page 6 3 for warm up time bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 31 2 Before making copies 2 3 2 Scanning during warm up 1 Press the Power auxiliary power key For details on turning on the machine refer to Turning off the machine on page 2 33 The indicator on the Start key lights up in orange After the warm up message is displayed the Basic screen appears The indicator on the Start key lights up in blue Check that the message Warming up Ready to scan appears on the touch panel Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Specify any other desired copy settings Using the keypad specify the desired number of copies For details on specifying the number of copies refer to General copy operation on page 3 3 Press the Start key The original is scanned and the job is added to the list of queued jobs Ifthe Copy Operating Screen parameter in Utility mode was set to Yes touch Next Copy Job to display the Basic screen ow scanning originals Hame Stats COPY Printing Number of Sets os Number of Originals n 22 08 2008 11 28 Memory 89 After the machine has finished warming up the jobs will automatically be prin
322. g printing Follow the procedure described below to temporarily stop scanning the original and stop the printing operation Y Ifan original is being scanned for a job pressing the Stop key stops scanning Y For details on deleting a temporarily stopped job refer to Deleting a paused job on page 3 92 1 Press the Stop key while an original is being scanned or a job is being printed Stop Q O Scanning printing stops Pselect job to delete and touch Delete Press Start to restart the stopped job Nane Status Copy StopPrint f No User Nam Status Document Name Reg Timers ses Delete 18 COPY Stopped 19 06 Job Details 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Stopped Jobs screen appears 2 Tocontinue all stopped jobs press the Start key bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 91 Basic copy operations Deleting a paused job Follow the procedure described below to delete a temporarily stopped job Y Vv Vv For details on temporarily stopping a job being scanned or printed refer to Temporarily stopping scanning printing on page 3 91 Select only one job at a time to be deleted To continue a temporarily stopped job press the Start key Press the Stop key while an original is being scanned or a job is being printed Scanning printing stops The Stopped Jobs screen appears Select the job to be deleted and then touch Delete Stop
323. ge 5 7 Remove all paper from the bypass tray Load the paper into the tray again 5 2 8 Clearing a paper misfeed in the vertical transport section 7 amp Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 al Open the vertical transport door Ifa large capacity unit is installed open its large capacity tray front door and then open the vertical transport door Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 Troubleshooting Close the vertical transport door 5 2 9 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit 8 x Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Open the right front door and the left front door Turn dial M2 to feed out the paper Lower lever M4 and then pull out the ADU unit 5 16 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 Raise lever M3 and then remove any paper Return the ADU unit to its original position Return lever M4 to its original position and then close the right front door and the left fron
324. gin width change the margin position If necessary touch Image Shift The Image Shift screen appears 8 42 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 6 Adjust the position of the image and then touch OK Touch Left Right Top or Bottom to select the direction to be adjusted and then use the keypad or touch and to specify the adjustment amount To cancel the shift touch No Shift i Use the keys and the keypad to specify Copies dob List the amount of shift Application gt Page Margin gt Image Shift Vertical Shift l a Left Right Top Bottom A4 D 100 0 No Shift 25 08 20 09 11 Memory 100 To adjust the position of the image on the back side of the paper when printing double sided copies touch Change Back Shift i Puse the keys and the keypad to specify Copies JobList the amount of Shift Application gt Image Shift gt Change Back Shift iB L Ld i iy n Top Left Right Botton A4 D 100 0 No Shift No Shift Check Details 25 08 2008 09 12 Memory 100
325. ginal glass or loaded into the ADF and the paper size is selected Auto Paper Select Select this setting to detect the original placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF then automatically select paper of the same size if x1 0 is selected or select the paper size appropriate for the specified zoom ratio B Background Removal Select a setting to adjust the density of the background color of the original to one of nine levels Cc Change Tray Settings Touch this button to specify a paper size or type not loaded in a paper tray or to copy on paper other than normal paper Chapters Set this function to specify chapter title pages that must be printed on the front side of the paper when printing double sided copies Combine Select a setting to arrange reduced copies of multiple original pages on a single copy page The settings for the number of pages that can be combined are 2 in 1 4 in 1 and 8 in 1 Copy Protection Set this function to print hidden text in order to prevent improper copying When an original printed with copy protection text is copied the hidden text appears clearly repeated in all pages of the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy Cover Mode Set this function to add paper from the specified paper tray to the copies as a cover page D Density Select a setting to adjust the density of the print image to one of nine levels Duplex Select the setting to specify if the scanned ori
326. ginal on page 3 9 Touch Application To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled wist ee wine Basic Original setting original Tyre BEYEcEPer 100 07 a Neg Pos Reverse Book Copy Repeat 4 A y A Image Adjust D z Booklet al Stamp Composition 4 Save in User Box 4 canara 10 10 Memory 100 Touch Neg Pos Reverse wist Ready to copy oe i Basic original Setting original Type BerecePe 100 0 Book Copy Repeat 4 A y Page Margin Image Adjust EETU a E YU Stamp Composition 4 Save in User Box 4 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To cancel the Neg Pos Reverse function gt Touch Neg Pos Reverse again Specify any other desired copy settings Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies Press the Start key 8 26 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 8 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread Book Copy function An open book or catalog can be copied with the left and right pages on separate sheets of paper The following copy methods are available and there are settings for adding front and back covers Setting Description Book Spread Both pages of the page spread are printed on the same page Separation Separate copies of each page in the page spread are printed in the original page order The original is scanned to fit the size of paper that will be use
327. ginal and the printed copy are printed on just one side or both sides F Fold amp Staple Set this function to fold the copies in half and staple them together at the center Finishing Select from the settings that are available for sorting and finishing copies when they are fed into the finishing tray bizhub 751 601 Version 2 15 7 15 Appendix G Group Copy Finishing Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in the original The specified number of copies of the second page is printed after all copies of the first page are finished Group reference permission Use this feature to limit the addresses that each user can reference and to manage security Insert Image Set this function to later scan multiple images from the original glass and insert them at the desired locations in an original scanned with the ADF then feed out all copies together Insert Sheet Set this function to insert paper from the specified paper tray into the copies as chapter title pages M Margin Select the setting for the position of the binding margin for the loaded original Selecting the appropriate setting prevents the copy from being printed upside down when making double sided copies from single sided original or when making single sided copies from double sided originals Minimal Select this setting to produce a copy with the original image slightly reduced Mixed Original Select this setting to detect
328. gs 7 Function Management Settings 8 Stamp Settings 0 Driver Password En cryption Setting next screen 1 Flash Memory Lock Password 4 Security Detail provides Audit Log Setting For details please contact your service representa tive next screen 1 License Settings 1 Get Request Code 2 Install License 3 List of Enabled Func tions Refer to License Set tings on page 12 41 2 OpenAPI Certification Management Setting 1 Restriction Code Set tings Refer to OpenAPI Au thentication Management Setting on page 12 41 If an optional hard disk is not installed Confidential RX User Box appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 7 Utility mode 12 2 Registering a destination This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the Utility Counter key then touching One Touch User Box Registration 12 2 1 Create One Touch Destination Parameter Description Address Book Public Specify settings for registering fax and scan destinations For details refer to the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations Address Book Personal Group E mail Settings Note f user authentication settings have been specitied 1 One Touch Destination User Box Registration cannot be selected when no user has logged on However after a user h
329. gs continue with step 6 8 Touch Change Setting in the screen that appeared when the proof copy was printed T Please wait Job No 343 BSekarddna Paper Zoon Rome ine 0 0 Auto A4 D j 10 eegGmaooor To print the remainder touch Print To change setting touch Change Setting Hane Status copy StopPrint Number of Sets Pai Cee 22 08 2008 16 10 Memory 100 To stop copying while the proof copy screen is displayed press the Reset key or the C clear key Otherwise select the proof copy job to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel and then touch Delete In the screen that appears requesting confirmation to delete the job touch Yes and then touch OK f no operation is performed within the specified length of time while this screen is displayed the copy job being proofed is registered as a stored job and the Basic screen appears again Jobs are registered as stored jobs under the following conditions When the automatic system reset operation is performed After one minute when System Auto Reset is set to OFF For details on stored jobs refer to page 11 14 If System Auto Reset is set to OFF the job is stored if no operation is performed for 1 minute For details on the automatic system reset operation refer to Automatically conserving energy Sleep mode on page 2 35 The number under Number of Sets in the sc
330. guide lever FN2 to its original position Lower guide lever FN4 and then remove any paper Ifthe paper cannot be removed turn misfeed clearing dial FNS to feed out the paper Return guide lever FN4 to its original position 5 30 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting Lower guide lever FN5 and then remove any paper Ifthe paper cannot be removed turn misfeed clearing dial FNS to feed out the paper Return guide lever FN5 to its original position Grab handle FN7 and then pull out the stacker unit Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 31 Troubleshooting 9 Remove any misfed paper from the stacker unit Ifthe paper cannot be removed turn misfeed clearing dial FN6 to feed out the paper 10 Return the stacker unit to its original position 5 32 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 When returning the stacker unit to its original position do not grab any part other than handle FN7 otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched 171 Close the front door bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 33 5 Troubleshooting 5 2 18 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS 610 16 18 This procedure describes the op
331. h OK For details of shift amount setting refer to Adding a binding margin to copies Page Margin function on page 8 41 i Z use the keys and the keypad to specify Copies Job List the anount of shift Application gt Booklet gt Image Shift Vertical Shift Horizontal Shift Auto Paper 70 7 E W 5 4 uy alk Left Right Top Botton A T No Shift No Shift 0 1 250 0 C e EDn B EB Change Back Shift 4 25 08 2008 09 18 Memory 100 8 48 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 To make the specified amount of blank space in the center between the two images on a page touch Page Spacing Select Front Back to make the same amount of blank space or Front Side Back Side to specify the different amount for each then use or control panel keypad to enter the desired amount Touch OK to complete the setting i 4 Use the keys and the keypad to specify Copies JobList the amount of Shift Application gt Booklet gt Page Spacing BUTgcpaPer 70 7 Front Back Side 125 0 mm 125 0 mm Front Side Check Details Back Side 25 08 2008 09 23 Memory 100 Touch OK Specify any other desired copy settings Using the keypad type in the desire
332. h Set Zoom 5 Touch the button or Minimal where the new zoom ratio is to be stored After entering zoom ratio touch the es button you wish to store it Zoom gt XY Zoom gt Set Zoom Copies auyeckerer 100 0 i Check Details Minimal 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key The specified zoom ratio is stored 6 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next two screens that appear The Basic screen appears again bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 49 3 Basic copy operations 3 7 Selecting an original gt copy setting The following four Original gt Copy setting combinations are possible Original gt Copy setting Description 1 Sided gt 1 Sided aM Select this setting to produce single sided copies from single sided orig ap 1 Sided gt 2 Sided Select this setting to produce one double sided copy from two single o2 8 2 Sided gt 1 Sided Select this setting to produce two single sided copies from one double J 949 2 Sided gt 2 Sided all gt Select this setting to produce double sided copies from double sided O e 4 The following procedures describe how to select Original and Copy setting 3 50 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 7
333. h each set shifted to separate it 1 In the Basic screen touch Finishing Ready to copy inh sat Combine a masarannn i 1 1 Auto Rotate OFF Job Details 4 Spe Menory 100 The Finishing screen appears 2 Touch Sort F s i Ready to copy Conies Buyezee 100 0 Zz ce corner E a ollo 2 Position 4 Hole E Face Up 22 08 2008 14 01 Memory 100 To separate each set of copies touch Yes under Offset 3 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again 3 66 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 11 2 Separating copies by pages Group Setting Y As the factory default Group is selected VY _ lf offset sorting is selected while no finisher is installed printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating Ga and d pattern if the following conditions are met A4 or B5 size paper is used Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the Ga orientation in one paper tray and with the J orientation in another tray The Auto Paper setting is selected The Auto Paper setting is not selected when the Mixed Original setting is selected Y _ lf offset sorting is selected while a finisher is installed printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it 1 In the Basic screen touch Finishing l Ready to copy Copies Check Job inal Type Applicatio Density Duplex Background C
334. h employee each user and on each department each account To manage the use of this machine in this way specify the following authentication settings Parameter on Authentication Method screen Settings User Authentication Select ON External Server or ON MFP Account Track Select ON and then specify the account name and pass word Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track Select Synchronize Account Name on User Registration screen Select an account name if ON MFP was selected bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 67 Utility mode amp Note For details on external server authentication refer to the User manual Network Administrator 12 8 3 When user authentication and account track are used separately User 1 e Account T Group A User 2 Group B 1 7 1 T 1 GroupC This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple employees with each employee performing multiple duties which are to be totaled separately With this setup statistics can be maintained for each employee each user and on each duty of the employee each account In addition totals can be maintained on each employee each user and each duty each account even if the same duty is performed by two different employees To manage the use of this machine in this way specify the following authentication settings Parameter on Authentication Met
335. h tray Plain Paper tings Post Inserter Alert Dis Specify whether to display the paper size and paper orienta Yes play Setting tion during the tray display or an alarm indication for the post inserter Appears when the optional Large capacity unit LU 405 406 is installed bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 17 12 Utility mode Power Save Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Low Power Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time between 1 and 240 min 15 minutes utes until the machine enters Power Save mode Sleep Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time between 1 and 240 min 60 minutes utes until the machine enters Sleep mode amp Note Low Power Mode Settings appears only if the Administrator Security Levels parameter in Administrator mode is set to Level 1 Level 2 Q Detail For details on the Administrator Security Levels parameter refer to Security Settings on page 12 38 Output Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Print Fax Output Setting Specify settings for printing For details refer to the User manual Print Operations Output Tray Setting Select the copy output tray for each Copy Tray 2 type of job copies printouts re Print Tray 2 ports and faxes Print Reports Tray 2 Fax Tray 2 amp Note The Output Tray Settings parameter is available only if the optional finisher is instal
336. hanged settings For increased security the following settings are set when Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON Administrator mode parameters Changed settings System Settings Restrict User Access Restrict Ac cess to Job Settings Registering and Changing Ad dresses Set to Restrict User Authentication Account Track General Settings Public User Access Set to Restrict User Authentication Account Track User Authentication Settings Administrative Settings User Name List Set to OFF User Authentication Account Track Print Without Au thentication Set to Restrict Security Settings User Box Administrator Setting Set to Restrict Security Settings Security Details Password Rules Set to Enable Security Settings Security Details Prohibited Func tions When Authentication Error Set to Mode 2 and three times or less for checking Security Settings Security Details Confidential Docu ment Access Method Set to Mode 2 Security Settings HDD Setting Overwrite Temporary Data Set to Mode 1 amp Note The number of times for checking for Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error can be changed to a number between 1 and 3 A changed setting cannot be changed when Enhanced Security Mode is set to OFF When Password Rules is set to Enable a password that does not meet the passwor
337. he ADF on page 3 9 2 Load tab papers into the bypass tray Tab papers can be loaded into the bypass tray For details refer to Loading paper into the bypass tray on page 2 55 3 24 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 5 In the Basic screen touch Original Setting Ready to copy Check Job Densitys Backgr und Hane Status y Density Auto Background Auto Paper oval Select Lio I a d A N EE Sayan Job Details Finishing 4 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 orisinal setting original type Application Separate Scan Copies Duplex Combine OO 1 1 Auto Rotate OFF The Original Setting screen appears Touch Tab Original The Tab Original screen appears Select an original size and then touch OK Job List Replenish paper Original Setting gt Tab Original Copies A4 D 100 0 Check Details B5 D 11 D tl D 22 08 2008 13 30 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 25 Basic copy operations 3 4 5 Selecting the original orientation Original Direction settings When copying double sided originals or m
338. he center FS 610 then fold the copies in half before feeding them out Refer to page 3 79 gt Tri Fold Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out FS 610 Refer to page 3 81 W E Z Fold Select this setting to fold copies in half along the center and ad FS 524 ditionally mountain fold one of the halves before feeding them FS 525 out FS 610 Q eO E i A Note Copies can be folded in half or in three or bound at the center only if Finisher FS 610 is installed Z folding is available when the Z folding unit is installed with the finisher For details refer to Z Folding and outputting papers Z Fold setting on page 3 83 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 77 3 Basic copy operations 3 12 1 Folding copies in half Half Fold setting Finisher FS 610 Paper weight Paper size Plain paper Standard sizes 60 g m to 90 g m Custom sizes 210 mm x 279 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm A3 aa B4 A4 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 Gy 8 1 2 x 11 Ga 8K Gy wide paper A3W B4W A4Waoa 11 x 17W oa 8 1 2 x 11W Ga Maximum number of folded sheets Paper capacity 3 sheets When folding 3 sheets 80 g m 25 sets or less with a paper length of 299 mm or less 33 sets or less others 1 In the Basic screen touch Finishing ob ist Ready to copy Check Job al Setti iginal Type Application Copies pensity Background
339. he control panel of the machine touch 4 User Authentication Account Track on the Administrator Settings screen and then touch 2 Authentication System then 2 User Registration 2 User Authentication Settings is not available if User Authentication on the General Settings screen is set to OFF 2 Touch the button for a registration number and then touch Edit fter selecting the user touch Edit Administrator Settings gt User Authentication Settings gt User Registration Utility Administrator Settings User enti Authent ications Account Track User Auth Settings 07 15 2008 08 34 Henory 100 3 Touch Register Auth Info Select the item to be registered changed Utility Administrator Settings User Auth Settings User Registration f P acct Function Permission 90 Memory Register Auth Info Max Allowance Set C cance1 o 13 8 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 1 3 4 Touch Edit Register or delete authentication information dministrator Settings gt Edit gt Register Authentication Information Utility Settings Bio Authentication MORETA Edit User Registration Edit 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 5 Position the finger on the authentication unit to scan the finger vein pattern Scan the finger ve
340. he desired access permission level The access permission level for the group is specified 9 Touch OK Specifying a destination level 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 4 User Authentication Account Track The User Authentication Account Track screen appears 3 Touch 7 Limiting Access to Destinations The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears 4 Touch 2 Apply Levels Groups to Destinations The Apply Levels Groups to Destinations screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 11 Utility mode Touch the button for the desired destination Utility 4 Limiting Access to Destinations Memory 100 yee authentications account Trai ck 4 Aa Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection Ae istrator Settings gt ee iting Access to Destinations gt Apply Levels Groups to Destinations Address Book 1 Administrator Settings 3 OO ma O A d For an address book destination touch the index button for the first letter of the destination and then search for the destination Specify group permitted to access destination or apply reference permission level to destination trator Settings gt Apply Levels Groups to Destinations gt Address Book Favor Ter Je Utility No Destination M
341. he loaded original If the original length is 297 mm or less the holes are punched along the long side of the paper If the original length is more than 297 mm the holes are punched along the short side of the paper If Auto is selected for the stapling position load the original with the top toward the back of the machine If the original is loaded in any other orientation the stapling will not be correctly positioned If Auto is selected the punched hole position is set at the top or at the left To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key 4 if desired touch Original Direction and then select the setting appropriate for the original For details on specifying the original orientation refer to Selecting the original orientation Original Direction settings on page 3 26 5 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again 3 76 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 12 Selecting a folding setting By installing optional equipments copies can be folded or folded and bound with staples at the same time and then fed out Available settings differ depending on the optional equipments installed Setting Description Compatible models Half Fold Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out Refer to page 3 78 FS 610 Center Staple amp Fold Select this setting to staple copies at two places along t
342. he necessary settings Set Weekly Timer ON OFF Settings to ON lt Specify times for Time Settings Specify dates for Date Settings Specify the desired settings for Select Time for Power Save and Password for Non Business Hours The weekly timer is set 12 44 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 6 12 6 1 Finisher Adjustment Center Staple Position Adjustment The stapling position when printing with the Center Staple amp Fold setting can be adjusted for each paper eee Note Center Staple Position Adjustment does not appear if optional Finisher FS 610 is not installed f the angle of the staple must be adjusted contact your service representative Q Detail For details on the Center Staple amp Fold setting refer to Binding copies at the center Center Staple amp Fold setting on page 3 79 For the procedure on adjusting the center folding position refer to Half Fold Position on page 12 47 Adjust the center folding position before adjusting the center stapling position Before making any adjustments use the Center Staple amp Fold setting to print a single sample copy Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 Touch 1 System Settings The System Settings s
343. he zoom ratio stored with the selected button If a button stored with a zoom ratio is not touched before OK is touched no setting is changed In the Basic screen touch Zoom Copies Check Job Density Background Hane Status ieit gt Auto Background Removal GG OHeG000 LUOT Job Details o A 10 10 Memory 100 The Zoom screen appears Touch XY Zoom Copies Job List Ready to copy ji Application SeieceoP 100 0 User Preset Zoom T B4 A3 A4 A3 200 0 BS A A4 BA es Ba Check Details J E 86 6 81 6 70 7 A3 B4 A3 AG yaa BS B4 A4 Bares 115 4 122 4 141 4 22 08 2008 Memory 3 48 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 Using the keypad type in the desired zoom ratio between 25 0 and 400 0 Specify the zoom ratio using the keypad Job List Press C to set the zoom to 100 0 Zoom gt XY Zoom Copies auyeckorer 100 0 Set Zoom Check Details Set Individual Zoom 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To cancel changes to the settings touch Cancel 4 Touc
344. her or not the Sort setting is automatically se lected when 2 or more copies are set to be printed in a sin gle job e Yes When an original is loaded into the automatic docu ment feeder and the Start key is pressed the Group setting is automatically selected if the original consists of only one page and the Sort setting is automatically selected if the original consists of two or more pages e No The Sort or Group setting is not selected automati cally Yes Default Copy Settings Specify the default settings for Copy mode The copy settings selected when the machine is turned on the power switch is set to or the Reset key is pressed can be specified e Current Setting The settings specified from the touch panel before Util ity mode was entered are set as the default settings for Copy mode e Factory Default The factory default settings are set as the default set tings for Copy mode Factory Default Default Enlarge Factory Default Specify the default settings for Enlarge Display mode e Current Setting The settings specified in the Enlarge Display mode be fore Utility mode was entered are set as default settings for the Enlarge Display mode e Factory Default The factory default settings are set as the default set tings for the Enlarge Display mode Factory Default When AMS Direction is In Select whether or not printing continues when the paper Print correct and original orien
345. his machine Ifan authentication mode is set the authentication screen is displayed while this machine is in standby n order to use this machine when user authentication or account track settings are specified the user name and password must be entered For details refer to Controlling each user s use of this machine User Authentication on page 2 38 User authentication and account track can be specified without synchronizing 12 8 1 User authentication and account track User authentication and account track can be used to specify the following settings User Authentication Limits on the available functions copy operations scanning operations fax operations printing document storing operations transmitted document printing and saving document to the external memory Counters for printing scanning by each user Management of group user boxes and personal user boxes for each owner Management of the level and the group with permissions to access destinations by each owner Delete jobs of other users Account Track Counters for printing scanning from each account Operates the group box 12 8 2 When user authentication and account track are synchronized User 1 Account T Group A User 2 This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple departments and the use by each employee is managed by each department With this setup statistics can be maintained on eac
346. his machine is turned off then on again with the main power switch wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable otherwise the cable may be damaged bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 21 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 14 2 3 Logging on to this machine Follow the procedures described below to log on to this machine by completing authentication with IC card IDs When Card Authentication has been specified has been specified 1 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit Place IC card on authentication unit Hane Status Job Details 02 2 Memory 2 The user is authenticated and the Basic screen appears Ready to copy copies Check Job Density Backgr und Density j Auto i a Background Auto Paper Removal Select 9H8HH0000 U Gaal Duplex Combine Hane Status z x D AF SS Finishing 4 Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 14 22 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 14 When Card Authentication Password has been specified 1 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit and then type in the password Hane Stat
347. hod screen Settings User Authentication Select ON External Server or ON MFP Account Track Select ON and then specify the account name and pass word Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track Select Do Not Synchronize 12 68 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 8 4 Selecting an authentication method 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 Touch 4 User Authentication Account Track The User Authentication Account Track screen appears Touch 1 General Settings The General Settings screen appears Specify a setting for User Authentication To cancel user authentication touch OFF To use an external server to perform user authentication touch External Server Authentication and then select the server type In order to use an external server the external server must first be registered To use this machine s authentication system to perform user authentication touch ON MFP Select item and enter setting Administrator Settings gt User Auth Account Track gt General Settings User Authentication OFF inl Utility Administrator Settings Account Track OFF vl S BaEhensication Account Track i 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Specify a setting for Public
348. i ID amp Print User Box Detail view Cancel Touch Print under Action and then touch OK To delete the document touch Delete To check the document details touch Document Details To cancel the operation touch Cancel The selected document is printed amp Note f authentication fails many times the authentication data may not be registered correctly Therefore register the user again 14 34 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 1 5 Appendix Appendix 1 5 E See 15 Appendix 15 1 Entering text The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel for typing in the names of registered users and custom paper sizes The keypad can also be used to type in numbers Any of the following keyboards may appear Example Password input screen Use the keyboard or keypad to type in the Administrator password Press C to erase the entered the Administrator password Utility gt Administrator Settings 02 26 2010 10 11 CES r Henory 90 Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size Use the keyboard or keypad to enter Copies the custom size name Press C to erase the entered Custom Size Name Change Settings for Selected Tray gt Store Custom Size gt Custom Size Name 02 26 2010 08 57 90 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 15 3 Appendix To
349. ic Type An authentication unit biometric type can be used with this machine to perform authentication The authentication unit biometric type authenticates the user by scanning the vein patterns in the finger amp Note 1 to many authentication Authentication is performed simply by positioning the finger 1 to 1 authentication Authentication is performed by typing in the user name and positioning the finger Q Detail To use biometric authentication register the vein patterns in the finger in advance For details on specifying authentication settings for the authentication unit biometric type and on registering finger vein patterns refer to chapter 12 Authentication unit Biometric Type AU 101 of this manual When 1 to many authentication has been specified Place your finger on authentication unit Hane Status Job Details 02 26 2010 14 01 Memory 90 gt Place your finger on the authentication unit biometric type a Hil bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 45 2 Before making copies The basic screen appears List Ready to copy Copies Check Job original setting Original Tyre Application pensity Duplexs Backgr und Combine Density j Auto DLJ Background Auto Paper Removal Select oiolololola imla 1 1 Hane Status aly Pi Finishing A li Separat
350. ies that are fed out For details on specifying settings for shifting copies that are fed out when the finisher is installed refer to System Settings on page 12 17 For details on Fold Bind refer to Selecting a folding setting on page 3 77 When the post inserter is installed with the finisher the finisher can be operated manually For details refer to Manually using the finisher on page 3 86 Available Finishing Settings Setting Description Sort Select this setting to separate each set of a multi page original 1 Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a ym multi page original 3 5 1 7 1 3 64 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 Setting Description Offset If no finisher is installed If the sorting conditions are met printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating criss cross pattern If a finisher is installed The copies are fed out and 4 stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it l T5 s e Face Up The copies are output with their front sides facing up with staples at the same time The Fold Bind setting can be used if the optional Finisher FS 610 is installed Fold Bind Select this setting to fold copies The copies can also be bound ff
351. ilable gt 2 User Authentication Settings is not available if User Authentication on the General Settings screen is set to OFF Touch 3 User Counter Touch the button for the desired user and then touch Counter Details The Counter Details screen for the user appears Touch the button for the counter to be viewed and then check the counter To clear the counters for the current user touch Clear Counter in the Counter Details screen for the current user A confirmation message appears asking whether the counter should be cleared To clear the counters for the displayed user touch Yes in the confirmation message screen and then touch OK The maximum number allowed is not cleared To clear the counters for all users touch Reset All Counters in the User Counter screen A confirmation message appears asking whether the counters should be cleared To clear the counters for all users touch Yes in the confirmation message screen and then touch OK The maximum number allowed is not cleared dninistrator Settings gt User Counter gt Counter Details Wer Hae Copy Print Scan Fax Max Allowance Large Size 0 0 User Auth Settings User Counter Original Paper Counter counter 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch Close bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 79 12 Utility mode 12 10 12 10 1 Account Track Setting Account Track Registration The password and numb
352. ilable hard disk space 100 MB or more Monitor 800 x 600 pixels 16 bit color or more Network TCP IP protocol Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 SP1 or later Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Windows 2000 Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 SP2 Windows XP Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 SP1 Windows Vista Interface USB 1 1 or later Supported operating systems Windows 2000 Professional SP4 Windows XP Professional SP3 or later Windows XP Professional x64 Edition SP2 or later Windows Vista Enterprise SP2 or later Windows Vista Ultimate SP2 or later Supports 32 bit x86 64 bit x64 environment bizhub 751 601 Version 2 6 Specifications 6 2 12 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 Item Description Name AU 201 Dimensions Approx 92 mm W x 64 mm D x 16 mm H Weight Approx 120g Power consumption Through USB port Environment conditions Temperature 0 to 40 C when operating Ta Humidity 20 to 85 Must be no condensation Environment conditions Temperature 20 to 50 C when not operating Humidity 20 to 85 Must be no condensation Radio waves classification Induced reading writing communication equipment Compatible card Processor Contactless IC card compliant with ISO 14443 Type A and FeliCa Computer Processor PC AT compatible 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more Hard disk drive Available hard dis
353. in 0 001 increments User set zoom ratio 3 Multiple copies sets 1 to 9999 copies 1 to 9999 sets Density adjustment Copy Density Automatic and manual 9 levels Background adjustment Manual 9 levels Power requirements AC 220 240 V 10 A 50 60Hz Noise 75 dB or less bizhub 751 601 Power consumption Max 2 000 W including options Dimensions 886 W x 859 D x 1140 H mm main unit ADF and control panel Space requirements 3 1275 W x 791 D mm main unit and ADF Memory 1GB Weight Approx 224 kg Main unit and ADF 1 Can only be fed through the bypass tray 2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 ta 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga and 8 x 13 Ga one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative 3 The indicated spaced requirements represent the space required to fully extend the bypass tray In order to incorporate improvements these product specifications are subject to change without notice 6 1 2 Automatic Document Feeder DF 614 Item Description Name DF 614 Document feed methods Standard original Single sided double sided Mixed original Single sided double sided Original paper types 50 g m to 200 g m Original sizes 100 mm x 139 7 mm to 297 mm x 431 8 mm Detectable sizes A3 Ga to A5 U 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 11 W Foolscap Capacity of document feed
354. in pattern three times removing and repositioning the same finger and touch OK after each time Position your finger to register io authentication Administrator Settings gt Authentication Information gt Register Bio Auth Utility Administrator Place your finger on the authentication Settings device and then touch OKI Ist of 3 times OK RABAS Phro 02 02 2008 10 10 Cancel Memory 100 6 Touch Close and then touch Close in the next screen that appears 7 Type the user name and the password 8 sit desired specify the function limitations 9 Touch OK 10 Touch Close Registering from Data Administrator In order to use Data Administrator settings must be specified on the machine and the setup procedure must be performed The setup procedure includes installing BioDriver USB Driver of the authentication unit then installing Data Administrator Bio Plugin amp Reminder Data Administrator ver 4 0 or later must first be installed on the computer For details on the operating environment and installation procedure for Data Administrator refer to the user manual for the Data Administrator bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 9 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 Checking the currently installed version 1 From the Help menu of Data Administrator click Version Information If the version appears as 3 x This software cannot be used Inst
355. inal Highly translucent or transparent original such as overhead transparencies or trace paper Coated original such as carbon backed paper Original printed on paper thicker than 201 g m Original printed on paper thinner than 50 g m Original printed on paper thicker than 50 g m during double sided copying Original that are bound for example with staples or paper clips Original that are bound in a book or booklet Original that are bound together with glue Original pages that have been cut or contain cutouts Label sheets Offset printing masters Original with binder holes Original that have just been printed with this machine 7 32 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 7 4 3 Originals that can be loaded on the original glass Use the original glass when originals are not suitable for use with the ADF or when setting copying conditions incompatible with the ADF The machine will detect the original size automatically when the original is positioned on the original glass with ADF closed then select an appropriate paper size automatically by Auto Paper Select function Item Description Original type Sheets books spreads three dimensional objects Original Size 128 mm x 139 7 mm to 297 mm x 431 8 mm Auto Original Size De A3 to A5 G q B6 a A6 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R y Foolscap 8K a 16K G W tect Maximum original 6 8 kg weight Maximum original thick 30 mm
356. ind 88Y80EPPe 100 0 Hal f Fold irae Tri Fold F Check Details APANA 06 19 2008 09 54 Memory 100 Ifa cover sheet is added with the Cover Sheet function the cover sheet 200 g m can be stapled When the Center Staple amp Fold setting is selected the following factory default settings are automatically selected 1 Sided gt 2 Sided Booklet Recommended zoom ratio 64 7 when the Booklet function is selected When the Center Staple amp Fold setting is selected the following Finishing settings are not available Group Offset Staple Punch Face Up To cancel the Center Staple amp Fold setting touch No or the button for a different setting 4 Touch OK and then touch OK again The Basic screen appears again 3 80 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 12 3 To fold copies in three Tri Fold setting Finisher FS 610 Paper weight Paper size Maximum number of tri folded sheets 60 g m to 80 g m A4 aa 8 1 2 x 11 16K amp 3 sheets 81 g m to 90 g m 1 sheet Number of folded sheets Maximum number of sets 1 sheet 50 sets or less 1 2 Detail When copies are to be folded in three
357. ine Density Oo ofl Auto Background Removal Ojo O oa Finishing 02 02 2008 Memory Type _ _ Application _ Duplexs Auto Paper Select ooo g Ge i Auto Rotate oFF 10 10 100 The Zoom screen appears 2 Touch XY Zoom Select Job List guto Paper 100 0 Ready to copy Copies Original Setting origina Type Application Check Details 122 4 141 4 A4 A3 200 0 A4 BA eSBs 86 6 81 6 70 7 a3 B4 A3 A4 50 0 A4 B5 B4 A4 By Bs 22 08 2008 Memory 13 41 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 41 2 Basic copy operations Using the keypad type in the desired zoom ratio between 25 0 and 400 0 Job List Specify the zoom ratio using the keypad Press C to set the Zoom to 100 0 Zoom gt XY Zoom guyeckerer 100 0 MNT i Set Zoon Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears The Basic screen appears again 3 42 bizhub 751 601 V
358. ine be sure to select the original orientation For details on selecting the original orientation refer to Selecting the original orientation Original Direction settings on page 3 26 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the right side of the machine Adjust the lateral guides to the size of the original For details on loading originals of mixed sizes refer to Copying originals of mixed sizes Mixed Original setting on page 3 21 For details on specifying the original orientation refer to Selecting the original orientation Original Direction settings on page 3 26 For details on specifying the binding margin position refer to Selecting the position of the binding margin Binding Position settings on page 3 29 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 9 Basic copy operations 3 3 2 Placing the original on the original glass Y For details on the types of originals that can be placed on the original glass refer to Originals on page 7 31 Y When placing the original on the original glass be sure to lift open the ADF at least 20 If the original is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 20 the correct original size may not be detected Y Do not place objects weighing m
359. ing any adjustments use a Punch setting to print a sample copy Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 Touch 1 System Settings The System Settings screen appears Touch 7 Expert Adjustment The Expert Adjustment screen appears Touch 5 Finisher Adjustment The Finisher Adjustment screen appears Touch 5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment The Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment screen appears T Use the keys to specify the adjustment gaministrator settings i ie z gt Finisher Adjustment gt Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment utility Administrator Settings Expert Adjustment Finisher Adjustment Test Pattern Output A 07 11 2008 14 36 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 53 Utility mode Check the horizontal position of the punched holes To increase width A touch to increase the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 5 0 mm Each time or is touched the value is increased or decreased by one increment A 4 H To decrease width A touch to decrease the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 5 0 mm A OQ 0 Jo Touch OK To cancel the setting and select the default pre
360. ing boxes For details refer to the User manual Box Operations Delete Secure Print Documents Auto Delete Secure Document Specify settings for using boxes For details refer 1 day to the User manual Box Operations Encrypted PDF Delete Time 1 day ID amp Print Delete Time 1 day Document Hold Setting ON External Memory Save Document OFF Function Settings Print Document ON ID amp Print Delete after Print Setting Confirm with User Document Delete Time Setting 1 day Stamp Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Header Footer Settings Program or delete header footer settings Fax TX Settings Select whether or not the stamp settings are canceled when Cancel a fax is sent Blank Page Print Settings Description Default Setting Select whether or not stamps and overlays are printed on blank pages when a Stamp Com Do Not Print position function is set Page Number Print Position Description Default Setting Specify the print position of the stamp on back pages when duplex printing and booklet are All the Same used in combination Skip Job Setting Parameter Description Default Setting Fax Select whether or not to skip jobs for the fax trans ON mission other than Fax Select whether or not to skip jobs for other func ON tions than fax transmission bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 31 Utility mode Application Key Settings Description Default Setting Functions can be assigned to Key
361. ing for oversized paper If paper one size larger than a standard size is being used in the tray 3 and 4 specify a setting for wide paper The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for wide paper loaded into the tray 3 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen touch 5 Paper Type Size Settings For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen refer to To display the paper tray setting screen on page 7 21 For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4 refer to Loading paper into the bypass tray on page 2 55 Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection No Matching Paper in Tray Setting A system Settings S Print Lists Z ae Paper Type Size Settings 06 19 2008 11 07 Memory 100 Utility gt System Settings gt Paper Tray Settings Utility 1 Se2ct8A settings e Sebesng vor Alert Paspiay Auto Tray Switch ON OFF 4 User Settings The Paper Type Size Settings screen appears 2 Touch the button for the tray 3 and then touch Wide Paper under Paper Size JobList Select paper type and size for each Tray Utility gt System Settings gt Paper Type Size Settings Paper Tray Paper Type Settings 1 A4 D Plain 4 paper J User Settings 2 A4D Paper Size systen Settings ess EX 7 Paper Tray Settings 22 08 2008 15 05 Memory 100 The Paper Size screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 27
362. ing the keyboard en touch 0K Weekly Timer gt Password for Non Business Hours l Shift Space 03 02 2010 15 10 A cancel 0K Memory 100 For details on setting the password for non business hours refer to System Settings on page 12 26 3 Touch OK The message It is now non business hour Set the Sleep Mode time appears 4 Using the keypad again type in the length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode Specify a length of time between 5 minutes and 9 hours and 59 minutes It is now non business hour Set the Sleep Mode e Weekly Timer gt Business Hours Nane Status Job Details 7 02 2008 10 10 eee Memory 100 How can a single digit be entered gt First type in 0 If a minutes setting of less than 5 is entered the setting changes to 5 minutes In addition a minutes setting of 60 or more cannot be specified 5 Touch OK The message Ready to copy appears on the touch panel XQ Note Ifthe message It is now non business hour Set the Sleep Mode time or It is now non business hour To use the device enter password using the keyboard or keypad and then touch OK appears after the Power auxiliary power key is pressed the Weekly Timer is set bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 37 Before making copies Q Detail During the set time the copy operations can be performed as usual From the Password for Non
363. ings Public User is set to Save in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted public user jobs are also saved in the ID amp Print User Box 6 click the OK button 7 From the Output Method drop down list select Print Printer KONICA MINOLTA 751 H9 Presets Standard he Output Method Ha Paper View O Detailed Information F collate 8 1 2x11 ae v l Offset 8 1 2x11 Output Method v Print B Secure Print za Save in User Box Save in User Box and Print Proof Print FR T a _ _ _ _ _ Printer Information C Detail Settings Default 2 PDF Preview Cancel Pina If User Authentication Account Track User Authentication Settings Administrative Setting ID amp Print Settings ID amp Print is set to ON in the Administrator Settings of the machine general print jobs are also saved in the ID amp Print User Box 8 Specify the desired settings and then click Print The print job is sent 13 28 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 9 Prita print job lt When 1 to many authentication has been specified gt Documents stored in the ID amp Print User Box can be printed by authenticating To check documents select Acc Panel and log in user Print amp Access Access Hane Status Delete _ Job Details
364. ings When printing a proof copy specify multiple copies 3 Press the Proof Copy key If an optional hard disk is not installed go to step 6 If an optional hard disk is not installed the Select Proof Proof Copy Copy Method screen does not appear The Select Proof Copy Method screen appears O 4 Touch Print for Mode and then select the original direction When the original is placed on the original glass Press Start If the original is not set upright select direction Select Proof Copy Method user Hane Status A Preview on Screen Job Detai _ _ 92 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 When the original is loaded into the ADF Press Start If the original is not set upright select direction Select Proof Copy Method user Hane Status Preview on Screen Original Direction 2 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 5 Press the Start key 6 Ifthe original was placed on the original glass touch Finish and then press the Start key If the original was loaded into the ADF printing of the proof copy begins without the screen appearing confirming that scanning of the original is finished A single proof copy is printed 7 Check the proof copy If the proof copy was printed as desired continue with step 8 To change the copy settin
365. ings on page 3 26 Copies gug EPer 100 0 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 8 Touch OK 3 16 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 9 Press the Start key Scanning begins Load the next original and then press Start _BEBREF Rina Hane Status COPY Printi _ When scanning of the current original is finished touch Finish Number of Sets 071 Number of Originals 2 08 2008 15 37 Memory 100 10 Position the second page or second side of the original onto the original glass and then press the Start key Toscan the remaining pages in the original repeat step 10 To change the scanning settings touch Change Setting For details on changing the scanning settings refer to Changing scan settings for each original on page 3 32 The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings Settings for the following can be changed 1 Sided 2 Sided Density Background Original Type Binding Position Zoom Original Size Frame Erase Center Erase To cancel changes to the settings touch Cancel ings can be changed for stopped scan job Start to continue Stop to cancel changes to settings Job No 215 Change Setting basic Lat ion Hane Statlis copy Printtait i nocument im J Frame Erase Center Erase Backardind
366. ings for network func ON tions that are difficult to count when managing operations Q Detail The following functions cannot be used if Network Function Usage Settings is set to OFF PC FAX transmission Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in user boxes Using PageScope Box Operator to view and retrieve documents in user boxes Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in user boxes Using PageScope Job Spooler to view and retrieve documents in user boxes Box operations using the PageScope Web Connection The User Box tab does not appear Stamp Settings Parameter Description Apply Stamps Select whether or not a stamp is added when printing or sending Delete Registered Stamp Select whether or not stamps registered for copy protection can be deleted Driver Password Encryption Setting Description Default setting The encryption password for the printer driver can be changed For details refer to the Use Factory Default User manual Print Operations Flash Memory Lock Password Description Default setting The lock password of flash memory can be changed or released Use Factory Default 12 4 11 License Settings Parameter Description Get Request Code Issues the request code for this machine that registers in the License Management Serv er LMS Install License Select the function to be enabled and then type in the license code ac
367. inisher FS 610 post inserter and punch kit e Corner Staple 2 Position Staple e Center Staple amp Fold Tri Fold Punch settings Corner Staple 2 Position Center Tri Fold Punch Staple Staple amp Fold Reminder Only load paper into the lower tray Do not use the upper tray Paper weight Paper size Number of sheets Output tray Corner Staple 2 Plain paper 60 g m Standard sizes Finisher FS 524 Main finishing tray Position Staple to 90 g m A3 ato A5 Gy 50 sheets 60 g m Tray 2 11x17 ato to 90 g m 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 a Foolscap 8K ca Finisher FS 525 A 16K Ga y 100 sheets 60 g m wide paper A3W t0 80 g m9 to ASW UW Finisher FS 610 11x 17W amp to 50 sheets 60 g m 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W D to 80 g m Custom sizes 16 sheets 81 g m2 to 314 mm x 458 mm Punch settings Plain paper 60 g m 2 holes 200 sheets Main finishing tray to 90 g m A3 ato A5 G q Tray 2 Thick paper 91 11x17 Gato g m to 128 g m 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 G G Foolscap ih 8K a 16K a y 4 holes A3 m B4 ca A4 D B50 11x 17 Gato 8 1 2 x 11 8K a 16K p 3 86 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations Paper weight Paper size Number of sheets Output tray Center Staple amp Plain paper 60 g m Standard sizes 20 sheets 60 g m Booklet tray Fold to 80 g m A3 B4 A4 to 80 g m 11x170 16 sheets 81 g m 8 1 2 x 14 to 90 g m 8 1 2x 11 8Ka wide paper A3W B4W ca A4W aa 11x 17Wa 8 1 2 x 11W
368. inting Position gt Fine Tune Left amp Right Adjustment Top amp Botton Adjustment Seiece P 100 0 Bottom No Adjustment No Adjustment Check Detail 25 08 2008 09 29 Memory 100 What are the limits on the adjustment amount gt The print position can be finely adjusted in 0 1 mm increments Can no adjustments be made gt To make no left right or up down adjustments touch No Adjustment bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 65 8 Application functions T Select the desired settings for Text Size As the factory default the following setting is selected Text Size Std Application gt Stamp gt Text Size Dnt IMI 8 Touch OK and then touch Close in the next screen that appears 9 Specify any other desired copy settings 10 Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies 11 Press the Start key 8 15 4 Printing copy protection text Copy Protect function 1 1 REPORT m REPORT 1 1 Q Detail If the Copy Protect function is set hidden text is printed in order to prevent unauthorized copying When an original printed with copy protection text is copied the hidden text appears clearly repeated in the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy The copy protection text is printed on all pages The pages cannot be specified 8
369. ion key on the Misfeed Location screen displays another screen with the message Remove the misfed paper according to the guide or illustration and also with a description and illustration for clearing misfed paper Remove the misfed paper according to the guide or illustration Open the finisher door gargo j isplay 18 06 2008 17 39 Im Next Box Job 8848 rex aon Memory 100 If the description extends over multiple pages the Next key is displayed Touch Next to proceed to the next screen Touching JAM Location Display returns to the Misfeed Location screen 5 6 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 5 2 2 Paper misfeed indications The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional Finisher FS 610 Z folding unit post inserter and Large Capacity Unit LU 405 installed The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional output tray installed bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 7 Troubleshooting z Description Paper misfeed in tray 1 Paper misfeed in tray 2 Paper misfeed in tray 3 Paper misfeed in tray 4 Paper misfeed in the LCT Large Capacity Unit LU 405 LU 406 Paper misfeed in the bypass tray Paper misfeed in the vertical transport section Paper misfeed in the ADU unit Paper misfeed in the ADU unit CO O MOINI OI a HR OIN Paper misfeed
370. ion _ Auto Rotate OFF Copies Duplex Combine O 1 1 The Binding Position screen appears 3 30 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 4 Touch the button for the desired binding margin position and then touch OK Job List Select the binding position of the original Originals Setting gt Binding Position auyeckerer 100 0 Top Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 31 Basic copy operations 3 4 9 Changing scan settings for each original When scanning an original while using the Separate Scan setting or when multi page originals are scanned from the original glass the scan settings can be changed for each original The following procedure describes how to change the settings when the Separate Scan setting is used 1 Position the original to be copied 2 Inthe Basic screen touch Separate Scan Ce f overons 3 Press the Start key Scanning begins 4 Touch Change Setting T Load the next original and then press Start Job No 337 BERRE Sina When scanning of the current original is finished touch Finish Number of Sets
371. ission The Function Permission screen appears Touch the button for the desired settings Select default function permission for External Server Authentication tea Administrator Settings gt Administrative Set gt Default Function Permission Restrict Administrator Utility Settings Administrative Settings 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch OK The default function permissions are set bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 73 Utility mode 12 9 3 12 9 4 Public User Access If user authentication settings have been specified and public user access is permitted there are two methods for authenticating the public user Allow Touch Public User in the authentication screen to display the Basic Screen and operate the machine ON Without Login The machine can be used without authentication when logging on as a public user When logging on as an authorized user the Access key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen The default setting is Restrict i Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 4 User Authentication Account Track The User Authentication Account Track screen appears 3 Touch 1 General Settings 4 Touch Public User Access Buttons for the available settings appear D To
372. istrator to change the passwords to meet the following conditions Q Detail The following conditions apply to the characters used in passwords Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated Symbols other than the plus sign and quotation mark can be used Conditions of the password rules Administrator password Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols e Apassword that consists of a repetition of the same charac ter cannot be registered e The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered Note Use when specifying administrator settings User passwords Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering changing 8 or more alphanumeric characters and symbols e Apassword that consists of a repetition of the same charac ter cannot be registered e The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered amp Note Use when specifying user authentication settings Account passwords Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols e A password that consists of a repetition of the same charac ter cannot be registered e The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered amp Note Use when specifying account track settings bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 85 Utility
373. it To print touch Print To change setting touch Change Setting Number of Sets Change Setting 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 99 Ifthe Separate Scan Output Method parameter is set to Batch Print the copy settings can be changed To change the copy settings touch Change Setting and then touch OK after changing the settings as desired Hane Status COPY StopPrint Job Details The settings for the proof copy can be changed Press Start to restart Job No 344 Change Setting Application Page Margin A Sheet Covers Chapter Insert 4 Stamps Composition 4 Finishing 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 3 4 Scanning a multi page original from the original glass When making double sided or combined copies using the original glass place each page of a multi page original on the original glass to scan it The following procedure describes how to place single sided original pages on the original glass to make double sided copies Y The output method used with the Separate Scan setting can be set to Page Print or Batch Print As a default Page Print is selected Y For details on the output method used with the Separate Scan setting refer to Copier Settings on page 12 21 1 Lift open the ADF 2 Position the first page or the first side of the origin
374. it may not operate correctly When using a USB hub be sure to use a self powered USB hub that can provide 500 mA or more After connecting the authentication unit wait at least 5 seconds before operating it bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 15 1 3 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 4 Start up Data Administrator and then import the device information for the machine For details on importing the device information refer to the user manual for Data Administrator KONICA MINOLTA PageScope Data Administrator Authentication settings Address settings Default Gro TEOR J Eie Edit Tool Window Help EA TOP Registration of Device Network Initial Setting Eunction selection Device information j MUSEZAL Device information Eg Authentication settings Item Value Address settings Registering n 172 1622 27 G User box Group name Default Group Model name KONICA MINOLTA bizhub 751 Device addre 172 16 22 27 The latest access date and time Function The latest access date and time Authenticati 2008 02 28 13 2710 Address setti 2008 02 28 13 2710 Current status 2008 02 28 13 27 10 Type Status A Printer Attention PaperNearEmptyT ray2 lt j Scanner Ready J Power sta Sleep mode E3 Refresh from the device The Device information pane appears 5 Select User authentication settings in the Function selection pane and then click Add KONICA
375. ition Adjustment Paper Size Adjust Value Test Pattern Output A 07 11 2008 14 34 Memory 100 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed touch E and EH until the desired paper size is displayed bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 49 Utility mode Check the sample copy for the punch positions and for the center of the paper Ifthe punch positions are too far above the center of the paper touch under Adjust Value to increase the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 5 0 mm Each time or is touched the value is increased or decreased by one increment Ifthe punch positions are too far blow the center of the paper touch under Adjust Value to increase the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 5 0 mm o mp E Touch OK To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key The vertical position of the punched holes is adjusted If no adjustment of the vertical position of the punched holes was necessary in step 7 this completes the procedure Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy Check the print result Check that the vertical position of the punched holes was adjusted If more adjustment is necessary repeat steps 6 through 9 12 50 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 12 6 4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adj
376. ity Administrator Settings e Expert Adjustment Finisher Adjustment 2008 07 25 14 03 Memory 100 6 Load the selected paper in the paper tray for the post inserter and then press the Start key 7 Touch Close bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 63 12 Utility mode 12 7 Header Footer Settings Follow the procedures described below to specify headers footers used with the Stamp Composition functions available from the Application tab 12 7 1 Specifying headers footers 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 1 System Settings The System Settings screen appears 3 Touch Forward ES and then touch 2 Stamp Settings The Stamp Settings screen appears 4 Touch 1 Header Footer Settings ___Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection 2 Administrator Settings gt System Settings gt Stamp Settings utility 1 Header Footer Settings 4 2 Fax TX Settings 4 Administrator Settings System Settings 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Header Footer Settings screen appears 5 Touch New Enter new edit or delete header footer To edit a registered header footer select lesired header or footer and then touch Edit Utility Header Footer Bazester Administrator Settings System Setting
377. job is being printed next job reservation The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the original can be scanned while a copy job is being printed so that it can be printed once the current copy job is finished Y Up to 51 copy jobs including the current copy job can be reserved Y A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded original is finished The next job cannot be reserved while an original is being scanned Y To delete a reserved copy job touch Job List in the left panel and then touch Job Details For details refer to Deleting a job on page 11 8 1 When the message Ready to accept another job appears while the current job is being printed an original can be loaded and copy settings can be specified for the next copy job For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 D Ifthe Copy Operating Screen parameter in Utility mode is set to Yes touch Next Copy Job while printing to display the Basic screen n A Hane Status Auto aeeetooood Number of Originals Number of Sets 1 10 33883 Brftea Br 10 10 TNL IESE ax Ti Next Copy Job J emory 99 For details on specifying the screen that appears while printing refer to Custom Display Settings on page 12 19 2 Press the Start key 3 After the current copy job is finished the next copy job begins 3 90 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 16 Temporarily stopping scannin
378. justments are available Function Description Density The print image density can be adjusted to one of nine levels Each time Lighter or Darker is touched the density is lightened or darkened by one level Touch Standard to select the middle setting of the nine levels Touch Auto to automatically adjust the density level according to the original being copied Background Removal The density of the background color of the original can be adjusted to one of nine levels Each time Light or Dark is touched the background density is lightened or dark ened by one level Touch Standard to select the middle setting of the nine levels The following procedures describe how to specify the density settings bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 61 3 Basic copy operations 3 10 1 Adjusting the print density Density settings 1 In the Basic screen touch Density Background Ready to copy Copies Check Job WD original setting original Type Application Density Duplex Background Combine user T Nare Status we r Auto DL Background Auto paper Removal Select oilololotolalaiaa 11 a mf E E es Finishing Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Density Background Removal screen appears 2 Select the desired Density setting Job List Ready to copy Copies J original Setting origina
379. k space 100 MB or more Monitor 800 x 600 pixels 16 bit color or more Network TCP IP protocol Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 SP1 or later Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Windows 2000 Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 SP2 Windows XP Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 SP1 Windows Vista Interface USB 1 1 or later Supported operating systems Windows 2000 Professional SP4 Windows XP Professional SP3 or later Windows XP Professional x64 Edition SP2 or later Windows Vista Enterprise SP2 or later Windows Vista Ultimate SP2 or later Supports 32 bit x86 64 bit x64 environment 6 2 13 Other options Image Controller IC 208 Mount Kit MK 716 Fax Kit FK 502 Hard Disk HD 510 Staple Kit SK 602 Staple MS 10A Staple MS 5C Key Counter Kit Key Counter Socket Security Kit SC 506 Working Table WT 504 Local Interface Kit EK 703 i Option LK 101 i Option LK 102 Upgrade Kit UK 202 6 12 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 Copy paper originals Copy paper originals 7 ee 7 Copy paper originals 7 1 Copy paper Available paper size type is restricted in each equipment 7 1 1 Paper tray and equipment This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading copy paper Main unit trays Tray 1 2 3 and 4 e Bypass tray Large capacity unit LU 405 406 Also the following equipment is provided for conveying delivering copies ADU Automatic Duplex Unit built in to the main unit Finisher FS 524 built in staple unit
380. k the counter To clear the counters for the current account touch Clear Counter in the Counter Details screen for the current account A confirmation message appears asking whether the counter should be cleared To clear the counters for the displayed account touch Yes in the confirmation message screen and then touch OK The maximum number allowed is not cleared To clear the counters for all accounts touch Reset All Counters in the Account Track Counter screen containing a list of all accounts A confirmation message appears asking whether the counters should be cleared To clear the counters for all accounts touch Yes in the confirmation message screen and then touch OK The maximum number allowed is not cleared inistrator Settings gt Account Track Counter gt Counter Details utility Copy Print Scan Fax Administrator Total Max Allowance Large Size SELES Print 0 0 E Account Track Setting Account Track Counter a ter counter vetatis 02 02 2008 10 10 100 Memory Touch Close 12 84 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 11 12 11 1 Password Rules If password rules have been applied the following limitations are applied to the passwords in order to increase security If password rules are applied and already specified passwords do not meet the password rules those passwords are not accepted when they are entered In that case ask the admin
381. kit must be purchased separately User manual Fax Driver Operations This user manual contains details of the fax driver functions that can be used to send a fax directly from a computer Refer to this user manual for operating procedures on using the PC FAX functions In order to use the fax functions the optional fax kit must be purchased separately User manual Network Administrator This user manual contains descriptions on setting methods for each function utilizing network connection mainly using the PageScope Web Connection Refer to this user manual for details on using network functions bizhub 751 601 Version 2 1 11 Introduction User manual Advanced Function Operations This manual describes overview and usage of functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and enabling its function and functions that become available by connecting the MFP with applications In order to use the functions effectively please read this manual bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 Before making copies Before making copies kK 2 Before making copies 2 1 Machine configuration 2 1 1 Options bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 3 Before making copies No Part name Description 1 Main u
382. l bizhub 751 601 Version 2 10 5 10 Care of the machine 10 1 7 Care of Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 Reminder Before cleaning the authentication unit disconnect it from the machine Ifa force is applied to the USB port it may be damaged When cleaning the authentication unit do not allow water to enter the authentication unit otherwise the system may be damaged Never use organic solvents such as benzene or alcohol to clean the authentication unit otherwise it may be damaged Note When disconnecting or connecting the authentication unit turn off the machine with the main power switch and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable otherwise the cable may be damaged Care of the housing Frequency Once a month or when it is dirty Wipe the housing with a soft dry cloth If the housing cannot be cleaned by wiping it wash it with a cloth dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out well After the housing is cleaned rinse the cloth and wring it out well before wiping off the detergent Care of the scanner Frequency Once a month or when it is dirty or covered with fingerprints Care of the scanner Frequency Once a month or when it is dirty or covered with fingerprints Clean the scanner with a soft cloth used to wipe eyeglass len
383. l 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 4 User Authentication Account Track The User Authentication Account Track screen appears 3 Touch 7 Limiting Access to Destinations The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears 4 Touch 3 Apply Levels Groups to Users The Apply Levels Groups to Users screen appears 5 Select either Public User Box or Personal User Box as the user type and then touch the button for the desired User Specify the group that the user belongs to or the access level allowed inistrator settings gt _ it Access to Destinations gt Apply Levels Groups to Users Public User Box User Name utility Administrator Settings Level Seteeted croups Level 0 00 No User Name 0001 User1 1 1 yee Authentication account Track Limiting Access to Destinations 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Public User Box and Personal User Box settings appear only when access by a public user is permitted If use by a public user is permitted Public appears as the user name As the default level 0 is specified 12 14 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 6 Touch the button for the desired setting Both an access permission level and an access permission
384. l Number 4 02 26 2010 09 44 Memory 90 The Header Footer screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 87 Application functions O NOA Under Recall Header Footer touch the button of the header footer to be used and then touch OK Application gt Stamp Composition gt Header Footer Recall Header Footer Mode Check Tocheck or temporarily change the header footer settings touch Check Change Temporarily Job List These settings can be changed temporarily Copies Application gt Header Footer gt Check Change Temporarily Header Settings Footer Settings auyeckorer 100 0 Do Not Print Do Not Print 1st Page Only Text Size E a im a nt Position Check Details Top Left Botton Left 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch OK and then touch Close Specify any other desired copy settings Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies Press the Start key 8 88 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 8 15 10 Printing the distribution control number Distribution Control Number function 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Touch Application and then touch Stamp Composition To cancel
385. l Type _ Application ight Standard Dark 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 Each time Light or Dark is touched the density is lightened or darkened by one level To select the center setting default setting touch Standard Touch Auto to automatically adjust the density level according to the original being copied To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key 3 Touch OK 3 62 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 10 2 Adjusting the background density Background removal settings 1 In the Basic screen touch Density Background Check Job Hane Status Job Details Ready to copy Copies Densitys Duplexs Background Combine Density j Auto DLJ Background Auto paper Removal Select ololololotaimimimia J ice 4 Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Original Setting Original Type J Application The Density Background Removal screen appears 2 Select the desired Background Removal setting i Job List Ready to copy copies original Setting original Type C aplication f Paper Zoom Background Removal i
386. l change the print side to the reverse side Ifa special paper type is selected that tray is not selected automatically with the Auto Paper setting The auto tray switch feature applies only to the trays specified with the same paper type setting 1 Press the Utility Counter Utility Counter Al Touch 2 User Settings 1 System Settings 3 Paper Tray Settings and 5 Paper Type Size Settings in sequence Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection Utility gt System Settings gt Paper Tray Settings auto at Post Inserter Alert DisplL Utility 1 Se2chi8A settings 6 ger E Settin 2 Auto Tray Switch ON OFF 4 3 No Matching Paper an Tray Setting User Settings System Settings 4 Print Lists 4 5 Paper Type Size Settings 06 19 2008 11 07 Memory 100 The Paper Type Settings screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 29 7 Copy paper originals 3 Touchto highlight the desired tray key under Paper Tray in the left side area of the screen then touch Paper Type on the right side buis Select paper type and size for each Tray Utility gt System Settings gt Paper Type Size Settings Paper Tray Paper Type Settings Paper Type A4 D u Baper Utility User Settings Special Size Settings 1 System Settings 3 A4 D 22 08 2008 15 05 Memory 100 The Paper Type screen appears 4 Touch the desired paper type ke
387. l keys specify the copy settings to be registered in the copy program Can the current settings be checked gt To check the currently specified copy settings touch Check Job in the left panel and then touch Job Details For details refer to Checking the copy settings Check Job on page 4 3 2 Press the Mode Memory key The Recall Copy Program screen appears Mode Memory Ca 3 From the copy program buttons that appear in the screen touch the button where you wish to store the copy settings and then touch Register Program There are three Recall Copy Program screens Touch EE and EF to display a different screen If 30 copy programs have been registered delete an unnecessary copy program For details on deleting copy programs refer to Deleting a copy program on page 4 19 Delete __ The Register Copy Program screen appears 4 16 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 4 Use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the name of the copy program The program name can contain a maximum of 16 characters For details on typing in text refer to Entering text on page 15 3 The current copy mode i ill be red Type in the program name using the keyboard or keypad Press C to delete the entered program name Recall Copy Program gt Register Copy Progr
388. l not pressed close enough against the original glass Position the original so that it is pressed closely against the original glass See p 3 10 The printed output is blur ry Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper See p 2 50 p 2 51 and p 2 55 Was the original not pressed close enough against the original glass Position the original so that it is pressed closely against the original glass See p 3 10 There are dark specks or spots throughout the print ed output There are streaks in the printed output Is the original glass dirty Wipe the glass with a soft dry cloth See p 10 3 Is the left partition glass dirty Clean the left partition glass with a soft dry cloth See p 10 3 Is the document pad dirty Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent See p 10 4 Was the original printed on highly translucent material such as diazo photosensitive paper or OHP transparencies Place a blank sheet of paper on top of the original See p 3 10 Is a double sided original being copied If a thin double sided original is be ing copied the print on the back side may be reproduced in the copy Touch Light on the Back ground Removal screen to select a lighter background density See p 3 52 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 43 Troubleshooting Symptom Possible cause Remedy
389. lain paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g m to 90 g m and is already printed with a company name or preset text 6 Colored Paper Select this setting when plain colored paper weighing from 60 g m to 90 g m is load ed 7 Tab Paper 1 Select this setting when tab paper is loaded 8 Trace Paper Select this setting when trace paper is loaded 9 User Paper 1 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g m to 90 g m and does not match with any other paper type For details contact your service represent ative 10 User Paper 2 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g m to 90 g m and does not match with any other paper type For details contact your service represent ative 11 User Paper 3 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g m to 90 g m and does not match with any other paper type For details contact your service represent ative 12 Recycled Select this setting when using recycled paper 13 Fine Select this setting when high quality paper is loaded i 14 Labe Select this setting when label sheets are loaded an bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 7 Copy paper originals 7 1 6 7 1 7 7 1 8 Precautions for paper Do not use the following types of paper Otherwise decreased print quality paper misfeeds or damage may result OHP transparencies that have already been fed through the machine even if the transparency
390. lay a different list of preset or registered stamps Only one stamp can be selected Select the desired setting under Pages To print the stamp only on the front cover touch 1st Page Only The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet Insert Sheet and Chapters functions bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 6 Touch Print Position and then select the printing position Print Position Fine Tune To make fine adjustments to the printing position touch Adjust Position Select the desired direction under Left amp Right Adjustment or Top amp Bottom Adjustment touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction touch and to specify the adjustment amount and then touch OK If a decimal value is displayed in the screen press the C clear key and then use the keypad to type in the adjustment amount For details on switching between decimal and fraction values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value i Select item and specify the settings Copies JobList using the keypad or keys Application gt Pr
391. led Blank Page Print Settings Description Default Setting Select whether or not stamps and overlays are printed on blank pages Do Not Print Density for Original Type Description Default Setting Shift the exposure level darker lighter within 6 levels for each original type which will be Text Photo 3 reflected to 9 levels of the Density setting available on the Basic screen Text 3 Photo 3 Dot Matrix Original 2 12 18 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode Page Number Print Position Description Default Setting Specify the print position of the stamp on back pages when duplex printing and booklet All the same are used in combination amp eee Note Output Settings Blank Page Print Settings Density for Original Type and Page Number Print Position appear only if the Administrator Security Levels parameter in Administrator mode s set to Level 2 12 3 2 Custom Display Settings Copier Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Default Tab Specify the default display for the Basic screen in Copy Basic mode e Basic This is the normal basic display e Quick Copy Displays all selectable items for the Paper function Zoom function and Duplex Combine function The normal Basic screen appears as a different tab Shortcut Key 1 Shortcut Key 2 Shortcut keys for frequently used Application functions can OFF be added
392. llowing chart shows the possible combinations of standard size paper that can be used with the Mixed Original setting Item Description Original paper weight 50 g m to 200 g m Auto original size detect Two types of size combination are determined by the ADF guide width Width of A3 Ga A4 d A3 Ga B4 ca A4 Ga Q B5 U A5 U Width of B4 Ga B5 B4 aa A4 B5 A5 U Width of A4 Ga A5 d A4 a B5 A5 D Width of A5 Ga A5 Ga B6 Ga Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity Z Folded Original Setting 100 sheets 80 g m Item Description Original paper weight 50 g m to 200 g m Original size 100 mm x 139 7 mm to 297 mm x 431 8 mm Auto original size detect A3 Ga to A5 Ga 11 x 17 Ga 8 1 2 x 11 U Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets 80 g m bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 31 Copy paper originals 7 4 2 Tab Original Setting Description Original paper weight 50 g m to 200 g m Original size A3 Ga B4 ca A4 U BS 8 1 2 x 14 Ga 8 1 2 x 11 G Q Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets 80 g m Precautions for loading originals into the ADF The following types of original should not be positioned into the ADF otherwise paper misfeeds damage to the original or the machine trouble may occur Wrinkled folded curled or torn orig
393. lose the front door 9 20 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box 9 9 3 2 To empty the hole punch scrap box of the Z Folding Unit Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole punch scrap box Open the front door Pull out the hole punch scrap box Empty the hole punch scrap box 4 Insert the hole punch scrap box into its original position Close the front door bizhub 751 601 Version 2 9 21 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box 9 22 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 O Care of the machine Care of the machine 1 0 10 Care of the machine 10 1 Cleaning This section describes the procedures for cleaning each part Be sure to turn off the main power switch before cleaning it 10 1 1 Cleaning the left partition glass Keep the glass clean otherwise soil marks may be copied resulting in dark lines on the copies Raise the ADF and clean the left partition glass by wiping it with a soft dry cloth amp Reminder Never use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean the left partition glass 10 1 2 Cleaning the original glass Keep the glass clean otherwise spots may be copied Raise the ADF and clean the surface of
394. ltiple destinations that the data was sent to with broadcast transmission To view the information touch Detail bizhub 751 601 Version 2 11 11 Managing jobs 11 2 4 Displaying the Current Jobs list stored jobs and active jobs The Current Jobs list of received print jobs for Copy mode and Fax mode and for computer printing is displayed Touch Job List in the left panel and then touch Job Details The Job List screen appears Touch the button for the desired list Allows you to check jobs currently running or those in queue Receive Save NO NSne Status Document Nane Z orca Org e8 Delete 37 COPY Printing 10 10 11 38 COPY PrintWait 10 10 1 0 Increase Priority 4 Release Held Job 4 Job Details 2 02 2008 10 10 To display the stored jobs touch Release Held Job to display the Release Held Job screen Select desired job to print and press Start To copy 1 set for proofing press Proof Copy Release Held Job No Nane status Document Name S orea 39 COPY Serea 10 10 To return to the Job List screen touch Cancel Q Detail For details on the function of each button refer to Job List screens on page 11 4 From the Release Held Job screen proof copies of stored jobs can be printed For details refer to Printing a proof copy of a stored job on page 11 14 Stored jobs can be printed from the Release Held Job screen For detail
395. lue is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value Left amp Right Adjustment Top amp Bottom Adjustment What are the limits on the adjustment amount gt The print position can be finely adjusted in 0 1 mm increments Can no adjustment be made gt To make no left right or up down adjustments touch No Adjustment 7 ff necessary specify the other settings To also specify settings for the Cover Sheet Insert Sheet and Chapters Application functions touch Insert Sheet Setting and then select the settings for the pages to be printed ob list Ready to copy Application gt Page Number nsert Sheet Setting Copies Se ece2e 100 0 Print on Back Cover only Do not print Page Number Skip the Pagecs gt 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet Insert Sheet and Chapters functions are only counted but page numbers are not printed on them If Print on Back Cover Only or Do Not Print Page Number is selected under Cover Sheet page numbers are printed starting with 2 in single sided copies and starting with 3 in double sided copies If Do
396. mal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value To cancel changes to the settings touch Cancel i Specify the size using the keypad or the Copies Tot menory buttons Change Tray Settings gt Bypass gt Custom Size u a E x eors 2 8 Y EE eor oOo is 22 08 2008 14 28 Henory 100 Can paper sizes be stored Five non standard paper sizes can be stored gt To recall a stored paper size touch the corresponding memory key gt The names memory1 through memory5 can be changed For details on changing the names refer to Storing a non standard paper size Custom size settings on page 7 14 v For details on storing paper sizes refer to Storing a non standard paper size Custom size settings on page 7 14 6 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next two screens that appear The Basic screen appears again bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 7 2 4 Storing a non standard paper size Custom size set
397. manual of the Copy Protection Utility The selected repeating stamp formats appear in a column at the center of the screen Up to eight text lines can be combined Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected Application gt Stamp Repeat gt Preset Stamp Preset Stamp Type 8 74 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 Touching Date Time displays the Stamp Repeat gt Date Time screen Select the desired settings under Date Type and Time Type and then touch OK The repeating stamp date and time that is printed is the date and time when the original is scanned f Job List Specify whether you wish to apply Copies 4 the date and time to the document lt _ Application gt Stamp Repeat gt Date Time BuysceoPer 100 0 Used Space Date Format Time Format Jan 23 2007 23 1 07 13 23 ve ne J 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touching Other displays a screen for specifying settings for other stamps Touch the button for the desired stamp and then touch OK To cancel the changes to the settings in each repeating stamp settings screen touch No To print the copy job number touch Yes under Job Number To print the serial number of this machine touch Yes under Serial Number For details on specifying settings for the serial number contact your
398. matic system reset operation is per formed System Auto Reset Time 1 Minute Auto Reset Select the setting between 1 and 9 minutes or OFF for the desired length of time until the au tomatic panel reset operation is performed for each mode Copy Scan Fax and Box Copy 1 Minute Scan Fax 1 Minute Box 1 Minute When Account is changed Job Reset Select whether or not the settings are reset initial ized when the user has changed This machine detects that the user has changed when the optional key counter has been removed or when the user has logged off if user authentica tion or account track settings are specified Reset When original is set on ADF Select whether or not the settings are reset when an original is loaded into the automatic document feeder Do Not Reset Next Job Staple Setting Select whether the same Staple setting from the previous job is set or the setting is canceled when that job begins and the settings for the next job can be specified OFF Original Set Bind Direction Select whether the same Original Direction and Binding Position settings from the previous job are set or the settings are canceled when that job be gins and the settings for the next job can be spec ified OFF Reset Data After Job Select whether or not to reset the address and other settings after scanning or fax transmission When Confirm with User is specified whether o
399. may cause damage 2 6 Loading paper into the LCT LU 405 LU 406 Qo Note LCT is the optional Large capacity unit LU 405 LU 406 Reminder If the machine is turned off the bottom plate cannot be raised In addition the bottom plate cannot be lowered even after the tray bottom plate lower button is pressed When loading paper into the LCT be sure that the machine is turned on with both the main power switch and the auxiliary power key To load paper LCT Open the upper cover Press the tray bottom plate lower button LU 405 The tray bottom plate is lowered LU 406 2 52 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies Load the paper into the tray Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the tray bottom plate cannot be lowered any further Close the upper cover LU 406 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies Reminder Do not load the LCT with paper of other sizes than previously specified Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack does not exceed the W mark Make sure that the trailing edge stopper is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper If there is space between the trailing edge stopper and the paper the paper will not be fed correctly 2 54 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 2 7 Loading paper into the bypass tray Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto pa
400. me size as the original Otherwise select the Auto Zoom setting to enlarge the copy to the selected paper size See p 3 36 Is the orientation of the original dif ferent from the orientation of the paper with a Zoom setting of Full Size 100 0 Select a paper size that is the same size as the original Otherwise se lect a paper orientation that is the same as that of the original Was the copy reduced to a size smaller than the paper with a re duced zoom ratio specified Select a zoom ratio that adjusts the original size to the selected paper size See p 3 36 Otherwise select the Auto Zoom setting to reduce the copy to the selected paper size See p 3 39 Even though the paper misfeed was cleared cop ies cannot be produced Are there paper misfeeds at other locations Check the touch panel for other paper misfeed indications and then remove any misfed paper at all other locations See p 5 7 Printing with the 2 Sided gt 1 Sided or 2 Sided gt 2 Sided settings are not possible Have settings been selected that cannot be combined Check the combinations of the se lected settings Copying is not possible even though the password is entered on a machine with user authentica tion account track settings specified Did the message Your account has reached its maximum allow ance appear Contact your administrator ADF The original is not
401. metric Authentication Unit AU101 Click Finish to exit the wizard Data Administrator Bio Plugin is installed and the setup is completed Registering users amp Reminder In order to register users with Data Administrator the authentication unit must be connected to the USB port of the computer and the computer and this machine must be connected over a network o USB Network 12 This machine Computer Authentication unit 1 If the authentication unit is connected to the machine turn off the machine with the main power switch and then disconnect the authentication unit If the authentication unit is connected to the computer continue with step 4 When the machine is turned off then on again with the main power switch wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable otherwise the cable may be damaged 2 Turnon the machine with the main power switch 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer installed with Data Administrator Do not connect other USB devices to the same port where the authentication unit is connected If enough USB power is not provided the authentication un
402. mission jobs Save Lists jobs for saving documents in user boxes Note As the factory default the Current Jobs list on the Print tab is displayed in the Job List screen The screen for each function listed above can be displayed from any other Job List screen However if a different tab is selected while a setting is being changed that setting is canceled A Current Jobs list and a Job History list can be displayed for each function Current Jobs Lists jobs that are queued and being performed allowing you to check the current status of the machine e Job History Lists jobs that have been completed including jobs that were not performed due to an error allowing you to check the history and result of all jobs The type of jobs to be displayed can be selected from the Current Jobs list and Job History list For example the lists of stored jobs and active jobs can be displayed in the Current Jobs list on the Print tab and the lists of deleted jobs completed jobs and all jobs can be displayed in the Job History list The types of jobs that can be selected differ depending on the selected tab The function of each button in the Job List screens is described below ame Do 37 COPY Printing 38 COPY PrintWait 11 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Managing jobs 11 Button name Description Print button Touch to display the Print tab of the Job List screen Send button Touch to display the Send tab of the Job List s
403. mity Product Type Authentication unit Biometric type Product Name AU 201 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference and this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interface by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help A WARNING The design and pro
404. mpany s assumes no responsibility for any damage including lost profits or other related damages caused by this product or its use as a result of operations not described in this information For disclaimers and warranty and liability details refer to the user manual Authentication unit Biometric type AU 201 This product is designed manufactured and intended for general business use Do not use it for applications requiring high reliability and which may have an extreme impact on lives and property Applications requiring high reliability Chemical plant management medical equipment management and emergency communications management Use with other authentication devices is not guaranteed In order to incorporate improvements in the product the specifications concerning this product are subject to change without notice For safe use Warning Symbol e Do not this product near water otherwise it may be damaged e Do not cut damage modify or forcefully bend the USB cable A malfunction may occur as a result of a damaged or cut USB cable e Do not disassembly this device otherwise it may be damaged e Do not store the IC card within 40 mm of the card scanning area OOOO bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 3 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 Regulation notices USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES For U S A Users FCC part 15 FCC Declaration of Confor
405. must be between 182 mm and 297 mm The paper length must be between 182 mm and 432 mm Ifa Punch setting is to be selected select the orientation in which the original is positioned lf an Original Direction setting is not selected holes may not be punched in the copies as desired For details on specifying the original orientation refer to Selecting the original orientation Original Direction settings on page 3 26 amp Note The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher Tray Paper Weight Paper Size Main finishing tray Plain paper 60 g m to 2 Hole A3 Ga to AS Ga fy 11 x 17 Ga to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Tray 2 90 g m thick paper Foolscap 8K Ga 16K Ga 91 g m to 128 g m 4 Hole A3 ca B4 ca A4 BS Q 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 11 amp 8K aa 16K U Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga 8 x 13 Ga one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative 3 74 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 1 In the Basic screen touch Finishing Job Details Ready to copy Check Job Density Background Status Density Auto Background Removal piolololota imma 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 Copies The Finishing screen appears 2 Under Punch touch 2 Hole or 4 Hole wist Ready to
406. n on page 12 42 2 Touch 1 System Settings The System Settings screen appears 3 Touch 7 Expert Adjustment The Expert Adjustment screen appears 4 Touch 5 Finisher Adjustment The Finisher Adjustment screen appears 5 Touch 8 1st Z Fold Position Adjustment or 9 2nd Z Fold Position Adjustment The Z Fold Position Adjustment screen appears elect a paper size and then use keys to specify the adjustment inistrator Settings gt Finisher Adjust gt 1st Z Fold Position Adjustment Paper Size Adjust Value B4 D Administrator Settings FE 147 D miei ix D 8K D Finisher Adjustment 06 19 2008 17 06 Lied 100 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted 12 58 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 7 Check the folding positions in the sample copy If the folding position is too far on the left side of the paper touch under Adjust Value to increase the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 12 7 mm Each time or is touched the value is increased or decreased by one increment 1st Z fold position 2nd Z fold position EP a If the folding position is too far on the right side of the paper touch under Adjust Value to increase the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 12 8 mm 1st Z fold position 2nd Z fold position a F Adjust values so that the distance between the left edge of the paper and the 2nd Z folding position is 2mm or more
407. n page 8 55 Frame Erase T TE WA Center Erase tt TT TT WA Non Image Area Erase WA 8 50 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 14 1 Erasing black marks along borders Erase function Copies can be produced by erasing unwanted areas around the original such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of punched holes With frame erasing the same width can be erased along all four sides of the original or a different width can be erased along each side of the original 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Touch Application and then touch Erase To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled Job List Ready to copy Basic original setting auieceere 100 0 Eji Sheet covers Chapter insert 4 O F Page Margin Image Adjust 7S E Stamp Compos ition Neg Pos Reverse T Check Details 4 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Original Type Book Copy Repeat Save in User Box A 4 J Booklet Si
408. n 2 Troubleshooting 5 Lift up the paper take up roller and then remove any paper remaining in the tray 4 Load the paper into the tray again lower the paper take up roller and then close the tray Open the vertical transport door Ifa large capacity unit is installed open its large capacity tray front door and then open the vertical transport door Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section Close the vertical transport door bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 13 5 Troubleshooting 5 2 6 Clearing a paper misfeed in the LCT Large Capacity Unit 5 amp Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Open the large capacity tray front door Remove any misfed paper Open the upper cover Lift up the paper take up roller and then remove any paper remaining in the tray 5 14 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting Load the paper into the tray again lower the paper take up roller and then close the upper cover 5 2 7 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray 6 amp eee Note For details of the locations of paper misfeed s refer to Paper misfeed indications on pa
409. n A Save in User Box A 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Book Copy Repeat screen appears 4 Touch Book Copy Copies Joblist Ready to copy Buto Pape y SeYece e 100 0 zal B6 Inage Repeat f Page Separation Check Details 06 19 2008 14 49 Memory 100 The Book Copy screen appears 8 28 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 5 Touch the button for the desired setting Job List Select from the following Copies Application gt A4 D 100 0 Book Spread Front Cover s B5eR cSuer 07 11 2008 11 45 Memory 100 If Separation Front Cover or Front and Back Cover is selected Binding Position appears Select the binding position of the original If desired specify a Book Erase function Touch the button for the erasing method touch and to specify the width of the area to be erased and then touch OK Touch lt gt on the Frame Erase screen Center Erase screen to switch between the integer and the fraction specify the width to be erased and then touch OK If a decimal value is displayed in the Frame Erase screen Center Erase screen use the keypad to type in the setting For details on switching between decimal and fraction
410. n Specify whether to bring the machine to the same condition ON Setting as the main power off when the machine enters Sleep mode or the sub power switch is turned off Power Save Key Select which low power mode is entered when the Power Low Power Save key is pressed e Low Power The touch panel goes off and the machine enters a mode where it conserves energy e Sleep Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Power Save mode the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled therefore taking more preparation time than Power Save mode Enter Power Save Mode Specify settings for faxing For details refer to the User man Normal ual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations 4 This item appears when an optional fax kit hard disk or the image controller IC 208 is not installed the USB memory is not connected and the weekly timer is set to OFF Output Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Print Fax Output Specify settings for printing For details refer to the User manual Setting Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations and the User manual Print Operations Output Tray Set Select the finishing tray for each type of job copies printouts re Copy Tray 2 tings ports and faxes Printer Tray 2 Print Reports Tray 2 Fax Tray 2 Shift Output Each Select whether or not printed copies are fed out shifted when Off Yes Job set is selected while a finisher is installed e Yes Pages are fed out shif
411. n be displayed so that the total number of prints since counting started can be viewed In addition the list of counters can be printed Press the Utility Counter key 2 Touch Meter Count and then touch Check Details in the left panel JobList se the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection E z s Meter Count Total Counter 4800 Original Counter 4200 Paper Counter 5800 Total Duplex 0 Memory 100 Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 3 The Meter Count screen appears Job List Mater comt al Number Meter Count Large Size Meter Count Copy Total Counter aeoo f Prin Original Counter 4200 Fax Scan Print Fax Scan Read Paper Counter 5800 Fax TX Total Duplex 0 Fax RX Print List 4 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Memory 100 Can the list of counters be printed gt Touch Print List select the paper size and then press the Start key 4 Touch Close and then touch Close in the next screen that appears The Basic screen appears again amp Note The list of counters can be displayed even while the machine is copying or printing 10 8 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Care of the machine 10 10 3 When the message It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device appears A periodic maintenance will be required after 250 000 copies for bizhub 751 601 If the message
412. n be printed by authenticating Place your finger on the authentication Unit user Print amp Access Access Hane Status Delete _ Job Details 03 03 2010 14 10 Memory 100 Begin Printing The print job is printed Print amp Access The print job is printed and the user is logged in to the Basic screen Access The print job is not printed and the user is logged in to the Basic screen Make sure that either Begin Printing or Print amp Access is selected You can also select Access and select a print job to print For details refer to Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel on page 14 32 Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1 to many authentication has been specified Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1 to 1 authentication has been specified The user is authenticated and the print job is printed bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 31 41 4 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel Follow the procedure described below to select the document to be printed from those saved in the ID amp Print user box 1 Touch Screen Operation lt When IC card authentication has been specified gt Documents stored in the ID amp Print User Box can be printed by authenticating Pl
413. n making double sided copies the image orientation can be adjusted by specifying the position of the binding margin In addition the image orientation can be adjusted without creating a binding margin Left setting KZA WUMMUMYY Q Detail f the positions of the staples or punched holes are different from the binding position the positions of the staples or punched holes are given priority 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Touch Application and then touch Page Margin To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled gt IBE 0 0 a Application A A The Page Margin screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 41 Application functions 3 Select the position of the binding margin Job List cify page margin using the keypad If the Copies l original is not set upright select direction pp cation gt Page Margin A4 D 100 0 Margin Position Adjust Value Check Details As ca Fle uit 25 08 2008 09 09 Memory 100 o A 9 gt i gt To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key To cancel the Page Margin function touch No If
414. n the tray is pulled out Weight Approx 14 kg T Cannot be used with Finishing settings 2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 ta 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 8 x 13 amp one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Specifications Output Tray OT 505 Item Description Name OT 505 Function Paper output tray for main unit Paper types Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m thick paper 91 g m to 200 g m thin paper 50 g m to 59 g m OHP transparencies trace paper tab paper Output tray capacity Max 150 sheets Dimensions 215 335 W x 365 D x 70 H mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out Weight Approx 0 56 kg Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 Item Description Name AU 101 Compatible finger width 10 mm to less than 25 mm Interface USB 2 0 Dimensions Approx 78 mm W x 95 mm D x 55 mm H Weight Approx 150 g not including the USB cable Power consumption DC 5 V 500 mA Environment conditions Temperature 10 to 35 C when operating a Humidity 10 to 80 Must be no condensation Environment conditions Temperature 10 to 60 C when not operating Humidity 10 to 80 Must be no condensation Computer Processor PC AT compatible 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more Hard disk drive Ava
415. n the z folding transport unit to its original position When returning the Z folding transport unit to its original position do not grab any part other than handle FN2 otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched 11 gt Close the front door 5 42 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 3 Simple troubleshooting Symptom Possible cause Remedy Main unit The machine does not start up when the main power switch is turned on Is no power supplied from the elec trical outlet Correctly insert the power supply plug into the electrical outlet Has the Power auxiliary power key been turned on Turn on the Power auxiliary pow er key Copying does not start Is the right front door of the ma chine open Securely close the upper right side door of the machine Is there no paper that matches the original Load paper of the appropriate size into the paper tray The printed output is too light Is the copy density set too light Touch Dark in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy densi ty See p 3 61 Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper See p 2 50 p 2 51 and p 2 55 The printed output is too dark Is the copy density set too dark Touch Light in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy densi ty See p 3 63 Was the origina
416. naging jobs 4 Inthe Change Setting screen change the copy settings as desired and then touch OK The settings for the selected job can changed from its original settings To print with the following settings press Start Application Page Margin A Sheet Cover 7 Chapter Insert 4 stamps Composition 4 i A N Finishing 2 2008 10 10 Is there more information about the settings Refer to the appropriate section 9 Cana proof copy be printed gt For details on printing a proof copy refer to Printing a proof copy of a stored job on page 11 14 5 Inthe Release Held Job screen touch OK or press the Start key The stored job appears in the Current Jobs list and is printed How is the removal of a job from the Held Jobs list stopped gt Touch Cancel 11 16 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Managing jobs 11 2 8 Increasing printing priority The next job to be printed after the current job being printed can be selected If an Administrator mode parameter was set so that the output priority of jobs cannot be changed Increase Priority does not appear and the output priority of the jobs cannot be specified If the job currently being printed can be interrupted printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins Printing of the interrupted job is automatically restarted once printing for the job given priority is finished If the job currently being printed can
417. ncrements 1 In the Basic screen touch Zoom Copies Ready to copy a Check Job nner es p original setting original Type Application BERRA Ina PERATA Hare Status Density Auto J j Regooag guieearer d momorpmant I Er a E a in Finishing j Separate Scan _ _ Auto Rotate OFF o 02 02 2008 10 10 ied 100 The Zoom screen appears 2 Touch Full Size Job List Ready to copy Copies 1 al Setting Original Type Applicat Sefece 100 0 TACAR i 00 0 BEAR aurea 28 82 7000 Fae 200 0 86 6 81 6 Fe ABS Baraa A2 AS zz 22 08 2008 13 41 Memory 100 3 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again 3 40 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 6 3 Typing in the zoom ratio XY zoom setting By using the keypad a zoom ratio between 25 0 and 400 0 can be typed in directly without changing the height to width ratio Y Ifa value outside the allowable range is specified the message Input error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value Y The entered zoom ratio can be stored For details on storing zoom ratios refer to Storing the desired zoom ratio on page 3 48 1 In the Basic screen touch Zoom Hane Status Check Job Ready to copy Copies Density Background Ci omb
418. nd return to the screen that was displayed before the Help key was pressed 4 22 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations Help screen 2nd level Example Function Job List f Select a function using the keypad Bookmark Help gt Search by Function Copy Scan Fax User Box Job List Print Customize Image Panel Web Browser 02 02 2008 10 y Exit Close Memory m Item Description Copy Scan Fax User Box Job List Displays the first Help screen for each description Print Customize Image Panel Web Browser Q Detail The items displayed in the Help menu for the name and function of each part differ depending on the options that are installed Help screen bottom level Example Function gt Copy gt Density Background gt Density Job List f Describes functions Bookmark Function gt Density Background gt Density Bg The print density can be adjusted to one of nine levels Function Copy Density Background 02 02 2008 10 10 Exi Close Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 23 Additional copy operations Help screen bottom level Example Search by Operation gt Copying gt Copying Special Documents JobList Describes functions Bookmark When copying a doc
419. nd treated as a single copy job In addition the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation 15 8 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Appendix 1 5 Sheet Cover Chapter Insert Select from the functions that are available to edit copies as desired Sort Select this setting to separate each set of the copies The second copy set is printed after all of the first copy set is finished Staple Select a setting to staple copies together x XY Zoom Touch this button to use the keypad to specify the zoom ratio for producing an enlarged reduced copy of the loaded original Z Zoom Specify the zoom ratio of the copy bizhub 751 601 Version 2 15 9 1 5 Appendix 15 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 16 Index es A0 16 Index Symbols Current Jobs list 77 72 Power auxiliary power key 2 37 Numerics 1st Z Fold Position Adjustment 2nd Z Fold Position Adjustment 72 58 2in1 3 55 2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment 72 62 4in1 3 55 8in1 3 55 A Accessibility 4 27 Account track 2 42 Account Track Settings 72 80 ADF 3 9 7 31 15 7 Administrator Settings 72 26 Administrator Machine Setting 72 32 Authentication method 72 67 Authentication unit 2 45 2 47 Authentication unit biometric type 2 45 Authentication unit IC card type 2 47 Auto Paper setting 3 36 Auto Reset Confirmation 4 33 Auto Zoom setting 3 39 Automatic panel reset 2 34
420. ndard sizes A3 to A5 Q 11 x 17 Gato 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 a Q Foolscap 2 8K 16K wide paper ASW Ga to ASW ij 11 x 17W Ga to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W W Custom sizes 182 mm x 148 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm 128 mm x 139 mm 1 Sub finishing tray Tray 1 Standard sizes A3 Estos ca W B6 ca A6 Ga 11 x 17 Gato 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 G 9 13 x 19 Foolscap 8K Ga 16K Ga y wide paper ASW to ASW 11 x 17W Gato 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 0 Custom sizes 100 mm x 139 mm to 331 mm x 488 mm Staple Standard sizes b A3 Gato Ad W 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Q Foolscap 2 8K Ga 16K Ga wide paper ASW m to ASW p 11 x 17W Gato 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W H Custom sizes 182 mm x 139 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm Output tray capacity Main finishing tray Tray 2 B4 or larger 1500 sheets A4 to B5 3000 sheets A5 or smaller 500 sheets Sub finishing tray Tray 1 200 sheets Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets 50 sheets 60 g m to 90 g m Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consump tion 80 W or less Dimensions 680 800 when trays are pulled out W x 656 D x 990 H mm Weight 60 kg Consumables Staple cartridge T Cannot be used with Finishing settings 2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 ta 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 a 8 x 13 Ga one of which can be selected For details contact the service represen
421. ner cartridge cover Otherwise machine trouble may occur Open the toner cartridge door Pull out the cartridge holder While pulling the toner unit lever toward you pull the cartridge holder out toward you as far as possible Withdraw and pull up the used toner cartridge to remove it Remove the new toner cartridge form the box The toner within the toner cartridge may have become compacted Be sure to handle steps 5 until the toner is mostly broken up before installing the cartridge Shake the new toner cartridge by turning it over about five times bizhub 751 601 Version 2 9 5 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box Remove the cover from the new toner cartridge Set the toner cartridge making sure that it is correctly oriented With the label at the end of the toner cartridge facing up insert the bottom of the cartridge into the slot in the cartridge holder Return the cartridge holder to its original position Close the toner cartridge door 9 6 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box 9 2 Replacing the staple cartridge When the staple cartridge is empty the message Replace staple cartridge
422. ness Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 Ga 8 1 4 x 13 Ga 8 1 2 x 13 Ga 8 x 13 Gy one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative Observe the following precautions when placing the original on the original glass The size of original printed on paper in inch sizes such as 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 cannot be automatically detected The setting must be specified by the service representative For details contact the service representative If a custom sized original is positioned the Auto Paper Select and Auto Zoom settings cannot be used since the original size cannot be detected automatically If a custom sized original is positioned select the size of the paper to be copied If highly translucent or transparent original such as overhead transparencies or trace paper are positioned the original size cannot be detected automatically Place a blank sheet of paper of the same size over the original Do not place objects exceeding 6 8 kg on the original glass otherwise the original glass may be damaged If a book is placed on the original glass do not press it down extremely hard otherwise the original glass may be damaged bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 33 7 Copy paper originals 7 34 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 Application functions Application functions 8 eS 8 Application functions 8 1 Inserting paper between OHP transpar
423. ngs 38 Copy Screen 4 Fax Active Screen 5 Color Selection Set tings 6 Left Panel Display De fault 7 Search Option Settings Refer to Custom Display Settings on page 12 19 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 3 Utility mode First level menu Second level menu Third level menu Details 2 User Settings 3 Copier Settings Auto Booklet ON when Fold amp Staple Machine with SD 507 only Refer to Copier Settings on page 12 21 Auto Zoom For Combine Booklet Auto Sort Group Selection Default Copy Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings When AMS Direction is In correct Separate Scan Output Method Enlargement Rotation Auto Zoom Platen Auto Zoom ADF Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tri Fold Print Side Print Jobs During Copy Operation Automatic Image Rotation Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass 4 Scan Fax Settings Black Compression Level Refer to Scan Fax Set Default Scan Fax Settings tings on page 12 23 Default Enlarge Display Settings 5 Printer Settings 1 Basic Settings Refer to Printer Settings 2 Paper Setting on page 12 37 3 PCL Settings 4 PS Setting 5 XPS Settings 6 TIFF PDF Image Paper Setting 7 Print Reports 8 Image
424. nit Consists of a scanner a printer an ADF and paper trays 4 trays and 1 bypass tray 2 Large capacity unit LU 405 Can be loaded with up to 4 000 sheets of paper 80 g m 3 Large capacity unit LU 406 Can be loaded with up to 4 000 sheets of paper 80 g m 4 Local Interface Kit EK 703 Installed when using the machine as a printer connected directly with a PC 5 Security Kit SC 506 Installed to encode the data saved on the hard disk so that the hard disk can be used more safely 6 Hard Disk HD 510 Installed to increase the scanning capacity or enabling scanning of multiple jobs 7 Output Tray OT 505 Collects printed sheets 8 Shift Tray SF 602 Separates copies fed out at an offset 9 Z Folding Unit ZU 605 Installed with the finisher to enable Z folding and hole punching ZU 604 10 Post Inserter PI 504 Installed with the finisher to enable insertion of the cover sheet into the printed sheets In addition you can operate the finisher manually 11 Finisher FS 610 Collects printed sheets Provides selectable finishing functions sort group offset sort offset group staple face up center staple amp fold half fold and tri fold 12 Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 Installed with the finisher to enable hole punching 13 Finisher FS 525 Collects printed sheets Provides selectable finishing functions sort group offset sort offset group face up and staple 14 Finisher FS 524 Collects printed sheets Provides selectable finishing functio
425. not be interrupted a job has already been interrupted or a job was already given priority printing is interrupted after printing for the current job is finished 1 Display the Job History list of the Print tab For details on displaying the screen refer to Displaying the Current Jobs list stored jobs and active jobs on page 11 12 2 Touch Increase Priority Allows you to check jobs currently running or those in queue Send Job History A Delete 37 COPY Printing 10 10 11 38 COPY PrintWait 10 10 1 o amt Release Held Job Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 The Increase Priority screen appears 3 inthe job list touch the button for the job to be given priority to select it and then touch OK First select the job you wish to print and then touch Start Increase Priority Nane status Document Namel S orea 42 COPY Printing 10 09 43 COPY Printing 10 09 Job Details Ifthe job to be given priority is not displayed touch EJ and EH until the desired job is displayed Ifan incorrect job was selected select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it The selected job moves to the top of the list and printing of the job begins How can the change in the printing priority be stopped gt Touch Cancel bizhub 751 601 Version 2 11 17 1 1 Managing jobs 11 18 bizhub 751 601 Version 2
426. ns press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled Copies ob list Ready to copy Basic __ Original Setting Original Type amp eFec2aPer 100 0 jj ehSBt r YRS re 4 Neg Pos Reverse A O A Page Margin A Image Adjust 4 Booklet a E ei Stamp Composition A Save in User Box A _ Check Detai 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Erase screen appears 3 Touch Center Erase Job tist Ready to copy Application gt Erase auyeckerer 100 0 K Ch Frame Erase Center Erase 4 Area Erase Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Center Erase screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 53 Application functions 4 Touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction and then touch and to specify the width to be erased i Use and the keypad to specify Copies Job List the width of the area to be erased Application gt Erase gt Center Erase Auto paper Sefece A 100 0 25 08 2008 09
427. ns sort group offset sort offset group face up and staple 15 Image Controller IC 208 Installed when this machine is used for network printing and network scan ning 16 Fax Kit FK 502 Allows this machine to be used as a fax machine 17 Mount Kit MK 716 Used to install the Fax kit 18 Authentication unit biomet Scans vein patterns in the finger to verify user authentication ric type AU 101 19 Authentication unit IC card Reads the information stored on an IC card to verify user authentication type AU 201 20 Working Table WT 504 Provides an area to temporarily place originals and other materials This is also used when the authentication unit is installed 21 Key Counter Socket Required for installing the key counter 22 Key Counter Installed onto this machine to make the counter function available for printed sheets 23 i Option LK 101 Allows the Web Browser and Image Panel functions to be used from the con trol panel For details refer to the User manual Advanced Function Operations 24 i Option LK 1 02 Allows PDF encryption digital signatures and properties to be specified when transmitting PDF documents with Scan mode or User Box mode operations For details refer to the User manual Advanced Function Operations 25 Upgrade Kit UK 202 Required in order to use i Option LK 101 or i Option LK 102 Parts marked with an asterisk are not shown in the illustration 2 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Bef
428. nserter 17 cccecscceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneaeeeees 5 39 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Contents 3 5 2 21 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Z Folding Unit 20 oo eeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeneeeee 5 39 5 3 Simple troubleshooting se cece ec ka earned a aanre ae armaa aaaea araea a ei rea apai da eaea E aiara aisanana adane knipan naai 5 43 5 4 Main messages and their remedies cccseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseneaneeeseeeeaaeeesseeeaaeesenssneneeeess 5 47 6 1 Specifica OAS aaa che setae aa a rae eaa a aa ea aaa a Aiea aaaea aeiaai saeia 6 3 6 1 1 MaM Unit d araa a a a E a a a a a aa aa aa a a a aaa aa aaia 6 3 6 1 2 Automatic Document Feeder DF 614 cccccecceeceeeeeseeeceeeeeeceneeeeeeaaaeeeeeessaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeseescneeeeessenneees 6 4 6 2 Option specifications mesara aceite eed ee ceed eh iene eine ee 6 5 6 2 1 Large Capacity Whit LU 40 5r mirisa re aa et eaaa aaa rA chant Ea aa ceva suieeeases ana A AA Aaii 6 5 6 2 2 Large Capacity Unit EU40O iisen re e g a a e A ER 6 5 6 2 3 Finisher FS 2924 Pineta aN a vie aan wea ne ete oe ee ee oat 6 6 6 2 4 FiniSher FS 925 33 2 ack T T A E batieciteatatedg TA ened dia lee dikes 6 7 6 2 5 Finisher FS 610 2 2 3 5 seein Lae ta eae Rete eee ee a BA dente ad Saeed neaev ade te cae 6 8 6 2 6 Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 is i5 2c255 2h 2tesde acct bad eA aa aT E a aL a T Taa a aa E a A aN Aaaa aa Aaaa 6 9 6 2 7 Z Folding Wnit ZU 604 ZU
429. nsity Duplex Background Combine Hane Status iei Auto Background Auto Paper Removal Select S8eMHHooo g Finishing Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF 2 Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Paper screen appears Touch the button for the bypass tray Copies Job list Ready to copy original Setting original Type Appi auteceere 100 0 22 08 2008 13 39 Henory 100 Touch Change Tray Settings bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 17 Copy paper originals 4 5 Touch Wide Paper Change Tray Settings gt Bypass Paper Type Paper Size The Wide Paper screen appears Select the size of the paper to be loaded Touch and until the button for the desired paper size is displayed Job List Ready to copy Copies Change Tray Settings gt Bypass gt Wide Paper Change Size Image Adjustment Lead Edge Check Details Trail Edge 22 08 2008 14 56 Memory 100 To change the size touch Change Size The Change Size screen for oversized paper appears Specify the X and Y sides of the paper and then touch OK Touch either X or Y press the C clear key to clear the current settin
430. nt multiple recipients from OFF eration casting being specified for fax transmissions bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 27 12 Utility mode Expert Adjustment Parameter Description Default Setting Density for Original Type Shift the exposure level darker lighter within 5 lev Text 3 els for each original type which will be reflected to Text Photo 3 9 levels of the Density setting available on the Ba Photo 3 sic screen Dot Matrix Original 2 Erase Non Image Area Select the condition for Non Image Area Erase to Except Original Adjustment Erase function Glass x1 0 Non Image Area Select the setting method erasing mode and Erase Setting Specify Erase Setting original density for the Non lmage Area Erase How to Erase Rectan function gular Original Density Stand ard ADF Frame Erase Specify the erasing width for the ADF Frame Erase 3mm function Printer Leading Edge Ad Adjust the starting print position between 3 0 mm 0 0 mm Adjustment justment and 6 0 mm at the leading edge of the paper with respect to the paper feed direction Adjust ments can be specified for each paper type Centering Adjust the starting print position between 6 4 mm 0 0 mm and 6 3 mm at the left edge of the paper with re spect to the paper feed direction Vertical Adjust If the copy image is distorted stretched or com 0 0 ment pressed the paper feed speed and printing speed can be synchroni
431. nt passwords user box passwords passwords for confidential documents and the administrator password f the control panel cannot be operated even after touching Release trom the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter to specify the items whose operation restrictions are canceled or if an operation is prohibited from a failed attempt to authenticate the administrator password restart the machine Restart the machine wait for the time specified in Release Time Settings and then perform the administrator authentication amp Reminder When the machine is turned off then on again with the main power switch wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off Enhanced Security Mode Description Settings necessary for applying enhanced security mode appear Select whether or not to apply enhanced mode set tings when the necessary settings are specified For details contact your service representative HDD Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Check HDD Capacity Information concerning the hard disk capacity is displayed Overwrite Temporary Data Specify whether or not to overwrite the temporary image data NO saved on the hard disk with all operations for copying scan ning faxing and computer printing For details on the set tings refer to the User manual Box Opera
432. nticated account is registered to the account name The machine can be used simply by entering user authentication information from the next time bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 71 Utility mode 12 9 User Authentication Setting User authentication settings can be specified 12 9 1 Administrative Settings List User authentication settings can be specified to display List in the user authentication screen and the User Name screen Touch List to display a list of registered user names from which the desired user name can simply be selected The default setting is OFF 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 4 User Authentication Account Track The User Authentication Account Track screen appears 3 Touch 2 User Authentication Settings The User Authentication Setting screen appears Why is 2 User Authentication Settings not available gt 2 User Authentication Settings is not available if User Authentication on the General Settings screen is set to OFF 4 Touch 1 Administrative Settings e the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection dninistrator Settings gt User Authentication Account Track BR exert server setts coun track settins 07 25 2008 09 01 Memory 100 5 Touch User Name List Buttons for the available settings appear 6 Touch th
433. o matter which screen is displayed the registration is cancelled Otherwise continue to touch Cancel until the Basic screen is displayed The settings of a copy program cannot be changed If the copy program that was selected has been locked Edit Name and Delete do not appear For details refer to System Settings on page 12 17 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 5 1 Deleting a copy program 1 In the Recall Copy Program screen touch the button for the copy program to be deleted If the copy program to be recalled is not displayed touch E and E until the desired copy program is displayed 2 Touch Delete user Name Job Details Check Job To register a program select blank progran key and touch Register Program Programs can be recalled or deleted Recall Copy Progran SS oran Jf Edit Nane Delete 02 02 2008 10 10 Cancel Memory 100 A message appears requesting confirmation to delete the copy program Job List Touch Yes and then touch OK Are you sure you want to delete this A copy progran Program Name General Affairs 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Recall Copy Program screen appears again The copy settings registered in the copy program are erased bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 19 Additional copy operations 4 6 C
434. o specify when the message is displayed requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode As the factory default No is selected Auto Reset will cancel the settings Do you want to continue setting Yes The current settings are not reset No The current settings are reset to the default settings amp Note For details on the automatic panel reset operation refer to Automatically clearing settings Automatic panel reset on page 2 34 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen refer to Displaying the accessibility setting screen on page 4 27 2 Touch Auto Reset Confirmation or press the 4 key in the keypad FN Use the menu buttons or f keypad to make a selection Accessibility Setting Touch Panel Adjustment Z 1 2 EZEZ Key Repeat Starty Interval Time A System Auto Reset Confirmation A Z Auto Reset Confirmation Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation a e N bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 33 4 Additional copy operations The Auto Reset Confirmation screen appears 3 Touch the button for the desired display time GS Specify confirmation message length Ay of time before exiting Enlarge Display due to auto reset Auto Reset Confirmation Yes To not display the message requesting confi
435. ode 5 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 5 2 When the message misfeed detected appears If a misfeed occurs during printing the message A paper misfeed has been detected Remove the paper according to the guide or illustration appears and the location of the misfeed is indicated by a number accompanied with the procedure for clearing misfed paper on the screen At this time printing cannot continue until the misfeed is adequately cleared Misfeed Location screen A paper misfeed has been detected Remove the misfed paper according to the guide or illustration Hane Stats coPY Print Err Open the finisher door Remove the misfed paper from Z Folding Unit Tilustration Job Details 18 06 2008 17 38 Next Box Job SE 8 eax sop Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 5 Troubleshooting 5 2 1 Location of paper misfeed and illustration If paper misfeeds have occurred at multiple locations multiple numbers appear or flash The flashing number indicates the location where the paper misfeed should be cleared first A paper misfeed has been detected Remove the misfed paper according to the guide or illustration Hane Stats copy Print Err Open the finisher door Remove the misfed paper from Z Folding Unit 1lustration Job Details 18 06 2008 17 38 Next Box Job Next Fax Job Memory 100 Touching the Illustrat
436. old Unt ZU 605 2 Hole Type Hard Disk Installed User Authentication _ ON Device sabi Account Track Disable 5 Setting ON Device Paper Tray Information Tray Size Direction Paper Type Tray 1 D LEF Plain Paper Tray 2 D LEF Plain Paper Tray 3 DSEF Plain Paper Teay4 A3 D SEF Plain Paper Aa Encryption Key Software Tools OK _ Cancel __ Apply Select User Authentication under Device Option Select Device from the Setting drop down list Select ID amp Print under Device Option Select Allow from the Setting drop down list ON OO FA Click Apply and then click OK 14 24 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 Sending a print job 1 2 Open the data in the application click File and then click Print Check that the printer name has been selected in Printer Name or Select Printer If the printer is not selected click to select the printer The Print dialog box differs depending on the application General Select Printer Add Printer t Adobe PDF KONICA MINOLTA 751 601 PCL lt e Status Ready Print to file Location Comment Find Printer Page Range all Selection Current Page Number of copies 1 E O Pages 1 65535 Collate oy oH GE Enter either a single page number or a single page range For example 5 12 3 Click
437. om ratio on page 3 48 In the Basic screen touch Zoom Ready to copy Copies Check Job Density Duplex Background Density Auto E Background Auto Paper Removal Select oiolololota imma 0 1 1 Hane Status Finishing Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 nal Setting Original Type Application The Zoom screen appears Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio under Set Zoom Ratio JobList Ready to copy contes 1 J orisinal setting ive application guto Paper 199 9 Select eee AE 141 4 B4 A3 z B5 a4 A4 B4 B5 B4 27 08 2008 13 41 Memory 100 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 47 Basic copy operations 3 6 8 Storing the desired zoom ratio Three frequently used zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the Minimal setting can be stored Vv 2 If a value outside the allowable range is specified the message Input error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value To store a Minimal zoom ratio type in the desired zoom ratio between 90 0 and 99 9 The default zoom ratios 400 0 200 0 and 50 0 are stored When a new zoom ratio is stored it overwrites t
438. om ratio that is selected can be changed manually Nesi Note As the factory default Auto Display Zoom Ratio is selected The Auto Zoom for Combine Booklet parameter in Utility mode can be set so that the recommended zoom ratios are not used In that case specify the zoom ratio manually For details refer to Custom Display Settings on page 12 19 Setting Description 2in1 Select this setting to print two original pages on one page Horizontal Vertical 4in1 Select this setting to print four original Horizontal pages on one page The page arrange ment Numbering Direction setting can be specified Vertical bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 55 3 Basic copy operations Setting Description 8in1 Select this setting to print eight original Horizontal pages on one page The page arrange ment Numbering Direction setting can be specified The following procedure describes how to select a combined copy setting 3 56 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 8 1 Copying multiple original pages onto a single page Combined copy settings If a combined copy setting is selected specify the position of the binding margin and the loading orientation for the original otherwise the copies may not be printed in the desired arrangement For details on specifying the
439. ombine Nare Status Density Auto Background gute Paper Removal Sele S H8MG0000 __peiete Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 7 The Finishing screen appears 2 Touch Group Job List Ready to copy Copies QuECEIPer 100 0 22 08 2008 14 01 Memory 100 To separate each set of pages touch Yes under Offset When Offset is selected the following Finishing settings are not available Face Up Staple 3 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 67 3 Basic copy operations 3 11 3 Selecting the Output Tray Y The output tray can be selected only if the optional finisher is installed 1 In the Basic screen touch Finishing When Offset is selected the following Finishing settings are not available Face Up Staple Copies Ready to copy Check Job e I s al Setting Original Type Density Duplexs Backgr6und Combine Hane Status DeRsity Auto 2 F l ll Z Background auto Paper P Removal ta oiolololola imla 1 1 A p mi EE Separate Scan E Auto Rotate OFF Finishing Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 ___ _ _ Henory 100 The Finishing screen appears 2 Touch Output tray Copies Job list Ready to copy Finishing EI i a Corner i 2 Hole i Sefece 100 0
440. on number and then touch Edit After selecting the user touch Edit Administrator Settings gt User Authentication Settings gt User Registration Se B cm a User Auth Settings 07 15 2008 08 34 Henory 100 3 User Ath Settings recat 13 37 OK lemory 90 14 8 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 14 4 6 8 9 Touch Edit Register or delete authentication information Card authentication MORETA Utility Administrator Settings User Registration 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Position the IC card on the authentication unit and then touch OK IC card can be registered by swiping the card ministrator Settings gt Authentication Information gt Register Card Auth Utility Administrator Place the IC card on the authentication device Settings and then touch 0K Register Auth Info 02 02 2008 10 10 Cancel Memory 100 After the message Registered appears touch Close and then touch Close in the next screen that appears Type the user name and the password If desired specify the function limitations Touch OK 10 Touch Close bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 9 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 Registering from Data Administrator In order to use Data Administrator settings must be specified on the machine and the setup procedure must be performed The
441. on of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded original otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired If the binding position for the original is set to Auto the position of the binding margin is automatically selected A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 297 mm or less If the original length is more than 297 mm a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected If Auto is selected under Original Binding Position the binding margin is set at the top or at the left Ifthe binding position for the copy is set to Auto the binding position is automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded original If the original length is 297 mm or less a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected If the original length is more than 297 mm a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected Ifthe binding position for the copy is set to Auto the binding position is set at the top or at the left 3 Touch Binding Position For a single sided original select the binding position for the copy and then touch OK Job List Specify the binding position If the original Copies is not set upright select the direction Duplex Combine gt Binding Position Original Binding Position Output Binding Position Sefeck Pr 100 0 r Auto left Bind Right Bind
442. on page 8 17 THY Copying with reversed colors An original can be copied with the light and dark colored areas of the original image inversed For details refer to Reversing black and white gradation of the original Neg Pos Reverse function on page 8 26 ac m EEA Separately copying a page spread A page spread such as in an open book or catalog can be copied onto separate pages For details refer to Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread Book Copy function on page 8 27 An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper Repeating copy images For details refer to Tiling copy images Image Repeat function on page 8 33 293 o 333 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Introduction Splitting an original page into two copies A single original page can be divided in two and each half can be printed on separate copies For details refer to Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF Page Separation function on page 8 38 m amp e Copies can be printed with a filing margin so they can easily be stored in filing binders Making copies for filing For details refer to Adding a binding margin to copies Page Margin function on page 8 41 J Adjusting the image to fit the paper size When the copy paper is larger than the original copies can be printed
443. ons 2 Touch Auto 3 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 37 Basic copy operations 3 5 2 Manually selecting the desired paper size Y By also selecting the Auto Zoom setting the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size For details on the Auto Zoom setting refer to Automatically selecting the zoom ratio Auto zoom Setting on page 3 39 Y Load the appropriate papers into the paper tray in advance 1 In the Basic screen touch Paper Ready to copy pa Check Job es BERETKE a oo iwageraogoo rt E AS ME Finishing _ Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Menory 100 The Paper screen appears 2 Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper 3 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again 3 38 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 6 Specifying a zoom setting The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the original or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy image As the factory default Full Size is selected The following procedures describe how to specify the Zoom setting amp Note The Auto Zoom setting cannot be combined with the Auto Paper setting 3 6 1 Automatic
444. operations Fora double sided original touch Binding Position select the binding position of the original and then touch OK Original Binding Position Output Binding Position 3 Touch Original Direction select the orientation of the loaded original and then touch OK For details on specifying the original orientation refer to Selecting the original orientation Original Direction settings on page 3 26 4 Touch Ok The Basic screen appears again 3 7 2 Selecting double sided copies Y As the factory default 1 Sided gt 1 Sided is selected Y For details on using the original glass to scan multi page originals refer to Scanning a multi page original from the original glass on page 3 15 1 In the Basic screen touch Duplex Combine Ready to copy Copies Check Job a riginal Setting Original Type Application _ Density Backgr6und Hane Status pers ity Auto Background Auto Paper Removal Select oiololololaimia as m fl U _ H uu 4 Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF O f Job Details Finishing 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Duplex Combine screen appears 3 52 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 2 Touch 1 Sided gt 2 Sided or 2 Sided gt 2 Sided betta Original gt Copy Combine Binding Position Specify the positi
445. opy ee Accessibility oN K Mo Stop 16 4j st iel Start o gt 8 Enlarge Display 7 3 7 15 D Help gt Gms Ca Data li pE 14 13 12 11 10 9 No Part name Description 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel 2 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch 3 Power auxiliary power key Press to turn on off machine operations When turned off the machine enters a state where it conserves energy 4 Mode Memory key Press to register store the desired copy fax scan settings as a program or to recall a registered program See p 4 16 5 Utility Counter key Press to display the Meter Count screen and the Utility screen 6 Reset key Press to clear all settings except programmed settings entered in the control panel and touch panel 7 Interrupt key Press to enter Interrupt mode While the machine is in Interrupt mode the in dicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and the message Now in Inter rupt mode appears on the touch panel To cancel Interrupt mode press the Interrupt key again 8 Stop key Pressing the Stop key while copying scanning or printing temporarily stops the operation 9 Proof Copy key Press to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies You can also display a finishing image using the current settings in the touch
446. opying with programmed copy settings Mode Memory Programmed copy settings can be recalled to be used again for copying 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Press the Mode Memory key The Recall Copy Program screen appears Mode Memory 3 Touch the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled To register a program select blank program key and touch Register Program Programs can be recalled or deleted Check Job Recall Copy Progran Hane Status General Affairs Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 If the copy settings in the selected copy program are not to be checked continue with step 8 If the copy program to be recalled is not displayed touch EJ and EH until the desired copy program is displayed 4 Press the Check Program Settings key The copy settings cannot be changed from the Check Job Settings screens To register a program select blank program key and touch Register Program Programs can be recalled or deleted Check Job Hane Status Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 4 20 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 The Check Job Settings screen appears There are four Check Job Settings screens The number to the right of the screen title indicates the number of the currently displayed screen To display the previous screen touch KJ Ba
447. or by following the on screen instructions If the error cannot be cleared or released contact your service representative with the error code The phone number and fax number for the usual service representative appear in the center of the screen Example Error that can be cleared by turning the power off on C E0002 An internal error occurred Turn the main switch OFF and ON If the trouble code appears again contact your Service Rep TEL 1234567890 user Name Statis FAX 1234567890 Trouble Code C E002 T 02 02 2008 10 10 Display in Enlarge Display mode If the internal error occurs the screen shown below appears An internal error occurred Turn the main switch OFF and ON If the trouble code appears again contact your Service Rep TEL 1234567890 FAX 1234567890 Trouble Code C E002 XQ Reminder Since the machine may be damaged contact the service representative according to the procedure described below as soon as the call service representative screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 3 5 Troubleshooting Write down the trouble code for example C E0002 in the call service representative screen Turn the machine off by using the Power auxiliary power key and the main power switch Unplug the machine 4 Contact the service representative and inform them of the trouble c
448. or keypad to make a selection ity a seins oninstrator settins Pio verais 02 02 2008 10 10 Menory 100 12 24 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode The User Settings screen appears T Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection Utility gt User Settings 1 System Settings A Change Password A 2 Custom Display Settings Change E Mail Address 4 4 Scan Fax Settings A 9 Change Icon A a 5 Printer Settings Z 02 26 2010 Memory 09 07 90 amp Note To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode press the Utility Counter key Otherwise exit the Utility mode by touching Close in each screen until the screen for the Copy or Box mode appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 25 Utility mode 12 4 Specifying administrator settings This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the Utility Counter key then touching Administrator Settings 12 4 1 System Settings Power Save Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Low Power Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time between 1 and 240 min 15 minutes utes until the machine enters Power Save mode Sleep Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time between 1 and 240 min 60 minutes utes until the machine enters Sleep mode Hibernatio
449. ord Q Detail To use card authentication register the card information in advance For details on specifying authentication settings for the authentication unit IC card type and on registering IC card information refer to chapter 13 Authentication unit IC Card Type AU 201 of this manual When Card Authentication has been specified bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 47 Before making copies gt Place the IC card horizontally on the card scanning area of the authentication unit IC card type The Basic screen appears Ready to copy Check Job al Type Density Background S Hane Status Density Auto Background Removal G8 OHeG000 Auto Paper Select 4 amp ace Finishing Separate Scan Job Details 02 02 2008 1 Memory 100 Copies Appl Duplex 21 Auto Rotate OFF When Card Authentication Password has been specified Place the IC card on the authentication device enter the password and then press the Acc Hane Status Password T Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 2 48 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 1 Place the IC card horizontally on the card scanning area of the authentication unit IC card type 2 Type in the password and then touch Login or press the Access key The Basic s
450. ore making copies 2 1 2 External Reminder Do not grab the control panel to move the machine bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies No Part name Description 1 Left partition glass Scans the original loaded into the ADF 2 Document scales Use as a guide when placing the original on the original glass 3 Document pad Presses down on the original positioned on the original glass 4 Original glass Scans the original placed face down 5 Adjustable paper guides Used to align the loaded original 6 Paper tray Load with the originals to be scanned facing up 7 Original output tray Feeds out scanned originals 8 Control panel Used to specify the various settings and perform operations such as starting 9 Power auxiliary power key Turns on off the copying and scanning functions Turning it off will terminate all the functions other than printing and receiving and outputting facsimile da ta and then enter the sleep mode 10 Adjustable document Used to align the loaded paper guides 11 Bypass tray Opened and used when printing onto paper that is not or cannot such as thick paper overhead projector transparencies envelopes or label sheets be load ed into a paper tray 12 Release lever for the vertical Used to open the vertical transport door when clearing paper misfeeds transport door o
451. ore than 6 8 kg on the original glass In addition do not press down extremely hard on a book spread on the original glass otherwise the original glass may be damaged Y For thick books or large objects make the copy without closing the ADF When an original is being scanned with the ADF open do not look directly at the light that may shine through the original glass Although the light that shines through the original glass is bright it is not a laser beam and therefore is not as dangerous 1 Lift open the ADF or the original cover 2 Place the original face down on the original glass Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the left side of the machine 3 Align the original with the 4 mark in the back left corner of the original scales For details on selecting the original orientation refer to Selecting the original orientation Original Direction settings on page 3 26 For details on specifying the binding margin position refer to Selecting the position of the binding margin Binding Position settings on page 3 29 For transparent or translucent originals place a blank sheet of paper of the same size as the original over the original 3 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations For bound originals spread over two facing pages such as a book or magazine position the top of the original toward the back of this machine and align the original with the
452. original Setting Original Type Application Density Duplexs Backar6und Combine user T E GES Status Density Auto ee Background Auto paper Removal Select oiolololola imma 1 1 A d i A N cn Finishing a Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Henory 100 The Original Setting screen appears Touch Original Direction The Original Direction screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 27 3 Basic copy operations 4 Touch the button for the orientation of the loaded original and then touch OK st Ready to copy Copies check Job__ SerecePe 100 0 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key 3 28 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 4 7 Selecting the position of the binding margin Binding Position settings If a double sided original is loaded into the ADF specify the position of the top of the back side of the original by specifying the binding margin position for the original amp eee Note As the factory default Auto is selected as the position of the binding margin Original binding margin position Original binding margin Icon Description Left Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the left Right Selec
453. osition touch Adjust Position Select the desired direction under Left amp Right Adjustment or Top amp Bottom Adjustment touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction touch and to specify the adjustment amount and then touch OK If a decimal value is displayed in the screen press the C clear key and then use the keypad to type in the adjustment amount For details on switching between decimal and fraction values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 8 58 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 7 8 9 If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value i select item and specify t Sune using the keypad or ki Application gt Printing Position gt Fine Tune Top amp Bottom Adjustment Left amp Right Adjustment S8 ScEPe 100 0 Right Botton No Adjustment No Adjustment Check Details 25 08 2008 09 29 Memory 100 What are the limits on the adjustment amount gt The print position can be finely adjusted in 0 1 mm increments Can no adjustments be made gt To make no left right or up down adjustments touch No Adjustment
454. ot be used with Finishing settings 2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 ta 8 1 4 x 13 8 1 2 x 13 Gy 8 x 13 Gy one of which can be selected For details contact the service representative 7 1 5 Special paper When loading the paper except normal overhead projection transparent film thick paper colored paper etc select the appropriate name from 10 A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the Auto Paper Select setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically Available paper types depend on the paper tray For details on the paper setting for bypass tray see Specifying a paper type for bypass tray on page 7 19 For details on paper type setting for Paper type setting for a tray on page 7 21 No Paper type Icon Description 1 OHP Select this setting when overhead projection transparent films are loaded 2 Special Paper Select this setting when special paper for example high quality paper is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 g m to 90 g m 7 6 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals No Paper type Icon Description 3 Thick Paper Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight to 91 g m to 200 g m 4 Thin Paper Select this setting when the Thin paper that is loaded has a weight of 50 g m to 59 g m 5 Letterhead Select this setting when p
455. ouch OK Copies to list Ready to copy Application gt Sheet Cover Chapter Insert auyBoE2P 100 0 o fy i EJ J OHP Interleave A Cover Sheet A I Insert Sheet A BE aj a Chapters Program Jobs Insert Image A 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 4 Select the desired copy settings and then press the Start key To print a single copy to be checked press the Proof Copy key Scanning begins 5 Touch Fix and then touch OK Scanning is complete Touch Fix to fix or Retry to cancel and try again 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Ifthe original was loaded on the original glass touch Finish in the screen that appears requesting confirmation that scanning is finished If Retry was selected touch Change Setting to change the copy settings 8 22 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 6 Position the next original and then touch Change Setting Load the next original and then press Start Scanned Batches Hane Status If you are finished scanning touch Finish Touch Proof Copy to copy 1 se Nunber of Sets Number of Originals _ Job Details _ 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 T Select the desired copy settings and then press the Start key Settings for the document batch can be changed
456. ouch the button for the desired setting e inistrator Settings gt User Auth Account Track gt General Settings Job Setting ON MFP Utility OFF Public User Access Restrict dee Account Track OFF ies see BaEhentication Account Track 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 3 Touch 8 Authentication Device Settings then 1 General Settings then Bio Authentication 4 Select the desired settings under Beep Sound and Operation Settings Select the authentication device settings for bio authentication Administrator Settings gt General Settings gt Bio Authentication Settings Utility Administrator Settings Beohee settings Beep Sound Operation Settings 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 General Settings Under Beep Sound select whether or not a beep is produced when scanning of the finger vein pattern is completed successfully Under Operation Settings select the logon method after registration 1 to many authentication Logon is possible simply by positioning the finger 1 to 1 authentication Logon is possible by entering a user name and positioning the finger 13 6 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 1 3 For details on logging on refer to Logging on to this machine on page 13 20 5 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears 6 Touch 2 Logoff Settings ATT Use the menu bu
457. ow from the Setting drop down list ON OO Ff Click Apply and then click OK 13 22 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 Sending a print job 1 2 Open the data in the application click File and then click Print Check that the printer name has been selected in Printer Name or Select Printer If the printer is not selected click to select the printer The Print dialog box differs depending on the application General Select Printer Add Printer t Adobe PDF KONICA MINOLTA 751 601 PCL lt e Status Ready Print to file Location Comment Find Printer Page Range all Number of copies 1 E O Pages 1 65535 Collate oy oH GE Enter either a single page number or a single page range For example 5 12 tion Current Page 3 Click Preferences or Properties 4 Click the Basic tab Printing Preferences Basic Layout Finish Cover Mode Stamp Composition Quality Other Eno Setmg Ud Original Orientation Output Method lal Potrat Landscape Original Size A4 Paper Size Same as Original Size Zoom 25 400 Auto Manual oe Cra 5 Click the Authentication Account Track button bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 23 1 3 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU
458. pears Ready to copy copies Check Job Density Duplex Background Combine user t Hane Status Density 4 Auto gt Background Auto Paper moval Select 1 1 x m a A N ice Finishing Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 XQ Note f authentication fails many times the authentication data may not be registered correctly Therefore register the user again bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 21 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 13 2 4 ID amp Print function Print jobs sent from a computer are saved in the ID amp Print user box on the machine and can be printed after authentication is completed with finger vein patterns This is called the ID amp Print function In addition documents saved in the ID amp Print user box can be checked and specified to be printed from the control panel of the machine amp Note For details on the printer driver settings and Box mode functions refer to the user manual included with the machine ID amp Print For Windows Specifying settings on the Configure tab 1 For Windows 2000 NT 4 0 click the Start button point to Settings and then click Printers For Windows XP Server 2003 click the Start button and then click Printers and Faxes For Windows Vista Server 2008 click the Start button and then click Control panel Hardware and Sound and Printers For Window
459. per that is not loaded into a paper tray or if you wish to copy onto thick paper thin paper tracing paper tab paper OHP transparencies label sheets etc Open the bypass tray With the side to be printed on facing down insert the paper as much as possible into the feed slot Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper How is curled paper loaded gt Flatten the paper before loading it bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 55 Before making copies 4 Select the paper type iobtist Ready to copy copies Change Tray Sett Paper Size ri Transparency PA4D 2 A4 D 100 0 Special Paper Thin Paper Letterhead Standard Size Al Check Details Colored Paper Tab Paper Custom Size Trace User Paper 1 Wide Paper A 22 08 2008 11 33 Memory 100 To display a different list of paper types touch Ej Job List Ready to copy Copies Change Tray Settings gt Bypass Paper Size 2 A4 D 100 0 B User Paper 2 User Paper 3 wr PAS D Recycled Fine Labels Standard Size Check Details Custom Size d Wide Paper 22 08 2008 11 44 Memory 100 5 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears The Basic screen appears ag
460. peration was performed XQ Note For details on displaying the screen refer to Displaying the Current Jobs list stored jobs and active Jobs on page 11 12 1 In the Current Jobs list of the Print tab touch Release Held Job Allows you to check jobs currently running or those in queue Receive Job History Nane status Document Name Sesrea Org Ses Delete j 37 COPY Printing 10 10 ia Increase 38 COPY PrintWait 10 10 1 0 Priority y Release Held Job 4 Job Details 7 2008 10 10 I Close The Release Held Job screen appears 2 From the job list select the job whose proof copy is to be printed and then touch Proof Copy key Select desired job to print and press Start To copy 1 set for proofing press Proof Copy Release Held Job No Nane status Document Name Sesrea Org Ses Delete 39 COPY Serea 10 10 5 4 E Ee Bien Job Set Detail J cance E Ifthe job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed touch E or EH until the desired job is displayed If an incorrect job was selected touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it After the single proof copy is printed check the print result How is printing of a proof copy stopped gt Press the Stop key Q Detail To change the settings touch Check Job Set in the Release Held Job screen For details refer to Printing
461. ple cartridge holder and then pull the holder down to remove it Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge holder Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder Do not remove the remaining staples otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced Install the staple cartridge holder Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted as far as possible bizhub 751 601 Version 2 9 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box Return the stacker unit to its original position When returning the stacker unit to its original position do not grab any part other than handle FN7 otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched Close the front door 9 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole punch scrap box 9 9 2 2 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS 525 Open the front door ee g 4 SI QO 2 A PE Grab handle FN7 and then pull out the stacker unit ee Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible N Remove the staple cartridge holder co ies aN Zatete ont Hol
462. position of the binding margin refer to Selecting the position of the binding margin Binding Position settings on page 3 29 For details on specifying the original orientation refer to Selecting the original orientation Original Direction settings on page 3 26 1 In the Basic screen touch Duplex Combine Copies i Ready to copy aia B original Setting Original Type i Application _ Check Job Density Duplex Background Combine Hane Status Density Auto Background Auto Paper Removal Select eee eo0oo F Auto Rotate OFF Job Details __ 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 7 The Duplex Combine screen appears 2 Select the desired combined copy setting ob tist Ready to copy ra _ es EC Original Type monera jemena Application Ce gut2 Per 100 0 Ez Sided gt 1 Sided 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 57 3 Basic copy operations Select the setting and page arrangement according to the orientation and number of the combined pages If 4in1 8in1 is selected whether the Horizontal or Vertical paper arrangement is selected can be viewed in the touch panel However this appears only if the Left Pane Display Default parameter in Utility mode is set to Check Job Settings If 2in1 was selected the pages will be arranged as shown below Horizontal
463. position screen appears Touch Page Number Job List Ready to copy Application gt Stamp Composition A4 D 100 0 d d Date Time A Page Number Copy Protect Stamp Repeat Header Footer Registered Overlay A Watermark 4 E E Stamp a a Over lay E Distribution Control Number 4 02 26 2010 09 44 Memory 90 Close The Page Number screen appears 8 60 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 4 Using the keypad type in the starting page number for printing Use the keypad to enter the starting number Copies Press x to switch between and BuysceoPer 100 0 umber Page Page Number Type Insert Sheet 99999 99999 Starting Chapter Rumper 9 Sha aa ee 100 100 Chapter 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Print Position Check Details f desired touch Chapter and then use the keypad to type in the chapter number The entered chapter number is printed if 1 1 1 2 is selected under Page Number Type The setting for Page Number can be set to a number between 99999 and 99999 and the setting for Chapter can be set to a number between 100 and 100 When specifying a setting for Starting Page Number switch the number between positive and negative by pressing the key If a negative value is specified the numbers are not printed un
464. position was at the center of the paper in step 7 this completes the procedure Use the Center Staple amp Fold setting to print another sample copy Check the print result Check that the stapling position is adjusted to the center of the paper If more adjustment is necessary repeat steps 6 through 9 12 46 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 12 6 2 Half Fold Position The folding position when printing with the Half Fold setting can be adjusted for each paper size and for each paper type x Note Half Fold Position does not appear if optional Finisher FS 610 is not installed f the angle of the center folding position must be adjusted contact your service representative Q Detail For details on the Center Staple amp Fold setting refer to Binding copies at the center Center Staple amp Fold setting on page 3 79 Y Before making any adjustments use the Half Fold setting to print a single sample copy Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 1 System Settings The System Settings screen appears 3 Touch 7 Expert Adjustment The Expert Adjustment screen appears 4 Touch 5 Finisher Adjustment The Finisher Adjustment screen appears 5 Touch 2 Hal
465. ptional punch kit is installed on the finisher For details on the Punch settings refer to Punching holes in copies Punch settings on page 3 74 Before making any adjustments use a Punch setting to print a sample copy Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 Touch 1 System Settings The System Settings screen appears Touch 7 Expert Adjustment The Expert Adjustment screen appears Touch 5 Finisher Adjustment The Finisher Adjustment screen appears 12 56 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 5 Touch 7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment The Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment screen appears Use the keys to specify the adjustment Administrator settings x 7 R gt Finisher Adj stment gt Punch Resist Loop Size Adjutment Adjust Value 16 0 16 0 step 0 8 Administrator Cover Sheet Settings Feeder Lower Expert Adjustment Reverse Output Finisher Adjustment Duplex Unit Output p Test Pattern output 4 06 19 2008 17 03 Memory 100 6 Touch the button for the desired adjustment parameter 7 Check the angle of the punched holes Ifthe punched holes are angled touch to change the adjustment If the angle cannot be adjusted by
466. py Operating Screen Change E Mail Address are available to users e Prohibit None of the parameters that are available to users with Level 1 or Level 2 are available Security Details Parameter Description Default Setting Password Rules Select whether or not password rules are applied Invalid Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Mode 1 Release Time Settings 5 min Select the operations that are prohibited if user authentication failed e Mode 1 Operations cannot be performed for a fixed length of time e Mode 2 When authentication has failed repeatedly the control panel can no longer be operated The number of times of failed authentication can be set between 1 and 5 If operation of the control panel is restricted touch Re lease and then select the items whose operation restric tions are canceled e Users amp Accounts Operations for user authentication and account track Secure Print Operations for confidential documents User Box Operations for password protected boxes SNMP Operations for SNMP v3 Write user authentication Release Time Settings Specify the length of time until prohibited operations are automatically unlocked The time can be set between 1 and 60 minutes Confidential Document Access Method The operation method for confidential documents can be Mode 1 viewed If Prohibited Functions When Authentication Failed is set to Mode 1 this parameter is set to Mode 1 If
467. queue so that it is printed first 11 1 2 Multi job feature While one job is being printed another job can be queued A total of 250 jobs can be queued The number of jobs possible for each operation is listed below Operation Number of jobs Copy 5 Interrupted copy 1 Scan 5 Print 10 Fax Off Hook TX 1 Fax Memory TX 50 Fax Timer TX 20 Fax RX 100 Fax Polling RX 1 Fax Polling TX 1 Sharing 56 Total 250 The values listed above are for reference and may differ from the actual values depending on other settings When one job is finished being printed the next queued job automatically begins amp eee Note Up to 250 jobs including print jobs scanner transmission jobs fax transmission jobs and received fax save jobs can be queued bizhub 751 601 Version 2 11 Managing jobs 11 1 3 Job List screens From the Job List screen lists of jobs being performed by this machine and the jobs that have been performed in addition to the job details can be viewed and the job settings can be changed Detail To display the Job List screen touch Job List in the left panel and then touch Job Details From the Job List screen the following tabs for the various functions can be displayed e Print Lists print jobs for copying computer printing and received faxes Send Lists fax and scanner transmission jobs Receive Lists fax trans
468. quired from the License Management Server LMS List of Enabled Functions Enabled functions can be checked Note For details on Install License refer to the Quick Guide Copy Print Fax Scarn Box Operations 12 4 12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting Parameter Description Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from be ing registered in this machine For details contact your service representative Restriction Code Settings bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 41 12 Utility mode 12 4 13 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen Follow the procedure described below to display the Administrator Settings screen by pressing Utility Counter key 1 Press the Utility Counter key Utility Counter Cd 2 Touch 3 Administrator Settings se the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection Meter Count 2 User Settings 3 Administrator Settings Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button For 3 Administrator Setting press the 3 key in the keypad 12 42 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 3 Type in the administrator password and then touch OK For details on typing in text refer to Entering text on page 15 3 Use the keyboard or keypad to type in the Administrator passwor
469. r Sheet Insert Sheet and Chapters functions If necessary specify the other settings As the factory default the following settings are selected Density Standard Text Size Standard To specify the density touch Density and then select the desired density Select the density of the distribution Copies wt control number Application gt Distribution Control Number gt Density geY2o8aPer 100 0 NE 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 8 90 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 To specify the text size touch Text Size and then select the desired size Job List Set the size of the distribution control number Application gt Distribution Control Number gt Text Size auyeckore 100 0 Check Detai 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 7 Touch OK and then touch Close 8 Specify any other desired copy settings 9 Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies 10 Press the Start key 8 15 11 Printing the watermark onto copies Watermark function 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Touch Application and then touch Stamp Composition To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled
470. r not to hold the address and other settings can be selected after scanning or fax transmission Reset All System Auto Reset for Proof Copy Select whether or not to activate the automatic system reset after the proof copy operation is per formed Yes XQ Reminder Even if the System Auto Reset Time is OFF the System Auto Reset function is activated after 1 minute of no operation of the machine during the User Authentication or Account Track However when in the Enlarge Display mode the System Auto Reset function is not activated fuser authentication settings have been specified or Enhanced Security Mode has been set to ON the logoff from Administrator mode or user authentication mode will be performed according to the System Auto Reset Time parameter 12 30 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 When the optional i Option LK 107 is registered the setting can be specified from Priority Mode Application Menu Fax Scan Copy When LK 101 is registered Auto Reset can be used to configure the Web Browser settings Factory default 1 minute If Confirm Address TX is set to ON Confirm with User in Job Reset Next Job Reset Data After Job cannot be used User Box Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Delete Unused User Box Specify settings for us
471. r tray is selected except when the Auto Paper setting is selected while an original is loaded into the ADF Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select which paper tray is selected when the Auto Paper setting is canceled e Tray Before APS ON The paper tray that was being used before the Auto Paper setting was selected is selected e Default Tray Tray 1 is used Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cov er pages front cover inserted pages and chapter title pag es Tray 2 Tri Fold Print Side Whether to fold copies with the printed surface inward or outward can be selected when copies are output tri folded This function can be used if the optional Finisher FS 610 is installed Inside Print Jobs During Copy Operation Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accept ed for printing while a copy operation is being performed e Accept Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed e Receive Only Print data and fax data is printed after the copy opera tion is finished Accept Automatic Image Rotation Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated when the original and copy paper orientations are different e When Auto Paper Auto Zoom Reduce is set If the Auto Paper setting Auto Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of
472. rate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable otherwise the cable may be damaged Follow the procedures described below to log on to this machine by completing authentication with finger vein patterns When 1 to many authentication has been specified 1 Position the registered finger on the authentication unit After entering the User Name place your finger on the Authentication Unit User Name 2 26 2010 14 10 Memory 90 2 The user is authenticated and the Basic screen appears Copies Ready to copy J original setting original Tyre C Application Density Duplex Background Combine Density j Auto DL Background Auto Paper d Select Removal oiolololola imime 1 1 ice Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 13 20 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 13 When 1 to 1 authentication has been specified 1 Type in the user name After entering the User Name place your finger on the Authentication Unit Hame Status Memory 2 Position the registered finger on the authentication unit The user is authenticated and the Basic screen ap
473. rd may start Use the same USB port used when the driver was installed Authenti cation Unit IC Card Type The USB cable is connect ed between the authenti cation unit and the machine but the status in dicator is not lit in green The message appears ona computer where registra tion failed With the authentication unit the scanning time is limited to 10 sec onds This message appears if scanning was not possible within the limited period of time Refer to the Quick Guide Authenti cation Unit IC Card Type AU 201 and check how to position the IC card in order to complete scanning within the limited period of time Logon failed The message Failed to Authenticate appears on the machine If Card Authentication Pass word was selected Is the password typed in correctly Check the password and type it in correctly Scanning does not begin Was the machine restarted after the authentication unit was con nected to it Turn the machine off with the main power switch and temporarily dis connect the USB cable from the authentication unit or the machine before connecting it again and waiting 10 seconds before turning on the machine with the main pow er switch The Add New Hardware Wizard starts when the au thentication unit is con nected to the computer Is the authentication unit connect ed to the same USB port used when the driver was installed If the au
474. re preset 1 In the Basic screen touch Zoom I Ready to copy Copies Check Job CHAD CE CEE Density Duplex Background Combine user T abd m Density i Auto ia E Background Removal oiololololaimia a d A7 N EN Finishing Separate Scan 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Zoom screen appears 2 Touch the button for the appropriate zoom ratio beside Enlarge and Reduce depending on the original and paper sizes wist Ready to copy coles fo ginal Setting i Original Tye Application S8Y80EPPe 100 0 l 115 4 122 4 141 4 BALAS anena ASAP User Preset Zoom 400 0 B5 A4 200 0 86 6 81 6 70 7 A3 B4 A3 A4 ABs B4 gt A4 B4 BS 50 0 a i 5 B4 i a z a a 2 22 08 2008 13 41 Memory 100 3 Touch OK The Basic screen appears again 3 44 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 6 6 Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios Individual zoom settings By using the keypad separate zoom ratios can be typed in directly for the horizontal direction between 25 0 and 400 0 and for the vertical direction between 25 0 and 400 0 By combining different horizontal and vertical zoom ratios the copy image can be adjusted as shown below ABCDE E E ABCDE Y
475. reen that appeared when a proof copy is printed indicates the number of sets printed as proof copies total Number of Sets specified The number under Total of Pages Printed in the screen that appeared when a proof copy is printed indicates the number of copies printed as proof copies the number of pages printed in the proof copy bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 7 Additional copy operations In the screen allowing you to change the settings change the copy settings as desired and then touch OK To cancel changes to the settings touch Cancel If the copy settings cannot be changed stop printing the proof copy Next press the Reset key to cancel the copy settings and then specify the desired settings To stop copying while the screen for changing the settings is displayed select the proof copy job to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel and then touch Delete In the screen that appears requesting confirmation to delete the copy program touch Yes and then touch OK To cancel changes to the settings in the screen for changing the settings press the Reset key while the screen for changing the settings is displayed to reset the settings to those specified in step 2 The number beside Copies in the screen for changing the settings is the number of copies that will be printed when Finish is touched The settings for the proof copy can be Changed Press Start to restart Application
476. removing and repositioning the same finger each time After scanning the finger vein patterns place the same finger and press Authentication Test If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test press New If authentication has failed retry scanning the finger Registering Vein Authentication User Name Start reading Th order to improve the accuracy of vein data the vein is photographed 3 times Place your finger on the vein reader and click the Start reading button Lift and place your finger again for each photo Cancel _ 9 Click Register 10 Click 0K Repeat steps 5 through 10 until all users have been registered User settings User Name user03 a Password E Mail Address Account Information Maximum counter settings Maximum number of boxes Reference Allowed Setting Vein Authentication Vein Authentication data Unregistered a Import Required field Cancel 13 18 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 1 3 11 Click Export to the device To change the registered data select the user name and then click Edit 4 KONICA MINOLTA PageScope Data Administrator Authentication settings Address settings Default Gro TOX G Eile Edit Tool Window Help EA TOP Registration of Device Network Initial Setting Eunction selection User list 1
477. rge sized paper Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with print operations e Total Total number of printout pages Large Size Total number of printout pages printed on large sized paper Fax Scan e Total Total number of pages scanned total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes Large Size Total number of pages scanned total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes for paper specified as large size paper Original Counter This counter shows the number of original pages that were scanned Paper Counter This counter shows the number of pages used for printing Fax TX Count e Total number of pages transmitted with fax operations amp eee Note The public user access is counted as public of the counter bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 83 12 Utility mode 12 10 3 Viewing account counters 1 7 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 Touch 4 User Authentication Account Track The User Authentication Account Track screen appears Touch 3 Account Track Settings The Account Track Setting screen appears Touch 2 Account Track Counter Touch the button for the desired account and then touch Counter Details The Counter Details screen for the account appears Touch the button for the counter to be viewed and then chec
478. riginal into the ADF on page 3 9 Press the Interrupt key Ifajob is being printed the message The job is stopping peer ee eee il Interrupt The indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and ED printing of the current job stops 9 What settings are selected when the Interrupt key is O pressed gt When the Interrupt key is pressed all functions and settings are reset to their defaults Why is the Interrupt key not available gt The Interrupt key cannot be pressed while an original is being scanned Select the desired copy settings Press the Start key Printing for the interrupting job begins After the interrupting job has finished printing press the Interrupt key The indicator on the Interrupt key goes off The copy settings return to those specified before printing was interrupted amp Note If the interrupting job is cancelled printing for the interrupted job automatically restarts bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 15 4 Additional copy operations 4 5 Registering copy programs Mode Memory Frequently used copy settings can be stored together as a program to easily be recalled A maximum of 30 programs can be registered A name of up to 16 characters can be specified for the registered copy programs amp Note f the optional hard disk is installed a maximum of 100 copy programs can be registered 1 Using the touch panel and control pane
479. rmation to reset the settings touch No To display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings touch the button 30 second 60 second 90 second or 120 second for the length of time that the message is to be displayed To cancel changes to the settings press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled 4 Touch OK The Accessibility Setting screen appears again 5 Touch Close or press the Accessibility key The Basic screen appears again Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy scanning and fax functions With the Enlarge Display mode text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily For details on the Enlarge Display mode refer to the User manual Enlarge Display Operations If the time setting is the same for the automatic panel reset operation and the automatic system reset operation the display of the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode is given priority and the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode is not displayed 4 34 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 4 8 6 Setting the Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation function When the Enlarge Display key is pressed to change the display of the screen a message can be displayed requesting confirmation to cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode A
480. rom Firmware server 1 CS Remote Care was activated by the service representative 2 Internet ISW is being downloaded Do not turn off the machine with the Power auxiliary power key while this message is displayed After turning off the machine with the Power auxiliary power key turn off the main power switch and then con tact the service representative bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 47 Troubleshooting Message Cause Remedy Cannot be accessed due to unau thorized access Please contact your administrator The authentication information has become invalid since the authentica tion attempts have failed the speci fied number of times Contact the administrator of the ma chine The Administrator Password is not valid due to unauthorized access The administrator password has be come invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times Turn the machine off then on again Turn off the main power switch and then wait about 10 seconds before turning it on again If any message other than those listed above appears perform the operation described in the message 5 48 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 6 Specifications Specifications rl G lU 6 Specifications 6 1 Specifications 6 1 1 Main unit Item Description Name bizhub 751 601 Type Console Document holder Stationary mirror scanning
481. round arw momomrnmann 11 Auto paper Select SBE i D AA ace Finishing Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 orisinal setting original Type Application The Job List screen appears 2 Inthe Print tab display the job to be deleted Jobs on the Job History list cannot be deleted 3 Select the job to be deleted and then touch Delete Ifthe job to be deleted is not displayed touch jj or EH until the desired job is displayed Ifan incorrect job was selected select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it Allows you to check jobs currently running or those in queue Receive Status Document Nam Printing Release Held Job Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 A message requesting confirmation to delete the job appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Managing jobs 11 4 Check the information that is displayed touch Yes if the correct job is indicated and then touch OK To quit deleting the job touch No and then touch OK A Are you sure you want to delete this job Z Number of Deleted Jobs Job No 18 User Name Document Name SidFea 2008 02 02 10 10 02 02 2008 10 10 0K The screen displayed before Delete was touched appears again and the job is deleted from the Current Jobs list Touch Close or press the Reset key
482. rsion 2 Application functions 8 8 6 Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together Program Jobs function Loaded original pages can be scanned with different settings and their copies can be printed together Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the original or Finishing settings or anumbering function can be set after the entire original is scanned and then all copies can be printed together Original 1 iginal 2 Original A Original 3 SS amp Note 700 original batches can be set The Group Finishing setting is not available when programming jobs Instead select Sort 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 When saving scanned data in a user box some scanned data may be lost if more than 10 000 pages are saved in the box 2 Touch Application and then touch Sheet Cover Chapter Insert To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled a Copies wus Ready to copy i Sefece 100 0 Chapter Insert a Page Margin Z 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Sheet Cover Chapter Insert screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 21 Application functions 3 Touch Program Jobs and then t
483. rve all dangers in order to prevent injuries A WARNING Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage gt Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine A CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage gt Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine Sequence of action The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions An illustration inserted on s F AF here shows what operations 2 Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance must be performed gt Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved Tips XQ Note Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine amp Reminder Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded Q Detail Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information Special text markings Stop key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above IACHINE Display texts are written as shown above bizhub 751 601 Ver
484. ry 100 The Book Copy Repeat screen appears 6 Touch Page Separation list Ready to copy copies Application gt Book Copy Repeat E A4 D 100 0 Ca eal Bg Aaj Be 3 Image Repeat Book Copy A Page Separation Check Detail 25 08 2008 09 05 Memory 100 The Page Separation screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 39 Application functions 7 10 11 12 Select the binding position of the spread original For the spread original to read from the left page to the right page touch Left Bind to highlight it On the contrary if the spread original reads from the right page to the left page touch Right Bind Application gt Page Separation Binding Position AIB Duct IMI Touch OK and then touch Close In the Basic screen touch Paper and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper Specify any other desired copy settings Auto Zoom will not function The magnification can be changed as desired To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies Press the Start key 8 40 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 11 Adding a binding margin to copies Page Margin function Copies can be printed with a binding margin so that the pages can easily be filed Whe
485. s Stamp Settings 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Header Footer Settings gt New screen appears 12 64 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 6 Touch Name Specify header footer settings Enter program name rator Settings gt Header Footer Set a Utility Header Settings Administrator f Footer Settings 1st Page Only we rit E z Stamp Settings f Header Footer f Settings 07 25 2008 08 52 Memory 100 i Print Position Print A Top Left Bottom Left The New gt Name screen appears 7 Type in the header footer name up to 16 characters long and then touch OK For details on typing in text refer to Entering text on page 15 3 f Enter program name using the keyboard or keypad To clear your entry completely press the C key Administrator Settings gt New gt Name E3 n goang gant Ki gat ggat agat u gan gaat o B D ES gaat goad goad gj c 02 26 2010 Memory lt 10 18 90 The header footer name is specified bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 65 12 Utility mode 8 Under Header Settings or Footer Settings touch Print and then select the type of header footer to be printed Enter header footer settings Utility pede o Administrator i Bett ns Header Footer Settings 02
486. s Start To reset press C To cancel press Stop The check points can be touched in any order To reset the adjustment press the C clear key and then touch the four check points If the check points have been touched correctly the indicator on the Start key lights up in blue Press the Start key The touch panel is adjusted and the Accessibility Setting screen appears again Touch Close or press the Accessibility key The Basic screen appears again Note f the touch panel cannot be adjusted contact the service representative Q Detail To cancel the touch panel adjustment press the Stop key or the Reset key 4 28 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 4 8 3 Setting the Key Repeat Start Interval Time functions The length of time until the value begins to change after a touch panel button is held down and the length of time for the value to change to the next number can be specified vY The settings specified for the Key Repeat Start Interval Time functions are only applied in the Enlarge Display mode 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen refer to Displaying the accessibility setting screen on page 4 27 2 Touch Key Repeat Start Interval Time or press the 2 key in the keypad Acc oo ee ow N Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a s
487. s refer to Printing a stored job on page 11 15 To give priority for output to a job touch increase Priority in the Current Jobs list For more details refer to Increasing printing priority on page 11 17 11 12 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Managing jobs 11 11 2 5 Displaying the Job History list 1 Touch Job List in the left panel and then touch Job Details The Job List screen appears 2 Touch Job History The Job History list of the Print tab appears 3 Touch the button for the desired list f Confirm jobs that have been printed Print Send Receive Save Current Jobs No Hame Rane Sorea Org SeS Result 39 COPY 10 10 1 Job Complete 38 COPY 10 09 10 Bgagted by 37 COPY Job Complete 36 COPY Job Complete 35 COPY Job Complete 34 COPY Job Complete 33 COPY Job Complete gt aa 10 10 Job Details _ 02 02 2008 Deleted Jobs Displays only jobs that were deleted before they were finished Finished Jobs Displays only jobs that were correctly completed All Jobs Displays all jobs bizhub 751 601 Version 2 11 13 11 Managing jobs 11 2 6 Printing a proof copy of a stored job A single copy of a stored job can be printed in order to be checked The Held Jobs list contains jobs such as those for which a proof copy was being printed when the automatic system reset o
488. s 3 3 3 Feeding the original The original can be fed in either of the following two ways Be sure to position the original correctly according to the type of original being copied Document Feed Method Features Using the ADF By using the ADF a multi page original can be fed automatically one page at a time This feed method can also be used to automatically scan double sided origi nals Using the original glass Place the original directly on the original glass so that it can be scanned This meth od is best with books and other originals that cannot be fed through the ADF 3 3 1 Loading the original into the ADF Vv Vv Vv Do not load originals that are bound together for example with paper clips or staples For details on the types of originals that can be loaded into the ADF refer to Originals on page 7 31 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the Y mark otherwise an original misfeed or damage to the original or machine may occur However a original that exceeds 100 sheets can be scanned in separate batches For details refer to Scanning the original in separate batches Separate Scan setting on page 3 11 If the original is not loaded correctly it may not be fed in straight or an original misfeed or damage to the original may occur If the original is loaded in any orientation other than with the top of the original toward the back of the mach
489. s 7 Server 2008 R2 click the Start button and then click Control panel and Devices and Printers If Printers and Faxes does not appear in the Start menu in Windows XP Server 2003 open the Control Panel from the Start menu select Printers and Other Hardware and then select Printers and Faxes For Windows Vista Server 2008 if the control panel is in the classic view double click Printers For Windows 7 Server 2008 if the control panel is in an icon view click Devices and Printers 2 Right click the icon of the installed printer and then click Properties 3 Click the Configure tab KONICA MINOLTA 751 601 PCL Properties General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Configure Settings Device Option 751 SHD Paper Source Unt None Finisher FS 610 a Punch Unit None Cover Sheet Feeder PI 504 Punch Z Fold Unt ZU 605 2 Hole Type Hard Disk l Installed User Authentication ON Device sabi Account Track Disable 5 Setting ON Device Paper Tray Information Tray Size Direction Paper Type Tray 1 D LEF Plain Paper Tray 2 D er Plain Paper Tray 3 Cser Plain Paper Tray4 A3 ser Plain Paper ers Encryption Key Software Tools OK _ Cancel __ Apply Select User Authentication under Device Option Select ON Device from the Setting drop down list Select ID amp Print under Device Option Select All
490. s list only Displays the status of the job Document Name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer If user authentication settings have been applied the names of documents are not displayed for other users The name of confidential documents is not displayed Time Stored Displays the time that the job was queued Org Displays the number of pages in the original Copies Displays the number of Copies to be printed With jobs listed as Printing in the Current Jobs list a count of the number of Copies printed is displayed Result Job History list only Displays the result of the operation Job Complete Deleted Due To Error De leted by User Reset Modes bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Managing jobs 1 1 11 1 4 Left panel Job List The job list or the job status can be displayed in the left panel of the main screen 1 Touch Job List in the left panel A list of jobs appears in the left panel mut LomuR caro Copies Check Job SE EE Ve j sic original setting original Tyre Application Density Duplexs Background Combine Hame Status Density j copy Printing f Auto 010 Background l Auto paper Removal Select 191 Cojo oo ofa a a als Job Details _ 02 02 2008 _ 10 10 Memory 100 If the Job Display Setting parameter available from the User Setting screen is set to Status Display the job st
491. s on canceling operation restrictions applied when authentication failed refer to Security Settings on page 12 38 12 88 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 3 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 1 3 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 13 1 Safety information Carefully read this information and then store it in a safe place Before using this device carefully read this information and follow it to operate the device correctly After reading this information store it in the designated holder with the warranty Important information The reprinting or reproduction of the content of this publication either in part or in full is prohibited without prior permission The content of this publication is subject to change without notice This publication was created with careful attention to content however if inaccuracies or errors are noticed please contact your sales representative The marketing and authorization to use the our company s product mentioned in this information are provided entirely on an as is basis Our company s assumes no responsibility for any damage including lost profits or other related damages caused by this product or its use as a result of operations not described in this information For disclaimers and warranty and liability details refer to the user manual Authentication unit Biometric type AU 101 This pro
492. s the factory default OFF is selected A Switching to Enlarge Display mode Settings which are not available in Enlarge Display mode will be cancelled Is it OK to continue Yes The settings that cannot be displayed are cancelled and the Enlarge Display mode is entered No The Enlarge Display mode is not entered 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen refer to Displaying the accessibility setting screen on page 4 27 2 Touch Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation or press the 5 key in the keypad Ne Use the menu buttons or C keypad to make a selection Accessibility Setting Touch Panel Adjustment 1 2 KR eP SBT RRE Prin ystem Ea Reset onfarmate Auto Reset Confirmation En vee Display Mode onfirmation oe oe ee The Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 35 4 Additional copy operations 3 Select whether or not the message is displayed Ae Select whether to display confirmation screen 5 when pressing Enlarge Display This screen is to notify settings will reset by switching Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation To cancel changes to the settings press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled 4 Touch OK The Accessibility Setting screen appears again 5 Touch Close or press the
493. se keys to specify the adjustment inistrator Settings R n n gt Finisher Adsustment gt Tri Fold Position Adjustment Paper Size Adjust Value 12 8 12 7 Administrator Bett gs Expert Adjustment Finisher Adjustment Test pattern output A 06 19 2008 16 57 Memory 100 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted 12 60 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 7 Check the folding positions in the sample copy If the folding position is too far on the right side of the paper touch under Adjust Value to increase the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 12 7 mm Each time or is touched the value is increased or decreased by one increment d Ifthe folding position is too far on the left side of the paper touch under Adjust Value to increase the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 12 8 mm UU To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key The folding positions are adjusted If no adjustment of the folding positions were necessary in step 7 this completes the procedure 8 Touch OK 9 Use the Tri Fold setting to print another sample copy 10 Check the print result Check that the folding positions were adjusted If more adjustment is necessary repeat steps 6 through 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 61 12 Utility mode 12 6 10 2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment
494. service representative To print the copy distribution number touch Yes under Distribution Control Number A distribution number between 1 and 99 999 999 can be specified 5 Select desired Stamp Repeat to apply to Copies eG Ee document pplication gt Stamp Repeat gt Other Job Number Serial Number guto Paper 100 0 was ised sac Tes a Se i BaREr ai N nber Output Method Check Details 99999999 j yo 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 5 Touch Detailed Settings The Detailed Settings screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 75 Application functions 6 Touch the desired button to change the setting values in each setting screen and then touch Close As the factory default the following settings are selected Density Std Text Size Std u Ready to copy Copies pplication gt Stamp Repeat gt Detailed Settings Sevecer 100 0 Text Size Std 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Density screen Job List T Select desired Stamp Repeat density Copies pplication gt Stamp Repeat gt Density A gefectaPer 100 0 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Text Size screen 7 JobList Select desired Stamp Repeat Text Size Sevece Pe 100 0 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 8 76 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 7 Ifde
495. ses If it is extremely dirty clean it with an eyeglass lens cleaner 10 6 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Care of the machine 1 0 10 1 8 Care of Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 Nici Reminder Before cleaning the authentication unit disconnect it from the machine If a force is applied to the USB port it may be damaged When cleaning the authentication unit do not allow water to enter the authentication unit otherwise the system may be damaged Never use organic solvents such as benzene or alcohol to clean the authentication unit otherwise it may be damaged amp Note When disconnecting or connecting the authentication unit turn off the machine with the main power switch and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable otherwise the cable may be damaged Frequency Once a month or when it is dirty Wipe the authentication unit with a soft dry cloth If the authentication unit cannot be cleaned by wiping it wash it with a cloth dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out well After the authentication unit is cleaned rinse the cloth and wring it out well before wiping off the detergent bizhub 751 601 Version 2 10 7 1 0 Care of the machine 10 2 Viewing counters Meter Count 10 2 1 Viewing counters The Meter Count screen ca
496. settings can be specified to select whether the printed side is on the inside or the outside For details on selecting the setting refer to Copier Settings on page 12 217 In the Basic screen touch Finishing The Finishing screen appears Touch Fold Bind Copies C wust Ready to copy aa Finishing guygEaPer 100 0 o Boon 22 08 2008 14 01 Memory 100 The Fold Bind screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 81 g Basic copy operations 3 Touch Tri Fold When the Tri Fold setting is selected the following Finishing settings are not available Group Offset Staple Punch Face Up To cancel the Tri Fold setting touch No or the button for a different setting 4 Touch OK and then touch OK again The Basic screen appears again 3 82 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 3 12 4 Z Folding and outputting papers Z Fold setting Copies can be Z folded and output In addition originals of mixed sizes can be Z folded and output in the same specified paper size When the finished size is A4 al a Detail The Z folding function is not available in the following cases When the original size and ou
497. shed Accept Tri Fold Print Side Whether to fold copies with the printed surface inward or out ward can be selected when copies are output tri folded This function can be used if the optional Finisher FS 610 is in stalled Outside Automatic Image Rotation Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated when the original and copy paper orientations are different e When Auto Paper Auto Zoom Reduce is set If the Auto Paper setting Auto Zoom setting or a Re duce setting is selected the image is automatically rotat ed to fit the orientation of the paper e When Auto Paper Auto Zoom is set If the Auto Paper setting or Auto Zoom setting is se lected the image is automatically rotated to fit the orien tation of the paper e When Auto Zoom Reduce is set If the Auto Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is select ed the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper e When Auto Zoom is set If the Auto Zoom setting is selected the image is auto matically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper When Auto Paper Au to Zoom is set Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass Specify whether the copies of originals scanned from the original glass are output with the printed sides facing up or down e Face Down Copies are output with the printed sides facing down e Face UP Copies are output with the printed sides facing up Face Do
498. shing Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 CsONemry 100 The Paper screen appears 7 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 2 3 4 5 Select the button for the bypass tray Touch Change Tray Settings Touch Standard Size Job List Ready to copy Change Tray Settings gt Bypass Copies a A4 D 100 0 B Special Paper Thin Paper Check Details Colored Paper Trace Transparency Letterhead User Paper 1 Paper Size a 172 A4 D Standard Size Tab Paper Custon Size Wide Paper 11 33 The Standard Size screen appears Touch 8 1 2 x 11 Ga Job List Ready to copy Check Details Copies 07 11 2008 11 01 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 6 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next two screens that appear The Basic screen appears again The paper size for the bypass tray is set x Reminder f paper other than the specified paper size is loaded a paper misfeed may occur since the paper size is not automatically detected 7 2 3 Specifying a non standard paper size Custom size settings If paper other than standard size paper is loaded into the bypass tray it will be necessary to enter the paper size 1 In the Basic screen touch Paper Copies
499. shing status to the preview image 3 Scroll bar If the preview image is enlarged use the scroll bar to scroll up or down or to the left or right of the image 4 Zoom Enlarges or reduces the preview image For details refer to Zoom on page 4 10 5 Page Rotation Rotates the preview image by 180 degrees For details refer to Page Rotation on page 4 10 6 View Finishing Applies the finishing state to the preview image Touching View Finishing again cancels the finishing preview For details refer to View Finishing on page 4 11 7 Change Setting Settings for the scanned originals can be changed For details refer to Change Setting on page 4 12 8 View Status View Pages Switches the Preview screen between the status view and the page view Images can be rotated and settings can be changed in View Pages Loading of the image is finished in View Status bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 9 4 Additional copy operations Zoom In Zoom the preview image can be enlarged to check the original in detail By touching or the zoom ratio can be changed between the full size or at a size of 2 4 or 8 times the normal size Use the scroll bars in the right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of the image 1 PrintWait Page Rotation Rotate current page Select page s to rotate 4
500. sion 2 1 9 1 Introduction Note The machine illustrations shown in this manual can vary and depend on the machine configuration 1 3 Descriptions of originals and paper The descriptions used in this manual for originals and paper are explained below Whenever original and paper dimensions are mentioned in this manual the value shown as Y in the illustration refers to the width and the value shown as X refers to the length Lengthwise Ga If the width Y of the paper is shorter than the length X the paper has a vertical or portrait orientation indicated by Ga Crosswise W If the width Y of the paper is longer than the length X the paper has a horizontal or landscape orientation indicated by 1 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Introduction 1 1 4 User manuals This machine is provided with printed manuals and PDF manuals on the User manual DVD 1 4 1 Printed manual Quick Guide Copy Print Fax Scan Box Operations This manual contains operating procedures and descriptions of the most frequently used functions allowing the machine to immediately be used In addition this manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed for safe use of the machine Be sure to read this manual before using the machine 1 4 2 Introduction to the user manual DVD The user manual DVD is included with this machine In the initial screen select the user manual to be viewed
501. sired touch Change Pos Delete and then change the arrangement of the text To change the arrangement order touch Change Position select the repeating stamp text to be moved and then touch either Up or Down Change Position screen 1 Job List T Select the Stamp Repeat you wish to change Copies t see position and then touch Up or Down 1 plication gt Stamp Repeat gt Change Position Delete geYecEaPer 100 0 Used Space Select Preset Stamp Date Time a Insert Space 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To add a space to the repeating stamp touch Insert Space Touch either Up or Down to move the round mark that appeared beside the specified repeating stamp type and then touch Insert Insert Space screen Job List S Wpl ownl keys to move cursor to where Copies ou wish to insert a space and touch Insert 1 plication gt Stamp Repeat gt Change Position Delete SeYecpPer 100 0 Used Space Selec Preset Stamp Date Time Down 8 Change Position Serial Number Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 77 Application functions To delete the repeating stamp text touch Delete and then touch the button for the repeating stamp text to be deleted Delete screen Job List elect Stamp Repeat to delete Copies lication gt Stamp Repeat gt Change Position Delete AEA
502. specified page is printed on the front side of the next page In addition the specified page can be printed on different paper Q Detail A maximum of 30 pages can be specified to be printed on the front side of the paper within an original of up to 999 pages n double sided originals one double sided page is considered to be two pages one for the front and one for the back 8 2 3 E 4 7 AQ g gt AGA R R ae Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for the copy have the same size and orientation bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 Foran original that exceeds 100 pages refer to Scanning the original in separate batches Separate Scan setting on page 3 11 Touch Application and then touch Sheet Cover Chapter Insert To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions press the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled Job List auyeckerer 100 0 Check Detai Ready to copy Basic original setting Bj Z Sheet covers Chapter Insert 4 Of Page Margin A Image Adjust original Type _ Neg Pos Reverse 4 75 E Stamp Composition 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory LUUA 4 Book Copy Repeat 4 Save in User Box A Booklet
503. splay Setting button appears to allow specifying the default settings of the copy and fax scan operations in the Enlarge Display mode Setting the Touch Panel Adjustment function If the touch panel buttons do not respond correctly the position of buttons in the touch panel may not be correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sensor and may need to be adjusted 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen refer to Displaying the accessibility setting screen on page 4 27 2 Touch Touch Panel Adjustment or press the 1 key in the keypad N Use the menu buttons or A keypad to make a selection Accessibility Setting Touch Panel Adjustment Key Repeat Tnte 5 T Starty me rval i Confirmation A Auto Reset Confirmation ono ee N Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 27 4 Additional copy operations The Touch Panel Adjustment screen appears 2 Why does the machine not respond when Touch Panel Adjustment is touched The touch sensors are not aligned on the touch panel 1 gt Press the 1 key in the keypad Touch the four check points making sure that a sound is produced with each Touch Panel Adjustment Adjust the position of keys on touch screen Touch 4 check keys located on corner and pres
504. ss the Reset key The horizontal position of the punched holes is adjusted If no adjustment of the horizontal position of the punched holes was necessary in step 6 this completes the procedure Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy Check the print result Check that the horizontal position of the punched holes was adjusted f more adjustment is necessary repeat steps 6 through 9 12 54 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 6 6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment The horizontal position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted 6 Note Punch Unit Horizonal Position Adjustment appears only if optical Z folding unit is installed For details on the Punch settings refer to Punching holes in copies Punch settings on page 3 74 Before making any adjustments use a Punch setting to print a sample copy Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 Touch 1 System Settings The System Settings screen appears Touch 7 Expert Adjustment The Expert Adjustment screen appears Touch 5 Finisher Adjustment The Finisher Adjustment screen appears Touch 6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment The Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adj
505. ss the Reset key All changes to the settings are canceled Copies Job list Ready to copy Sefece 100 0 Oo A Page Margin Image Adjust 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Image Adjust screen appears 8 44 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 3 Select the image adjusting method To cancel the Setting touch No Job List The original image will be copied on to Copies selected paper according to settings EFA geYece 100 0 Original Size i B z Auto Check Details 06 19 2008 11 23 Memory 100 4 Check the original size and then touch OK Ifthe original size cannot be detected automatically or to specify the original size touch Original Size and then specify the original size from any of the screens list Ready to copy copies Application gt Image Adjust gt Original Size A4 D 100 0 Custom Size Check Details 25 08 2008 09 14 Memory 100 Job List Use the keypad to type in the document size Copies Application gt Original Size gt Custom Size A4 D 100 0 Check Details 25 08 2008 09 15 Memory 100
506. such as that written with a pencil The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker making it easier to read The following procedure describes how to select an Original Type setting bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 59 Basic copy operations 3 9 2 To select an original type setting 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Inthe Basic screen touch Original Type J Ready to copy copies Check Job Original Setting Original Type Application Density Duplexs Backgr6und Combine Density j Auto i a Background Auto Paper el Removal Select oiolololota imm 1 1 Hane Status a E lt amp OD al A N E E Finishing A Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF Derete Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Original Type screen appears 3 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original Job List Ready to copy Copies Basic Original Setting Application guyeckorer 100 0 P Check Details h E Dot Matrix Original 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 3 60 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 3 10 Selecting the density settings Specify the copy density and background density Adjust to the best density according to the status of the originals The following two density ad
507. t 03 03 2010 15 51 Memory 90 Reres cancel OK bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 43 2 Before making copies 5 Touch Login or press the Access key The Basic screen appears Access A 6 Make copies using the desired copy settings Z When you are finished printing press the Access key A message appears requesting confirmation to log off A Are you sure you want to log out Hane Status Account Name Group Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 OK Memory 100 8 Touch Yes and then touch OK The account track screen appears Q Detail The accounts can be managed in Administrator Settings mode available from the Utility mode Settings should be specified by the administrator If Account Track Input Method on the General Settings screen of Administrator Settings mode was set to Password Only log on is possible by only entering the password For details refer to User Authentication Account Track on page 12 33 For details on specifying account track settings refer to Selecting an authentication method on page 12 69 It is possible to specify so that the logging off confirmation screen does not appear For details refer to User Authentication Account Track on page 12 33 2 44 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 2 3 12 Controlling use of this machine with Authentication Unit Biometr
508. t Select desired button to change its setting Check Job Settings Application v ES isa gt Se ece 2 100 0 Watermark El Check Details 02 02 2008 10 Memory After checking the settings touch Close The Basic screen appears again Q Detail There are seven Check Job Settings screens The number of the currently displayed screen appears to the right of the screen title To display the previous screen touch KA Back To display the next screen touch Forward ES f the setting for a function has been changed from the default the button for that function appears with a colored box around it 4 1 2 To change the settings 1 2 Touch Check Job in the left panel and then touch Check Details Touch Ej Back or Forward E35 until the button for the function to be changed is displayed Touch the button for the function whose setting is to be changed The screen for specifying the setting appears Follow the appropriate procedure to change the setting bizhub 751 601 Version 2 4 5 Additional copy operations Printing a proof to check the settings Proof Copy Before printing a large number of copies a single proof copy can first be printed so that it can be checked This prevents copy errors from occurring 1 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 2 Select the desired copy sett
509. t appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings Settings for the following can be changed 1 Sided 2 Sided Density Background Original Type Binding Position Zoom Original Size Frame Erase Center Erase bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations To cancel changes to the settings touch Cancel user DEG Status COPY PrintWait Job Details 215 Change Setting waen Application 2 Sided Frame Erase A ee Center Erase Backar ound Binding Position Zoon Original Size 4 Original Type 15 07 2008 Memory 09 100 screen To delete the image data press the Stop key and then delete the job For details refer to Temporarily stopping scanning printing on page 3 91 4 Afterall original pages have been scanned touch Finish The amount of memory available can be checked beside Memory in the lower left corner of the user DENG Status copy Printing Scanning will be finished Job Details Printing will start Press Start Number of Sets Number of Originals 22 08 2008 Memory 15 34 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Basic copy operations 5 Press the Start key Ifthe Separate Scan Output Method parameter is set to Batch Print touch Print or press the Start key Hane Status COPY PrintWait Job Details Please wa
510. t door A WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine gt In order to reduce the risk of electric shock do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds A CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot gt In order to reduce the risk of burns do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 17 5 5 2 10 Troubleshooting Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit 9 Qo Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Open the right front door and the left front door Turn dial M1 and M2 to feed out the paper ya l T F Lower lever M4 and then pull out the ADU unit Raise cover M12 and then remove any paper 5 18 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 Raise cover M3 and then remove any paper Return the ADU unit to its original position Return lever M4 to its original position and then close the right front door and the left front door A WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine
511. t door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or punch scraps 5 Guide lever FN6 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 6 Guide lever FN7 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 7 Guide lever FN8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 8 Handle FN2 Grabbed when removing and inserting the unit 9 Misfeed clearing dial FN5 Turned when removing paper jammed in the Z folding unit 10 Guide lever FN3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 11 Misfeed clearing dial FN4 Turned when removing paper jammed in the Z folding unit 2 20 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 1 10 Post Inserter PI 504 No Part name Description 1 Post inserter control panel Operate when manually using the finisher See p 3 86 2 Lower tray paper guide Slide to fit the size of paper being loaded when loading with cover sheets 3 Lower tray Load with cover sheets 4 Upper tray Load with cover sheets 5 Upper tray paper guide Slide to fit the size of paper being loaded when loading with cover sheets 6 Upper unit release lever Raised to slide the upper unit to the left when clearing paper misfeeds bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 21 2 Before making copies 2 1 11 Shift Tray SF 602 2 1 12 Output Tray OT 505
512. t the paper gt WHY 5 36 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 Lower guide lever FN10 and then remove any paper Ifthe paper cannot be removed turn misfeed clearing dial FN7 to feed out the paper Sa 2 Return the stacker unit to its original position bizhub 751 601 Version 2 5 37 5 Troubleshooting When returning the stacker unit to its original position do not grab any part other than handle FN6 otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched Return the stacker unit to its original position Close the front door 5 2 19 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Shift Tray 16 Open the shift tray cover and then slowly remove any misfed paper Close the shift tray cover 5 38 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting 5 5 2 20 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Post Inserter 17 Q Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper misfeed indications on page 5 7 Raise the upper unit release lever and then slide the upper unit to the left Slowly remove any misfed paper Return the upper unit to its original position 5 2 21 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Z Folding Unit 20 This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may oc
513. t this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the right Top Select this setting if the original that is loaded has a binding margin at the top When the original length is 297 mm Auto Select this setting to automatically select the po or less When the original length is more than 297 mm sition of the binding margin If the original length is 297 mm or less a binding position along the long side of the paper is select ed If the original length is more than 297 mm a bind ing position along the short side of the paper is se lected amp Note f Auto is selected the binding margin is set at the top or at the left bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 29 3 Basic copy operations 3 4 8 To select a binding position setting 1 Position the original to be copied the machine In the Basic screen touch Original Setting For details on positioning the original refer to Feeding the original on page 3 9 When loading an original with a binding margin position the top of the original toward the back of Ready to copy Density Backgr6und Density Auto Background Auto paper Removal Select oiolololota mim TAAS D i HE Finishing a Separate Scan Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Original Setting screen appears Touch Binding Position Check Job m pmm SY i Original Setting Original Type Applicat
514. tails 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button For 1 One Touch User Box Registration press the 1 key in the keypad The One Touch User Box Registration screen appears JobList se the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection Ses Utility H re 3 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 amp Note To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode press the Utility Counter key Otherwise exit the Utility mode by touching Close in each screen until the screen for the Copy Fax Scan or Box mode appears 12 16 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 12 3 12 3 1 To exit the Utility mode press the Utility Counter key Or repeat touching Close until the Copy Fax Scan or Box screen appears With an optional i Option LK 107 installed in the machine the Utility mode can also be terminated by touching Close repeatedly until the screen specified in Application Key Settings appears Specifying user settings This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the Utility Counter key then touching User Settings System Settings Language Selection Description Default Setting Select the language of the touch panel message English Measurement Unit Settings Description Default Setting
515. tamp Compos ition A Save in User Box 4 Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Erase screen appears 3 Touch Non Image Area Erase then touch OK list Ready to copy copies Application gt Erase auyeck2Per 100 0 ic 4 Frame Erase y Center Erase Area Erase Check Details Mn 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key To cancel the Non lmage Area Erase function touch the key again 4 Specify any other desired copy settings 5 Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies 6 Press the Start key bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 55 Application functions 8 15 Printing the date time or page number on copies Stamp Composition functions The date time or page number can be added to copies at the specified location or a distribution number can be added when multiple copies are made The following Stamp Composition functions are available and can be combined Function Description Date Time Select a format and print the date or time on the specified pages Page Number Select a format and print page numbers starting with the specified page number Stamp e Preset Stamp Print copies with previously stored preset stamps overlapping pages e Registered Stamp Print copies with a stamp registered with the Copy
516. tations are different with the Auto Paper Select setting selected e Print The Zoom setting is automatically set and the copy is printed on paper of the specified size in the specified orientation e Delete Job The job is deleted and no copies are printed Separate Scan Output Select whether copies are printed as the original is being Page Print Method scanned or after the entire original has been scanned when scanning an original in separate batches or when scanning a multiple page document from the original glass e Page Print Printing of copies that can be printed begins while the original is being scanned e Batch Print Printing begins after all pages of the original have been scanned bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 21 12 Utility mode Parameter Description Default Setting Enlargement Rotation Select whether an image that exceeds 297 mm in the main Allow scanning direction left right direction on the original glass and ADF is rotated when the copies are printed e Allow An enlargement rotation is performed e Restrict The enlargement rotation is prohibited Auto Zoom Platen Select whether or not the Auto Zoom setting is automat OFF ically selected when a paper tray is selected except when the Auto Paper setting is selected while an original is placed on the original glass Auto Zoom ADF Select whether or not the Auto Zoom setting is automat ON ically selected when a pape
517. tative bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Specifications 6 2 4 Finisher FS 525 Item Description Name FS 525 Function Straight delivery sorted grouped Offset delivery sort and offset group and offset Staple delivery Output trays Main finishing tray Tray 2 sub finishing tray Tray 1 Offset width 30 mm Paper types Main finishing tray Tray 2 Sort group sort and offset group and offset Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m thick paper 91 g m to 200 g m thin paper 50 g m to 59 g m label sheets OHP transparencies trace paper tab paper spe cial paper high quality paper user paper recycled paper colored paper letterhead Staple Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m recycled paper high quality paper user paper letterhead special paper thin paper thick paper colored paper Sub finishing tray Tray 1 Sort group Plain paper 60 g m to 90 g m thick paper 91 g m to 200 g m thin paper 50 g m to 59 g m label sheets OHP transparencies trace paper tab paper Paper sizes Main finishing tray Tray 2 Standard sizes A3 cato A5 a Q 11 x 17 Gatto 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 1 0 Foolscap 2 8K 16K G Gy wide paper A3W ca to ASW H 11 x 17W to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2W W Custom sizes 182 mm x 148 mm to 314 mm x 458 mm 128 mm x 139 mm Sub finishing tray Tray 1 Standard sizes A3 Gato A5 U B6 A6 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Ga W 1
518. ted How can the job being printed be stopped gt Press the Stop key For details refer to Temporarily stopping scanning printing on page 3 91 2 32 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 Q Detail While the machine is warming up to begin printing after it is turned on using the Power auxiliary power key copy settings can be specitied and an original can be scanned to reserve a copy job After the machine has finished warming up the copies are automatically printed The print order can be changed or jobs can be deleted from the Detail screen of a job from the Current Jobs list in the Job List screen For details refer to Managing jobs on page 11 3 2 3 3 Turning off the machine Press the Power auxiliary power key Check that the touch panel is turned off Open the front door and then set the main power switch to O Close the front door XQ Reminder When the machine is turned off then on again with the main power switch wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the Power auxiliary power key while it is making copies or printing otherwise a paper misfeed may occur Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the Power
519. ted e No Pages are fed out without being shifted Date Time Settings Description Default Setting Specify the current date and time In addition the time zone can be set between 12 00 Time Zone 00 00 and 13 00 in 30 minute increments Daylight Saving Time Description Default Setting Select whether or not the machine s internal clock observes daylight saving time If No Yes is selected a setting appears so that the length of time for adjusting the current time can be set The length of time applied for daylight saving time can be set between 1 and 150 minutes in 1 minute increments 12 26 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 Weekly Timer Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Weekly Timer Select whether or not the weekly timer is used OFF ON OFF Settings Time Settings Specify the time of each day that the machine is turned on off Date Settings Specify the individual dates or the days of the week that the ma chine is turned on off Select Time for If the machine is turned off at a specific time for example dur No Power Save ing the lunch break the time for turning the machine off and on can be specified Password for Non If the machine is turned off with the weekly timer function select No Business Hours whether or not use is limited with a password In addition if Yes is selected specify the password that must be entered Q Detail f the weekly timer is set the
520. ted when Account Track is set to OFF If both user authentica tion and account track settings are specified Account Name amp Password cannot be selected Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track Select whether or not user authentication and group authentication are synchro nized This appears only when User Authentication is set to External Server Au thentication or ON MFP and Account Track is set to On When of Jobs Reach Maximum To stop the job being printed and begin printing the next job when the limit specified for account track or user authentication is reached touch Skip Job To stop the all jobs when the limit is reached select Stop Job Number of User Counters Assigned Adjust the number of users and accounts that can be registered Example When Number of User Counters Assigned is set to 50 950 accounts can be registered Ticket Hold Time Setting Specify the desired length of holding time between 1 and 60 minutes of Kerveros authentication ticket The holding time setting is applied when Active Directory is se lected as the authentication server type User Authentication OFF Public User Access Re strict Account Track OFF Account Track Input Meth od Account name amp pass word Synchronize User Authen tication amp Account Track Synchronize When of Jobs Reach Maximum Skip Job Number of User Counters Assigned 500 Ticket Hold Times Set tings 60 min
521. teuneaete 12 38 12 4 10 Sec rity SOTINGS si ieascceasdices setigadaszaasascquanacsantceatachsg aAa Aaea A EEO AAAA L Aad raaa AE aE seavuadtnsdaceag 12 38 12 4 11 License SettinGS aisinn oinera raaa aaraa deel aeaa aaia a A a aA a ra p a aaa aaaeaii aaa 12 41 Contents 6 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 4 12 12 4 13 12 5 12 6 12 6 1 12 6 2 12 6 3 12 6 4 12 6 5 12 6 6 12 6 7 12 6 8 12 6 9 12 6 10 12 6 11 12 7 12 7 1 12 7 2 12 8 12 8 1 12 8 2 12 8 3 12 8 4 12 9 12 9 1 12 9 2 12 9 3 12 9 4 12 9 5 12 9 6 12 10 12 10 1 12 10 2 12 10 3 12 11 12 11 1 12 12 13 1 13 2 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 2 3 13 2 4 14 1 14 2 14 2 1 14 2 2 14 2 3 14 2 4 OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting eeceeesceeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeseeeeeesneeseeneeeesaeeeesaeeeeeaaes 12 41 Displaying the Administrator Settings SCreen eeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneetesneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeenneersaeeees 12 42 Overview of weekly timer SettinGS cccccsseeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenenneeeeeessseaeeeeesseeneeeeeseeeneneees 12 44 Finisher ACjUStMenne soo o 2ccn cccnccc cencectecensctenecvesecbeccaccestoscennessecnenetessedeaceseeed concqeneetscecntconesenccecezetes 12 45 Center Staple Position Adjustment 0 eeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeseeeeseneeeennes 12 45 Half Fold Positi n enren aaeeea ed ee ee A ee 12 47 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment ccccccccccecsssssssssssssseeeeeececeeceeec
522. the integer and the fraction and then touch and to specify the size of the document If a decimal value is displayed in the screen press the C clear key and then use the keypad to type in the setting For details on switching between decimal and fraction values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range the message Input Error appears Type a value within the allowable range If the value was incorrectly entered press the C clear key to erase the value and then specify the correct value 8 36 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 7 Inthe Basic screen touch Paper and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper If settings were specified in the 2 4 8 Repeat screen touch Zoom in the Basic screen and then specify the zoom ratio setting 8 Specify any other desired copy settings To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key 9 Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies 10 Press the Start key bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 37 8 Application functions 8 10 Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF Page Separation function A page spread image scanned from the ADF can be divided into two separate images of right and left pages A page spread image can be
523. the main unit continue with step 6 If the insertion sheets are loaded into a tray of the post inserter continue with step 10 Under Insert Type touch either Copy or Blank If Copy is selected the original is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified page If Blank is selected the specified paper is inserted after the specified page 7 Touch Insert Paper The Insert Paper Settings screen appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 8 8 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets and then touch OK i T Set paper to be used for Copies dob List Insert Sheet 22 08 2008 17 07 Memory 100 9 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears 10 Touch Post Inserter Touch a button for a page number and then use the keypad to type in the number of the page where the paper is to be inserted Job List USe keypad to type location of inserted pages Copies Touch Sort to sort in ascending order Application gt Sheet Cover Chapter Insert gt Insert Sheet A4 D 100 0 1 4 Insert Paper BAG D Co is Es B ss e ea wi es a B Os ss Insert Type on J 25 08 2008 11 15 Memory 100 There are four Post Inserter screens Touch j or RA to display a different screen To arrange the page numbers in order starting with the lowest number touch Sort
524. the paper e When Auto Paper Auto Zoom is set If the Auto Paper setting or Auto Zoom setting is selected the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper e When Auto Zoom Reduce is set If the Auto Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is se lected the image is automatically rotated to fit the ori entation of the paper e When Auto Zoom is set If the Auto Zoom setting is selected the image is au tomatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper When Auto Paper Auto Zoom is set Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass Specify whether the copies of originals scanned from the original glass are output with the printed sides facing up or down e Face Down Copies are output with the printed sides facing down e Face UP Copies are output with the printed sides facing up Face Down amp Note Auto Zoom Platenj Auto Zoom ADF Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet and Automatic Image Rotation appear only if the Administrator Security Levels parameter in Administrator mode is set Print Jobs During Copy Operation appears only if the Administrator Security Levels parameter in Administrator mode is set to Level 2 12 22 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 When the Enlarge Display mode is selected the Default Enlarge Display Setting button appears to allow specifying the default settings
525. the size of each original page and print a copy on paper of the appropriate size when an original with different page sizes is loaded together into the ADF N Neg Pos Reverse Set this function to copy the original with the light and dark colored areas or the colors gradations of the image inversed Oo Offset Select this setting to separate copies that are fed out OHP Interleave Set this function to insert paper between OHP that are being copied This prevents OHP from sticking together Original Type Select the setting for the image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality Original Direction Select the setting for the orientation that the original is placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF P Paper Select settings for the type and size of paper to be printed on Preview Print image can be checked as a preview image before printing Proof Copy Press this key to print a single sample copy and stop the machine so that it can be checked before printing a large number of copies This prevents copy errors from occurring in a large number of copies Punch Select the setting to punch holes in the copies for filing Ss Save in User Box Temporarily saves the job on the hard disk so that it can later be recalled and used again Separate Scan Scans an original exceeding the maximum 80 pages that can be loaded into the ADF by scanning the original in separate batches The original can be scanned a
526. the user is logged off after a scan or fax is sent or after the copy original is scanned Do not log off Q Detail The Authentication Device Settings parameters are available only if the optional authentication unit is installed The authentication units of the IC card type and the biometric type cannot be installed at the same time f SSFC is selected for the IC card type specify company code and company identification code For details refer to the manual provided with the authentication unit Auth Acct Track Common Setting Parameter Description Default setting Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting Select whether or not to display the logging off confirma tion screen after pressing the Access key ON bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 35 12 Utility mode 12 4 5 Network Settings Parameter Description Network Setting TCP IP Settings NetWare Settings HTTP Server Settings FTP Settings SMB Settings LDAP Settings E mail Settings SNMP Settings AppleTalk Settings Bonjour Setting TCP Socket Settings WebDAV Client Settings Web Service Settings SSDP Settings Detail Settings IEEE 802 1x Authentication Set tings Specify settings for using the network For details refer to the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations Network Fax Settings Specify s
527. thentication unit is con nected to a USB port different from the one used when the driver was installed the Add New Hardware Wizard may start Use the same USB port used when the driver was installed If any message other than those listed above appears perform the operation described in the message If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed contact your service representative 5 46 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Troubleshooting Main messages and their remedies Message Cause Remedy Originals left on original glass The original was left on the original glass Remove the original from the original glass Paper of matching size is not availa ble Select the paper size Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in a paper tray Either select paper of a different size or load paper of a suitable size Load paper into the bypass tray Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in the bypass tray Load paper of the appropriate size into the bypass tray The original size cannot be detect ed Select the paper size 1 The original is not positioned cor rectly 2 An original with a non standard size or with a size too small to be de tected is loaded 1 Position the original correctly 2 Select the correct paper size The image will not fit on selected pa per Change the direction of the original The image does not fit in the paper
528. til the numbering reaches 1 For example if 1 was specified the numbers are printed starting with 1 on the third copied page To print multiple chapters specify the first page of each chapter using the Chapters function For details refer to Specifying pages to be printed on the front side Chapters function on page 8 17 To cancel the Page Number function touch No Select a setting under Page Number Type Touch Print Position and then select the printing position Copies Ready to copy pplication gt Page Number gt Print Position Print Position Fine Tune Top Left Top Right No Adjustment Botton Left eoon Botton Right Adjust Position 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Check Details To make fine adjustments to the printing position touch Adjust Position Select the desired direction under Left amp Right Adjustment or Top amp Bottom Adjustment touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction touch and to specify the adjustment amount and then touch OK If a decimal value is displayed in the screen press the C clear key and then use the keypad to type in the adjustment amount For details on switching between decimal and fraction values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 61 Application functions If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified va
529. time the screen is automatically changed to that for the mode given priority This is the System Auto Reset operation As the factory default the Copy mode screen is displayed after 1 minute Q Detail The mode screen that is displayed when the System Auto Reset operation is performed can be changed from the Utility mode For details refer to System Settings on page 12 26 2 3 6 Automatically conserving energy Low Power mode If no operation is performed for a specified length of time the touch panel goes off and the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy This is the Low Power mode The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode As the factory default the machine enters Low Power mode after 15 minutes To recover from Low Power mode Press the Power Save key Power Save CS O The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up The touch panel comes on again and after the machine has finished warming up it is ready to begin printing XQ Note As the factory default pressing the Power Save key causes the machine to enter Low Power mode Settings in the Administrator Settings mode can be changed to put the machine in Sleep mode instead For details refer to System Settings on page 12 26 The Low Power mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch panel 2 34 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Befor
530. tings Five non standard paper sizes can be stored Storing paper sizes that are used often allows the paper size to be quickly selected without having to re enter the setting 1 In the Basic screen touch Paper Ready to copy re Check Job m rmm Original Setting Original Type Application Hane Status emma Auto wageraooo Do Finishing a Separate Scan Auto Rotate OFF Job Details 2 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 The Paper screen appears 2 Select the button for the bypass tray Job List Ready to copy Copies 22 08 2008 13 39 Memory 100 3 Touch Change Tray Settings 7 14 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 4 Touch Custom Size Paper Type Paper Size The Custom Size screen appears 5 Specify the x and Y sides of the paper and then touch Store Make sure that X is selected touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction and then touch and to type in the length of side X 139 7 mm to 458 0 mm Make sure that Y is selected touch lt gt to switch between the integer and the fraction and then touch and to type in the length of side Y 100 0 mm to 314 0 mm If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen use the keypad to type in the setting For details on switching between decimal and fraction values refer to System Settings on page 12 17 If a decimal value is displ
531. tings from the Basic screen so that many settings can easily be specified Q Detail For details on switching the basic settings screen refer to Custom Display Settings on page 12 19 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 27 Before making copies amp Note If settings have been changed from the factory defaults the tab for the screen containing the changed settings appears framed with a green line The green line can be changed to another color with the Color Selection Settings parameter in the Custom Display Settings screen displayed trom the User Setting screen in Utility Counter mode 2 1 17 Icons that appear in the screen Icon Description Et Indicates that data is being sent from the machine regardless of the current mode Ec Indicates that data is being received from the machine regardless of the current mode If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred touch this button to dis play the warning screen again view warning Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance Touch this icon to display the message and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray Indicates that Enhanced Sec
532. tional copy operations Sefece 100 0 Check Details Job List S8Y80EPPe 100 0 Select desired button to change its setting Check Job Settings Original Setting Original Type 3 7 Original Direction Binding Position oa Auto Mixed Original OFF Original Type Texts Photo 02 25 2010 17 06 Memory 90 Select desired button to change its se Check Job Settings Application OHP Interleave Insert Image Chapters Image Repeat Book Copy ck Original Size AUTI Sel Tab ck Inse Neg Pos Reverse Page Separation Pis gt o Paper ect Original For Gita gt rt Sheet OFF Job List Se ece2 er 100 0 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Select desired button to change its setting Application Page Margin Image Adjust Frame Erase Center Erase Save in User Box ack Non Image Area Erase For vard Booklet A OFF 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 4 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Additional copy operations 4 Job List Select desired button to change its setting Check Job Settings 2 Application 6 7 we Eaa Date Time Page Number Stamp Setece r 100 0 Copy Protect Stamp Repeat Overlay fl check Details Registered Overlay Header Footer Banerar Number 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 v Job Lis
533. tions By specifying a setting to overwrite temporary data the area of the hard disk where image data is saved after printing or sending can be overwritten and the data can be erased This process prevents disclosure of image data on the hard disk Overwrite All Data Select this parameter to overwrite and delete all data on the Mode 1 entire hard disk in the specified patterns for mode 1 through mode 8 when returning the machine from lease or disposing the machine in order to prevent disclosure of the data For de tails on the settings refer to the User manual Box Opera tions Before performing this operation contact your service representative HDD Lock Password Specify the password for protecting data on the hard disk For details refer to the User manual Box Operations Format HDD Format the hard disk For details refer to the User manual Box Operations HDD Encryption Setting This setting appears when the optional Security kit is installed Specify an encryption passphrase to encrypt data in the hard disk For details refer to the User manual Box Operations When a setting is specified all data written to the hard disk is encrypted to protect it If the encryption key is changed the hard disk will be reformatted 12 40 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 Function Management Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Network Function Usage Settings Specify sett
534. tment Punch Resist Loop Adjust the hole punching shift for double sided 0 0 mm Size Adjustment printing and outputting cover pages between 16 0 mm and 16 0 mm 1st Z Fold Position Adjust the 1st folding position between 12 8 mm 0 0 mm Adjustment and 12 7 mm for each paper size 2nd Z Fold Posi Adjust the 2nd folding position between 12 8 0 0 mm tion Adjustment 3 mm and 12 7 mm for each paper size Tri Fold Position Adjust the folding positions between 12 8 mm 0 0 mm Adjustment J and 12 7 mm when printing with the Tri Fold setting 2 Position Staple Adjust the distance between 128 mm and 160 128 mm Pitch Adjustment 1 mm between staples when printing with the 2 Position Staple setting Staple and Center Staple amp Fold Post Inserter Adjust the sensor for detecting the size of paper Feeder loaded in the paper trays of the post inserter Size F Adjustment 4 Scanner Scanner Adjust Adjust the starting scan position between 2 0 mm 0 0 mm Area ment Leading and 6 0 mm at the leading edge of the original Edge with respect to the image scan direction Scanner Adjust Adjust the starting scan position between 3 0 mm 0 0 mm ment Centering and 3 0 mm at the left edge of the original with respect to the image scan direction Vertical Adjust If the scanned image is distorted stretched or 1 00 ment compressed the zoom ratio in the feed direction of the original in the scanner area can be adjusted between 2 0 and
535. to the Basic screen of Copy mode Scan Fax Settings Parameter Description Default Tab Specify settings for faxing and scanning For details refer to the Program Default User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations Address Book Index Default Shortcut Key 1 Shortcut Key 2 Default Address Book Default Address Type Copy Screen Parameter Description Default Setting Copy Operating Screen Select the screen that is displayed while printing No e Yes A screen for reserving a copy job appears while printing and if Program Next Job is touched a job can be reserved e No A copy job can be reserved while the Basic screen in Copy mode is displayed Fax Active Screen Parameter Description TX Display Specify settings for faxing For details refer to the User manual Network A Scan Fax Network Fax Operations RX Display bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 19 12 Utility mode Color Selection Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Select Color Select the color that indicates that the button is selected Green Left Panel Display Default Parameter Description Default Setting Left Panel Display Default Select the information displayed as the default in the left Job List panel e Job List A list of the jobs that are being performed and queued to be performed is displayed e Check Job Settings The c
536. tput paper size are the same When a paper size on which a part of the original image will be lost is selected XQ Note Punching or stapling can be carried out with Z folding before feeding the copies out Q Detail For details on setting the mixed size originals refer to Copying originals of mixed sizes Mixed Original setting on page 3 21 Finisher FS 524 FS 525 FS 610 and Z folding unit Item Description Paper weight 50 g m to 90 g m Paper size A3 a B4 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 140 8K Z folded amp stapled copies 5 sheets Paper capacity 30 sheets or less Can be specified when the output paper size is A3 Ga 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 m 8K Note Z folding multiple overlapped papers as one unit is not possible bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 83 Basic copy operations Q Detail When loading the originals into ADF load them in the orientation where the side to be folded is on the right When placing the original on the original glass place it in the orientation where the side to be folded is on the left In the Basic screen touch Finishing Copies I Ready to copy riginal Setting original Type Check Job Densitys Duplex Background Combine user e Status Density am Auto E J Background Auto paper Removal Select Cojo oo ofojala als 1 1 SE Finishing Separate Scan ol Auto Rotate OFF Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10
537. ts touch No Limit _ Maximum settings can be specified for the selected account Touch All Accounts to apply the settings to all accounts a Administrator Settings gt Edit gt Max Allowance Set Agggune All Accounts Utility Total Allowance Administrator Settings Account Track ME o Registration 1 9999999 Edit 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch All Accounts to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered accounts Touch All Accounts touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears in order to display a message and apply the settings to all accounts At this time do not turn off the machine with the main power switch 13 Touch OK The maximum number of prints allowed is set 14 Touch OK To delete the selected account information touch Delete 12 82 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 12 10 2 Account Track Counter The following data for each account can be checked Copy Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy and print operations Total Total number of printed pages Max Allowance Limits specified during account registration for the number of pages Large Size Total number of pages printed on large sized paper Copy This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy operations Total Total number of copied pages Large Size Total number of pages copied on la
538. ttings 11 Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies 12 Press the Start key bizhub 751 601 Version 2 8 9 8 Application functions 8 3 Inserting different paper into copies Insert Sheet function Different paper such as colored paper can be inserted for specified pages in the copies There are settings Copy and Blank for selecting whether or not the inserted pages are printed When the settings are combined with single sided copying or double sided copying the copies are printed as shown below If Copy is selected the original is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified pages When page 2 is specified Finishing Description Single sided copies The specified paper is inserted for the 2nd sheet of the copy and the 2nd sheet of the original is copied onto it Double sided copies The back side of the 1st sheet of the copy is left blank the specified paper is inserted for the 2nd sheet of the copy and a double sided copy of the 2nd and 3rd sheets of the orig inal are printed onto it Copy 6 1 i REPORT 1 1 ay x p Ra yi If Blank is selected the specified paper is inserted after the specified page When page 3 is specified Finishing Description Single sided copies The specified paper is inserted as the 4th sheet of the copy Double sided copies The back side of the 2nd sheet of the copy is left blank and the sp
539. ttom plate lowering button 4 Trailing edge stopper Secures the trailing edges of the paper to be loaded 5 Large capacity tray front Opened when clearing paper misfeeds door 6 Tray bottom plate lower but Pressed to lower the bottom plate in the paper tray when loading paper ton 2 10 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 2 1 5 Large Capacity Unit LU 406 x Reminder Do not climb on or place objects on this unit to prevent any damage Large Capacity Unit LU 406 No Part name Description 1 Upper cover Opened when loading paper or clearing paper misfeeds 2 Lateral guides Secures the sides of the paper to be loaded 3 Tray bottom plate Raised as the paper is used Lower by pressing the bottom plate lowering button 4 Trailing edge stopper Secures the trailing edges of the paper to be loaded 5 Large capacity tray front Opened when clearing paper misfeeds door 6 Tray bottom plate lower but Pressed to lower the bottom plate in the paper tray when loading paper ton bizhub 751 601 Version 2 9 11 Before making copies 2 1 6 Finisher FS 524 Punch Kit PK 504 PK 505 mow q bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Befor
540. ttons or keypad to make a selection Administrator Settings gt User Auth Account Track gt Authentication Device Set Utility 1 General Settings 4 2 Logoff Settings 2 Administrator Settings User Authentication Account Track 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 T Select whether or not the user is logged off when scanning of the document is finished after the user has logged on to this machine pecify the settings for logging off after document scanning is complete R ministrator Settings gt Authentication Device Settings gt Logoff Settings utility Administrator Settings Comor TI BaEhentication Account Track Authentication Device Settings 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 8 Touch OK 9 Touch Close and then touch Close in the next screen that appears bizhub 751 601 Version 2 13 7 13 Authentication Unit Biometric Type AU 101 13 2 2 Registering users There are two methods for registering users e Connecting the authentication unit to the machine and registering directly from the machine Connecting the authentication unit to a computer and registering using Data Administrator Q Detail Registered user data is stored on the hard disk of the machine If the user authentication method on the machine is changed or the hard disk is reformatted the registered user data is erased Registering from the control panel of this machine 1 From t
541. uch the button for the desired setting The public user authentication method is set Q Detail Public User Access is not available if User Authentication is set to OFF To log on as a general user when Public User Access is set to On Without Login press the Access key to display the Basic screen User Registration The password number of prints allowed and function permissions can be specified for each user of this machine In addition if an authentication unit is installed on this machine the user s IC card or the vein patterns of their finger can be registered As an example the following procedure describes how to register a user with authentication performed by the machine YA total of 1 000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine VY lf Public User Access on the General Settings screen is set to Allow a public user is added Function limitations can be specified for the public user Y If Account Track on the General Settings screen is set to ON the number of users set for Number of User Counters Assigned can be registered Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 4 User Authentication Account Track The User Authentication Account Track screen appears Touch 2 User Authentication Settings The User Authentication Setting screen
542. uching Shift switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters numbers and uppercase letters symbols Use the keyboard or keypad to enter Copies the custom size name Press C to erase the entered Custom Size Name Change Settings for Selected Tray gt Store Custom Size gt Custom Size Name menory 1 02 26 Memory Use the keyboard or keypad to enter Copies the custom size name P C to erase the entered Custom Size Name Change S ngs for Selected Tr Store Custom Custom Name menory 1 15 4 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Appendix 15 15 1 1 Enlarging the keyboard The keyboard can be displayed larger so that it easier to read 1 While the keyboard is displayed touch Enlarge ON The keyboard is displayed enlarged Space Shift a Enlarge Aa 2 Tocancel the enlarged display and return the keyboard to its normal size touch Enlarge OFF while the keyboard is displayed enlarged amp Note The keyboard is used in the same way even when it is displayed enlarged bizhub 751 601 Version 2 15 5 15 Appendix 15 1 2 To type text gt Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared To type in uppercase letters or symbols touch Shift Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad The entered characters appear in the
543. ument spread such as a book or booklet the left and right pages can be separated and copied onto separate pages To copy a spread page of a spread document together on a single piece of paper without separating it select Book Spread To attach a front cover load the front cover Copying then each page spread in order for scanning To attach a front cover and a back cover load the front cover back cover then each page spread in order for scanning Search by Operation Copying Special Documents 9 Shortcut to Function 02 25 2010 17 36 Exit Close Henory 90 gt Touch Shortcut to Function to set the selected function Q Detail f you are viewing the Help screen of a different function from the one that is currently selected Shortcut to Function cannot be selected For example if you are in the Fax Scan mode Shortcut to Function on the Help screen for the Copy mode which is a different function from the Fax Scan mode cannot be selected Function Map screen Example Copy 5 Describes screen transitions Job List and levels L herp gt Function Hap gt cory Copy o is ap A chart of the available functions and settings are displayed in the function maps gt Select an item from the chart for the Help screen that you wish to view Q Detail There are 12 Function Map screens for Copy mode The top num
544. urity Mode is set to ON 3 ae708 Appears when a USB drive is connected 2 28 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 2 2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles In addition the control panel can be tilted to the left Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation 2 2 1 To adjust the angle of the control panel Pull the control panel release lever toward you to release the positioning lock Move the control panel to the desired position then release the lever bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 29 Before making copies To tilt the control panel to the left hold the bottom of the control panel and then tilt the panel to the left amp Reminder When tilting the control panel do not grab the touch panel or the control panel 2 30 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Before making copies 2 2 3 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power This machine has two power controls the main power switch and the Power auxiliary power key 2 3 1 Turning on the machine The main power switch turns on off all functions of the machine Normally the main power switch is turned on The Power auxiliary power key turns on off machine operations for example for cop
545. urrently specified copy settings are displayed Job Display Setting Select the job list information displayed in the left panel List Display e List Display A list of the jobs that are being performed and queued to be performed is displayed e Status Display The progress of the job being performed is displayed Search Option Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Uppercase and Lowercase Select whether or not to differentiate between uppercase Differentiate Letters and lowercase letters Search Option Screen Select whether or not to display Uppercase and Lower OFF case Letters setting in the advanced search 12 20 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copier Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Booklet ON when Select whether or not the Booklet function is selected au Auto Select Booklet Fold amp Staple tomatically when the Center Staple amp Fold setting is se lected This parameter is available only if optional finisher is installed Auto Zoom For Combine Booklet Select whether or not the preset zoom ratios are automati cally selected when the Auto Paper setting is selected and a combined copy setting or the Booklet function is selected e Auto Display Zoom Ratio The following zoom ratios are specified 2in1 Booklet 64 7 4in1 50 0 8in1 32 3 e Off The zoom ratio is not selected automatically Auto Display Zoom Ratio Auto Sort Group Selection Select whet
546. us Place the IC card on the authentication device enter the password and then press the Acce Password 02 02 21 Memory 2 Touch Login or press the Access key The user is authenticated and the Basic screen appears Check Job Density Background Hane Status ners ity Auto Background Renogal GEE eG000 Finishing Job Details 02 02 2008 10 10 ie 100 i oo NI Ready to copy Copies hal Setting Original Type i APE Auto Paper Select L 2 H I Separate Scan Duplex Combine A 1 1 O Auto Rotate OFF XQ Note The notification beep sounds while scanning The notification beep is canceled by touching Login or pressing the Access key to complete authentication This is a normal operation of the device f authentication fails many times the authentication data may not be registered correctly Therefore register the user again bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 23 14 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 14 2 4 ID amp Print function Print jobs sent from a computer are saved in the ID amp Print user box on this machine and can be printed after authentication is completed with IC card IDs This is called the ID amp Print function In addition documents saved in the ID amp Print user box can be checked and specified to
547. us printing multiple jobs the warning The output tray has reached its capacity Remove paper from the tray indicated by gt may appear even if the paper was removed from the output trays For details on multiple jobs refer to Multi job feature on page 11 3 Interrupting a print job resets the loading capacity of the output tray For details on the limitations of the loading capacity for the output trays refer to Specifications on page 6 3 Some settings cannot be used together For details on the settings that cannot be combined refer to Operations that cannot be combined on page 3 6 1 Press the Copy key to display the Basic screen in Copy mode 2 Position the original to be copied For details on positioning the original refer to page 3 9 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 3 3 3 Basic copy operations 3 Specify the desired copy settings D Auto 8Heee00 Job Details The factory default settings for this machine are listed below Density Auto Background Removal Standard Paper Auto Auto Paper Select Zoom Full Size 100 0 Duplex Combine 1 gt 1 Original Type Text Photo For details on selecting settings in the Original Setting screen refer to page 3 19 For details on selecting a Paper setting refer to page 3 36 For details on specifying a Zoom setting refer to page 3 39 For details on selecting the original and copy settings ref
548. ustment The vertical position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper size amp Note Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment appears only if optional Z folding unit is installed For details on the Punch settings refer to Punching holes in copies Punch settings on page 3 74 Y Before making any adjustments use a Punch setting to print a sample copy Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen refer to Displaying the Administrator Settings screen on page 12 42 2 Touch 1 System Settings The System Settings screen appears 3 Touch 7 Expert Adjustment The Expert Adjustment screen appears 4 Touch 5 Finisher Adjustment The Finisher Adjustment screen appears 5 Touch 4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment The Punch Unit Vertical Position screen appears gt Select a paper size and then use 1 keys to specify the adjustment Administrator Settings gt Finisher Adjustment gt Punch Unit Vertical Position Paper Size Adjust Value Test Pattern output A 06 19 2008 17 02 Memory 100 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed touch j and EH until the desired paper size is displayed bizhub 751 601 Version 2
549. ustment screen appears f Use the keys to specify the adjustment Administrator Settings gt Finisher Adjust gt Punch Unit Horizontal Position Utility Administrator tt ings Expert Adjustment Finisher Adjustment Test Pattern Output 4 06 19 2008 17 00 Memory 100 amp Check the horizontal position of the punched holes To increase width A touch to increase the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 5 0 mm Each time or is touched the value is increased or decreased by one increment p Q O bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 55 Utility mode 12 6 7 To decrease width A touch to decrease the adjustment between 0 1 mm and 5 0 mm gt Touch OK To cancel the setting and select the default press the Reset key The horizontal position of the punched holes is adjusted If no adjustment of the horizontal position of the punched holes was necessary in step 6 this completes the procedure Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy Check the print result Check that the horizontal position of the punched holes was adjusted If more adjustment is necessary repeat steps 6 through 9 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment When printing with a Punch setting the angle of punched holes along the side of the paper can be adjusted Note Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment appears only if o
550. uthentication Account Track on page 12 33 XQ Note The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings If the Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track parameter is set to Synchronize complete user authentication and then log on by using the account track screen User authentication settings can be specified using the User Authentication parameters in Administrator Settings mode available trom the Utility mode Settings should be specified by the administrator bizhub 751 601 Version 2 2 41 Before making copies 2 3 11 Controlling each account s use of this machine Account Track If the account track settings have been specified by the administrator only users of registered accounts can use this machine In addition the number of prints produced with each account can be controlled This is account track Y When account track settings have been specified only users who enter passwords for specified accounts can use this machine vY _ If you do not know the account name or password contact your administrator YA total of 1 000 users and accounts can be registered 1 Touch Account Name eEnter Account Name and passwor touch Login or press the Ac Nane Status Account Name A Password Job Details 2 2008 10 10 Memory 100 If Password Only is specified in the Administrator Settings the following screen appears Touch
551. w to specify the setting for standard sized paper loaded into the tray 3 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen touch 5 Paper Type Size Settings For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen refer to To display the paper tray setting screen on page 7 21 For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4 refer to Loading paper into the bypass tray on page 2 55 Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection Utility gt System Settings gt Paper Tray Settings Utility 1 Se2ct8A settings e Sebesng vor Alert Paspiay Auto Tray Switch ON OFF 4 User Settings No Matching Paper in Tray Setting A system Settings S Print Lists Z ae Paper Type Size Settings 06 19 2008 11 07 Memory 100 The Paper Type Size settings screen appears 2 Touch the button for the tray 3 and then touch Standard Size 1 under Paper Size JobList Select paper type and size for each Tray Utility gt System Settings gt Paper Type Size Settings Paper Tray Paper Type Settings 1 A amp D oem 4 paper J User Settings 2 A4D Paper Size systen Settings ess EX 7 Paper Tray Settings 22 08 2008 15 05 Memory 100 3 Touch OK If standard sized paper is loaded into a paper tray the paper size is automatically detected bizhub 751 601 Version 2 7 23 Copy paper originals 7 3 3 To specify a setting for standard special size
552. wn Printer Settings Parameter Description USB Timeout Specify settings for registering print destinations For details refer to the User Network Timeout manual Print Operations Print XPS Error bizhub 751 601 Version 2 12 37 12 Utility mode 12 4 8 Fax Settings Parameter Description Header Information Specify settings for registering fax destinations For details refer to the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations Header Footer Position Line Parameter Setting TX RX Settings Function Settings PBX Connection Setting Report Settings Job Settings List Multi Line Setting Network Fax Settings Specify settings for using network faxing For details refer to the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations Note 8 Fax Settings appears only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available 12 4 9 System Connection Parameter Description Open API Settings Specify settings for registering network connections For details refer to the User manual Network Scan Fax Network Fax Operations Admin transmission The administrator can send the machine status to the service representative For details contact your service representative Prefix Suffix Automatic Setting Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number If Prefix Suf
553. x It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data even if a password has been specified Job List guyeckorer 100 0 Check Details Select desired User Box to save document or Copies enter the User Box number using the keypad S Search Public Bee Box os 7 _ooo000001 3 Box1 Enter User Box No 02 02 2008 10 10 a Cancel Memory 100 Touching Search User Box displays the Search User Box screen User boxes can be searched for by the first letter of their name Touch etc or the button that includes the first letter of the user box name to display a list of user boxes starting with the selected letter A user box can be selected from this screen Job List Select the User Box to save document Copies Search User Box Sefece 100 0 Check Details 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 Touch OK 8 94 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Application functions 6 touch Document Name Check the name of the document to be saved To change the name that is automatically specified Job List lect Sired User Box to save document You can also change the document name To print while saving touch Save amp Print
554. y 100 4 Touch 8 Authentication Device Settings then 1 General Settings then Card Authentication 5 Select the desired settings under IC Card Type and Operation Settings Specify the card authentication settings Select between Card Authentication or Card Password Authentication Administrator Settings gt General Settings gt Card Auth Settings IC Card Type Operation Settings Card Authentication Adninistrator ren Password Settings SSFC Authentication ee FCF Campus General Settings 02 26 2010 14 29 Memory 90 Under Operation Settings select the logon method after registration Card Authentication Logon is possible simply by positioning the IC card Card Authentication Password Logon is possible by positioning the IC card and entering the password For details on logging on refer to Logging on to this machine on page 14 22 6 Touch OK and then touch OK in the next screen that appears 14 6 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 14 7 8 9 Touch 2 Logoff Settings Use the menu buttons or keypad to make a selection _ Adninistrator Settings gt User Auth Account Track gt Authentication Device Set Utility 1 General Settings A 2 Logoff Settings Administrator Settings BaEhentication Account Track 02 0
555. y to highlight it Select paper type for Tray 1 Utility gt Paper Type Settings gt Paper Type special Paper BRASE Thin Paper E E E Letterhe Colored Paper User Paper 2 Paper Tray Settings aga la parer Tye rere Size Settings 06 19 2008 14 24 Memory 100 5 Touch OK to complete the setting To cancel the change touch Cancel 7 30 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Copy paper originals 7 4 7 4 1 Originals When making copies load the original into the ADF or position it on the original glass To copy originals that cannot be loaded into the ADF position them on the original glass Originals that can be loaded into the ADF There are two methods for using the ADF The machine will detect the original size automatically when the original is positioned in the ADF then select an appropriate paper size automatically by Auto Paper Select function There are limits on the types of original that can be positioned with each method e Normal method For originals of mixed sizes For Z folded original Normal method Item Description Original paper weight 50 g m to 200 g m Original size 100 mm x 139 7 mm to 297 mm x 431 8 mm Auto original size detect A3 Ga to A5 11 x 17 Ga 8 1 2 x 11 U Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets 80 g m Mixed Original Setting The fo
556. ying printing or scanning When the Power auxiliary power key is turned off the machine enters a state where it conserves energy Open the left front door and then set the main power switch to a hes Close the left front door Press the Power auxiliary power key Check that the touch panel is turned on Q Detail When the Power auxiliary power key is turned on the indicator on the Start key lights up in orange and a screen indicating that the machine is starting up appears After a few seconds the message Warming up Ready to scan appears on the touch panel and the indicator on the Start key lights up in blue indicating that a job can now be queued The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on the power switch is set to and before any setting is specified from the control panel or touch panel and those that are selected when the Reset key is pressed to cancel all settings specified from the control panel or touch panel The default settings can be changed For more details refer to Custom Display Settings on page 12 19 The factory default settings are the settings that were selected when this machine was sent from the factory amp Note A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the Power auxiliary power key is turned on For details refer to Scannin
557. ystem may become unstable Do not store the IC card within 40 mm of the card scanning area Settings of this machine Q Detail User authentication on this machine must be set for machine authentication XQ Note This device does not support external server authentication To combine account track settings with user authentication settings set Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track to Synchronize When you set Do Not Synchronize the ID amp Print function cannot be used 1 From the control panel of this machine touch 4 User Authentication Account Track on the Administrator Settings screen and then touch 1 General Settings 2 Set User Authentication to ON MFP and then touch OK For details on specifying settings for Public User Access and Account Track refer to Selecting an authentication method on page 12 69 Touch the button for the desired setting Administrator Settings gt User Auth Account Track gt General Settings Job Setting ON MFP Public User Access Restrict Account Track OFF External server Utility OFF Administrator Settings ys Authentication Account Track Ci el e 02 02 2008 10 10 Memory 100 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 14 5 1 4 Authentication Unit IC Card Type AU 201 3 Touch Yes and then touch OK A Are you sure you want to clear all data 02 02 2008 10 10 Memor
558. zed to adjust the distor tion of the copy image between 1 35 and 5 00 Horizontal Adjust If the copy image is distorted stretched or com 0 0 ment pressed the zoom ratio in the transverse feed di rection of the original can be adjusted between 1 0 and 1 0 2nd Side Adjust the zoom ratio for the back side of double sided copies for each No Selection Size paper tray Adjustment Adjust Ratio No Selection 0 1 0 2 0 3 12 28 bizhub 751 601 Version 2 Utility mode 12 Parameter Description Default Setting Finisher Center Staple Po Adjust the stapling position between 12 8 mm 0 0 mm Adjustment sition and 12 7 mm when printing with the Center Sta ple amp Fold setting Half Fold Posi Adjust the folding position between 12 8 mm 0 0 mm tion and 12 7 mm when printing with the Center Sta ple amp Fold setting Punch Vertical Po Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes 0 0 mm sition Adjustment 2 between 5 0 mm and 5 0 mm Punch Unit Vertical Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes 0 0 mm Position Adjust between 5 0 mm and 5 0 mm for each paper ment 3 size Punch Horizontal Adjust the horizontal position of the punched 0 0 mm Position Adjust holes between 5 0 mm and 5 0 mm ment Punch Unit Hori Adjust the horizontal position of the punched 0 0 mm zontal Position Ad holes between 5 0 mm and 5 0 mm jus

User's Guide Copy Operations

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents